Home

XLi Time & Frequency System

1. actsMaxCallPeriod OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 999 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is the maximum time in minutes the ACTS unit will wait between successful calls to the ACTS service acts 4 El actsPhoneNum OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is the phone number of the ACTS dial up service including any prefixes needed to reach an outside line or international dialing Prefixes are separated by a comma from the main phone number acts 5 El o 25 actsNumberOfCalls OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated GI DESCRIPTION Number of times the time server has called the ACTS dial up service weather the call was successful or not acts 6 actsGoodCalls OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Number of times the time server called the ACTS dial up service and successfully received the time acts 7 El actsBadCalls OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Number of times the time server called the ACTS dial up service and something was not right This variable is the sum total of all Ld XLi Time amp Frequency System 253 XLi man Iss
2. Configuring INPUT MODE and HQ TIME REFERENCE To display the INPUT MODE and HQ TIME REFERENCE configuration of the card send a command using the following format F123 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt C lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 123 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows N Option Bay Number 1 through 10 S ASCII character for Status Request C ASCII character for Configuration of Time Reference LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed for input strings a carriage return only For example enter F123 B3 C The XLi responds for example F123 B3 PRIMARY 1PPS 162 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To change the INPUT MODE and HQ TIME REFERENCE send a command using the following format F123 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SP gt C lt SP gt lt CONFIG gt lt SP gt lt REF gt lt LT gt where F ASCII character F 123 function number lt SP gt ASCII space character B ASCII character B to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 C ASCII character to denote Configuration of Time Reference lt CONFIG gt Option Board Configuration PRI SEC or STBY REF Option Board Reference 1PPS HAVE QUICK or HAVE QUICK 1PPS LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line fe
3. 188 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Figure 17 S1 has eight dip switch positions Lettering inverted for this illustration UI 7554321 o ENERO i _ OLLI To configure the card s settings refer to the following tables E1 Output Wave Shaping The E1 doesn t require output wave shaping BECAUSE E1 Output A E1 Output B 1 Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Do not use ON ON ON ON ON ON ON CEPT G 703 X X X X X X X X means that the setting is unimportant except that for either output all ON is not allowed E1 AIS Assertion and Output Signal Control on Major Fault Assert AIS and Turn Off Outputs S1 Position 8 OFF No AIS and Leave Outputs On S1 Position 8 ON Default Figure 18 JP 4 JP5 JP6 and JP7 Positions numbered 1 6 for this illustration JPS A305 dm JP XLi Time amp Frequency System 189 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Output Signal Frequency Selection Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Jumper Block JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 10 Mb s Pos 1 Pos 1 Pos 1 Pos 1 5 Mb s Pos 2 Pos 2 Pos 2 Pos 2 1 Mb s Pos 3 Pos 3 Pos 3 Pos 3 2048 Kb s Pos 4 Pos 4 Pos 4 Pos 4 8 Kb s Pos 5 Pos 5 Pos 5 Pos 5 64 Kb s Pos 6 Pos 6 Pos 6 Pos 6 Composite Clock is a factory configured option available on Output 1 Installation Disconnect power from the XLi Remove a blank panel from the rear of the XLi chassis by unscrewing the two screws securing
4. For pinouts and signal direction see FTM RS 422 Display Port on page 197 Please feel free to contact Customer Assistance See H Sales and Customer Assistance on page 295 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality 87 8090 This Parallel BCD module provides provides 42 lines of parallel BCD time data representing 100 s of days to units of milliseconds four time quality lines that provide an estimate of the time error and two data valid strobes Output Day of year time quality flags 1PPS strobe and 1KPPS strobe Outputs TTL LVTTL Levels 4mA source or sink Logic Low 0 4 V Logic High 2 4 V Qty 1 Connector Panel mounted female 50 pin D connector Physical Single high option bay CPU Aware Yes Compatibility Legacy XL DC Parallel BCD Millisecond Module 86 390 1 PPS STROBE This line goes to the high state between the second and 100 ns after the second It remains high for 500 ms 1 KPPS STROBE This line goes to the high state between the millisecond and 100 ns after the millisecond It remains high for 500 us 50 pin D MILLISECONDS CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT Table 4 Pin Output Pin Output 1 Ground 26 10 s of min 2 Not used 27 8 s of min 3 200 s of days 28 4 s of min 4 100 s of days 29 2 s of min XLi Time amp Frequency System 199 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Table 4 Pin Outpu
5. LF Line feed character For example to display the current hour format send F2 lt CR gt The XLi responds F2 D24 124 lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the hour format send F2 D12 124 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LE gt F3 Time amp Date Use function F3 to set the XLi system clock s time and date If the XLi is using GPS as its primary reference source setting F3 manually is unnecessary At startup the XLi synchronizes its time and date to GPS If the XLi is using IRIG is the primary reference source use F3 to set the year Some IRIG time code does not contain year information F3 prompts the user for the Time Mode the Date in mm dd yyyy format and the Time in hh mm ss format The hours in hh mm ss should be given using 24 hour notation e g 6 pm 18 00 TIME MODE selects which type of time Local Standard GPS UTC is being entered by the user The XLi translates the user entry into its equivalents in other types of time For example entering LOCAL 07 14 2002 15 47 10 in F3 shows up on the front keypad display as UTC 198 10 47 10 TIME MODE in F3 defines only the entry of time in F3 it does not control the type of time displayed or output by the XLi F3 s Time Mode should not be confused with F69 see F69 Time Mode on page 89 F69 controls the type of time displayed output on the front panel display F8 Continuous Time Once per Second F9 Time On Request and F90 Code Output
6. ntp 6 ntpSysLeap OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER noLeapWarning lastMinuteHas61Secs lastMinuteHas59Secs alarmCondition MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION This is a status code indicating 1 normal operation 2 a leap second to be inserted in the last minute of the current day 3 a leap 256 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H second to be deleted in the last second of the day or 4 an alarm condition indicating the loss of timing synchronization Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its leap indicator field set to ntpSysLeap ntp 7 ntpSysHostMode OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER Gl hos hos hos hos hos hos hos hos ModeIsReserved0 ModeIsSymmetricActive ModeIsSymmetricPassive ModeIsClient ModeIsServer ModeIsBroadcast ModeIsReserved6 ModeIsReserved7 so lt ON 0 ah ey OB C0 o AAA MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION The value of this variable indicates the mode the unit is NTP packet mode field ntp 8 ntpSysStratum OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEG MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION This integer 1 255 clock Note A primary T operating in Note this is the value of the time server s outgoing R CL 2259 indicates the st
7. 12 24 Hour Format on page 49 F3 Time Date If you re using IRIG time code as the primary reference source verify or update the current year in F3 If you re using GPS as the primary reference source you can skip this step See F3 Time amp Date on page 50 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST If needed set when Local time enters and leaves DST See F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode on page 84 F69 Time Mode Select the type of time shown on the front panel display and output by functions F8 F9 and F90 See F69 Time Mode on page 89 The four choices are as follows e UTC Coordinated Universal Time differs from GPS Time by the addition of leap second corrections to compensate for variations in the earth s rotation GPS time is derived directly from the GPS constellation and doesn t contain any leap second adjustments or other GPS to UTC corrections Standard Time is UTC plus a time zone offset For example Pacific Standard Time is UTC minus 8 hours Local Time is UTC adjusted by the standard time zone offset and the daylight saving time adjustment if in effect XLi Time amp Frequency System 25 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Using the Command Line Interface The next two sections show how to connect to the XLi using the serial and network ports Both the serial port and the network port give the user access to the XLi s command line interface While the keypad display interface
8. F8 Continuous Time Once per Second on page 56 F9 Time On Request on page 58 F90 Code Output Configuration on page 116 le e Select between the following types of time e UTC Coordinated Universal Time differs from GPS Time by the addition of leap second corrections to compensate for variations in the earth s rotation e GPS Time is derived directly from the GPS constellation and doesn t contain any leap second adjustments or other GPS to UTC corrections Standard Time is UTC plus a time zone adjustment For example Pacific Standard Time is UTC minus 8 hours Local Time is UTC plus a time zone and a daylight saving time adjustment The factory setting is UTC Note A time error can be created when switching to GPS time when the reference is Time Code non IRIG 1344 IRIG 1344 resolves this problem Related functions F1 Time Zone Offset on page 48 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode on page 84 F8 Continuous Time Once per Second on page 56 F9 Time On Request on page 58 le jo Te je Command Line Local Time modifies UTC time to include the Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time adjustments if enabled by the user Use the following format to display the time mode currently used F69 lt CR gt The XLi responds using the following format F69 lt SEP gt lt TT gt lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 89 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII cha
9. FUNCTION prompt 3 Enters 3 as the function number ENTER Opens Function 3 displays the first screen TIME MODE LOCAL ENTER Displays the second parameter DATE TIME lt mm gt lt dd gt lt yyyy gt 05152002 Enters May 15 2002 as today s date replace ENTER Displays DATE TIME ENTER XLi asks SAVE CHANGES YES ENTER Selects YES saves the changes and displays the Status Display Command Line Interface To open a command line session connect to the serial or network port using a terminal or a terminal emulation program on a PC Consult 5 Function Reference on page 45 for information on the function commands Logging In Two user names are available for logging in to the network port s command line interface operator and guest The serial port s command line interface does not require the user to log in Operator Login The Operator has full privileges to change the settings in all the XLi s functions and to perform firmware updates As shipped you can log in as Operator using User Name operator Password janus To maintain security change the Operator password at installation If you are logged in as operator the only command line interface function you cannot perform is changing the Guest password Guest Login Use the guest login to view function settings As shipped you can log in as guest using User Name guest Password ttm To maintain security change t
10. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This Internet communications protocol is used for the status and control of remote network devices Numerous IANA standards committees starting in 1990 and continuing to day define this protocol Trap or Trap Message A packet issued from an SNMP Management agent to an SNMP Management station The message is intended to relay and important even that occurred within the agent that requires attention or notification Configuring and Testing SNMP This section outlines the procedure to perform verification tests on the SNMP component of the XLi product Materials Needed e XLi unit e PC with HP OpenView installed HP OpenView Configuration Create the Network Map 1 Power on the XLi unit Note The HP OpenView PC and the XLi unit should be on the same subnet 2 Log on to the PC with HP OpenView installed as the Administrator user 3 Start the HP OpenView Network Node Manager application 4 Select the menu item Map gt New 5 In the Name field enter XliTestMap 6 Click the Next button 3 times and the Finish button 1 time to complete the Map definition and open the Map 278 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Load the TrueTime Enterprise MIBs 1 4 Select the menu item Options gt Load Unload MIBs SNMP A dialog box titled Load Unload MIBs SNMP will pop up In the dialog box click the Load button to load the MIBS tr
11. amp nroNOuvuna 3A LNGOI NOLUSOd ONOOJSE 100 enco Np GA TO MONO i l Junot 33S 2H MOL Hali O3LYINGON 1YOtd AL 3 1383 9 sen 939 esan 93 oono l Ll Y y id d sd 1d tg y T sl GOMODIS AUYNIG LHDIVEL VY AY OY MOS AYO 40 3MIL SNOLLONN FOWNOO SONO23S sava SUNOH SILNNN SONOD38 7 WNOUVES UV3A 3O 311 098 amu NO a 06 08 0L 09 os or 0 oz 0i 0 GNOO3SITIIWN LNQYOO X3ONI SQNO23S l 0 3NVuU3 INIL XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 290 ime Zones World Map of T F 1 051 1 071 4 06 3 09 4 0 0 M 06 MOTI A081 pardope Aje32j eun pieputis ON aoifo IDUDU Y jpounow WH Aq popiduo S pi LN 0 6 sdo 4317 uimjunojy cy ouiino dej u n WN 6 0 U NW 8 ad 0t Ti T b 5 d I T 089 ad O OCO M 9 d Ol A 0E8S d wy wey N moonamu sajd awos ur day st Sun y paepuejs jo ooueApe ur moy auo pensn aun sawung oum j SurAeS 1451 Ae oyeuirxoadde ode souepunoq ouoz 1007 Lid y 01 pojoo1107 o qei Woy INJLA DI PSIOATU our prepuejs SANOZ AWIL AYVANV LS e e Line ernational Date Line International Date Lin Int we Z e 291 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H XLi Time 8 Frequency System This page was intentionally left blank 292 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H G Part Numbers Standard Chassis Model XLi 1U Chassis
12. 100 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H If the reference source is GPS Time Error should be set to 350 nS For other reference source types or for a mix of GPS and other reference source types set Time Error to 15 uS Note The accumulated error that drives this indicator is close to but not the same as the predicted worst case time error given by F13 Time Error on page 61 Alarm LED Blink Alarm LED Blink is a setting that enables or disables the Alarm Status LED from blinking while it is green or yellow If the Alarm Status LED is red it remains on continuously regardless of the Alarm LED Blink setting Some users disable Alarm LED Blink to ensure that the color of the Alarm Status LED is visible without interruption Timeout and Timeout Delay Status OK or Fault Timeout and Timeout Delay add the dimension of time to the Time Error indicator With Timeout disabled a Time Error fault triggers an alarm immediately With Timeout is enabled a Time Error fault starts counting down the number of seconds specified by Timeout Delay When the Timeout Delay countdown finishes the Time Error fault triggers an alarm Note the Alarm Status LED on the front panel turns amber while the Timeout Delay is counting down If the Time Error fault returns to an OK state during the Timeout Delay countdown the countdown clears A new Time Error fault starts the Timeout Delay countdown from the beginning In
13. A popup titled Browse MIB will appear 3 In the Browse MIB popup descend the MIB tree to iso gt org gt dod private gt enterprises gt trueTimeEnt gt products gt xli gt xliSystem gt systemFault gt systemFaultConfig gt systemFault ConfigMasks by clicking the symbol next to each entry 4 In the Browse MIB popup select the maskPlISynthesizer entry In the MIB Instance field type 0 In the SNMP set value field type 1 Click the Set button 280 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Select the menu item XLi gt Configuration In the popup xliconfig verify that the maskPllSynthe In the Browse MIB popup select the maskPllSynthesizer entry In the MIB Instance field type 0 Select the menu item XLi Configuration In the popup xliconfig verify that the maskPllSynthe Repeat steps 4 9 in turn for each additional entry under systemFaultConfigMasks Cc e Cc 9 14 30 09 192 168 11 218 XLi system ts xli alarm ts xli alarm ts xli alarm ts xli alarm trap talpAddr 0 IpAddress taTimeStamp 0 OctetString taCode 0 Integer taDescriptorStr 0 5 Verify that a popup appears saying Set has completed successfully 6 sizer entry is set to disabled T In the SNMP set value field type 2 Click the Set button 8
14. PIN OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 9 80 s of usec 22 GND 10 100 s of usec 23 GND 11 200 s of usec 24 IMPPS STROBE 12 400 s of usec 25 800 s of usec 13 NOT USED TIME QUALITY INDICATORS The XLi provides an estimate of the worst case error based on the user entered Time Quality Flags This is indicated by each of the four time quality lines changing to the high state in turn as the worst case error exceeds the threshold for that line The time error may be determined from the table below The first column shows the pin number of the rear panel 50 pin connector The second column shows the time error threshold at the transition from low to high on that pin TIME QUALITY INDICATORS Table 8 PIN State Threshold 50 Goes High First 14 Goes High Second 15 Goes High Third 17 Goes High Fourth PIN ESTIMATED WORST CASE 50 GOES HIGH First Threshold 14 GOES HIGH Second Threshold 15 GOES HIGH Third Threshold 17 GOES HIGH Fourth Threshold 204 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ERROR ALL PINS LOW Less than First Threshold When time is again synchronized the time quality lines will again go low as the unit re corrects to the proper time At initial turn on or after a power failure the time quality lines will remain in the high state until the clock has synchronized The time quality lines can therefore be used as read inhibit lines to guarantee a given timing
15. page 80 F60 GPS Receiver Satellite List page 81 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode page 84 F67 Manual Leap Second Entry F69 Time Mode page 89 E71 Oscillator Statistics page 91 F72 Fault Status page 92 F73 Alarm Control Status page 94 F74 Clock Source Control page 107 F77 PTTI Output F78 Parallel BCD Output F90 Code Output Configuration page 116 E100 Network Port Configuration amp XLi Firmware page 117 F100 EA Ethernet Address F100 IP IP Address F100 SM Subnet Mask F100 G Gateway F100 IC Network Port Settings F100 BASET 10 100 BASE T F100 L LOCK UNLOCK Remote Lockout F100 L Remote Lockout F100 ST Self Test Status F100 BH Burn Host F100 BUB Burn BootLoader 46 K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N SW K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N SW K N SW K N SW K N S W K N S K N S K N S K N S N S 5 N S 5 Operate specific GPS receivers in Auto Mode for static applications or in Dynamic Mode for mobile applications View a list of current and tracked satellites Schedule when DST starts and ends Local time only Manually schedule in section of leap seconds Set the type of time GPS UTC Standard Local displayed on the front panel of the XLi Display the XLi oscillator s phas
16. 0 SEC 16 RE 0 SEC 17 RE 0 SEC 18 RE 0 SEC 19 RE 0 SEC 20 RE 0 EADY lt CR gt lt LF gt 92 8001 bin WITH SIZE 803016 TO PARTITION 1 SI T XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ECTOR 10 241 SEC 21 RE 0 SEC 22 RE 0 FLASH SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED CRC32 0x2D9A260A Then do the same for the file system fs file F100 bh IP address relative path gt lt file fs gt For example F100 bh 192 168 49 120 192 8002 fs The XLi responds BURN HOST IS READY lt CR gt lt LF gt Then enter F100 bf The XLi responds K URNING FILE 192 8002 fs WITH SIZE 2096640 Bytes 94 95 96 T T Q O B S S S He pH Q Q Sec 125 FILE SYSTEM FLASH BURN COMPLETED Do the same for the FPGA bin file F100 bh IP address relative path gt lt file bin gt For example F100 bh 192 168 49 120 184 8000 bin The XLi responds BURN HOST IS READY lt CR gt lt LF gt Then enter F100 bufp The XLi responds BURNING FILE 184 8000 BIN WITH SIZE 97652 TO PARTITION 3 SECTOR 10 FILE 97652 BYTES PARTITION 393204 BYTES 24 used SEC 10 RE O SEC 11 RE 0 E LASH SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED When the burning process is complete enter K space space L space L as shown here F100 KILL The K I L L command reboots your unit
17. 214 2048 kbit s Balanced RS 422 levels into 120 Q Phase locked to the clock 10MHz Four outputs Two Male 9 Pin D Single high option bay Yes P3 Male 9 pin D subminiature 3 RS 232 Serial Talker only 4 E1 Out 1 RS 422 Levels 6 E1 Out 2 RS 422 Levels 7 E1 Out 2 RS 422 Levels 8 E1 Out 1 RS 422 Levels XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Connector P4 Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 3 N C used for Second Serial Talker only 4 E1 Out 3 RS 422 Levels 6 E1 Out 4 RS 422 Levels T E1 Out 4 RS 422 Levels 8 E1 Out 3 RS 422 Levels SERIAL TALKER PORT Serial talker port is a re broadcast of the standard XLi serial port It provides two RS 232 and four RS 422 serial transmit ports on two 9 pin D connectors Interface Balanced RS 422 and RS 232 Qty Two RS 232 and four RS 422 outputs Connector Two Male 9 Pin D Physical Single high option bay 9 pin D specifications Connector P3 Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 2 N C 3 RS 232 Serial Output 4 Out 1 RS 422 Level Serial Output XLi Time amp Frequency System 215 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 6 Out 2 RS 422 Level Serial Output T Out 2 RS 422 Level Serial Output 8 Out 1 RS 422 Level Serial Output 9 TST T1 Co
18. 271 XLi System Group Nep MNA ed S Apa ME eA Eae y qua A UR 273 The XL Fault GFOUD rer et CE wb ur es bI dE b ES 274 The XLi System Status Group 4 coz ive eR EAE ee EL S ER 275 XLi Maimt ard AAA vetu ec te AR NS Wel Rees 276 RIEMLCO PORC EUM 276 Futurs Expansion sus see x RU qe Nes deed RO RR a 276 Glossary of SNMP Related Terms ooooooooooromrmoomrrrr s 277 Configuring and Testing SNMP 00 A a V 278 Materials Neded ssi enms gueeh veo ta pm AE Plut ua 278 HP OpenView Configuration 2426 44 4saneed ara bance 278 MEPCONMMOUTANON a oiu mop ares reads ay 280 Test Broced te so Sra RUP ETIN E V dea PES VIRG UR Habd 280 D Network Time Protocol NTP eee nnn 283 Leap Indicator 44 ais cei S exeo au ences Qa RU NER ANA exo e CR UR RR 283 Editing titp cont socis he oe hoi Sa E POL eps ed edere at Gok 283 Editing MD5 keys on the NTP Server 4s ese ea x Re OR VR es 284 Editing MDS keys on the NTP Client 22r ad da R EXTA E 285 E Time Code Formats ociosos ladra 287 OVINA Fern d HOS AE e RUM eas ag Fabr pd ord bea 287 d dre rr 287 Inroduction k caria Sad Ru adc C Wade Qe tias we 287 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H IRIG Code Format 287 IRIG B Time Quality Flags Ci er ehh aden eR ao Re ers 288 XLi IRIG Time Code Inp t OuUtputiu ir ese ede id 288 NASA 36 f oen t esr rumes tdeo e LRL Mt Ps x ter e ers d AIDE E E oes 289 Introduction 2a sss ete eget hune ee e ue Paetus
19. Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H actsNoOnTimeMark OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The reply from remote modem had no on time mark possibly due to line noise 2 acts 15 El END xliMainCard SMIv2 mib XliMainCardMib DEFINITIONS BEGIN IMPORTS OBJECT TYPE MODULE IDENTITY Counter32 FROM SNMPv2 SMI DisplayString FROM SNMPv2 TC xliMainCardFROM XliMib xliMainCardModule MODULE IDENTITY LAST UPDATED 02052000002 ORGANIZATION SYMMETRICOM INC CONTACT INFO Technical Support DESCRIPTION Symmetricom XLi Enterprise MIB xliMainCard 0 ntp OBJECT IDENTIFIER xliMainCard 1 El ntpInPkts OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Total number of NTP packets delivered to the NTP application layer from the transport layer ntp 1 ntpOutPkts OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Total number of NTP packets passed from the NTP application layer to the transport layer ii ogitp El El ntpInErrors OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Total number of NTP packets rejected for any reason by NTP XLi Time amp Frequency System 255 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H application
20. Install the firmware files with versions recommended by Symmetricom Customer Service e Reboot the XLi Note If your system s NTP and SNMP configuration files ntp conf ntp keys snmp conf have been customized make backup copies and later re install those configuration files See A Using F100 Configuration on page 235 Set up the FTP Server To save time and trouble download a preconfigured FTP server from http www ntp systems com zip warftpd1 zip and extract it to the C drive on your workstation Otherwise customize your existing FTP server setup as described in this section When performing these operations the user issues command line instructions to the XLi The XLi responds to those commands by connecting to the FTP server and burning the software to system memory The XLi gives the FTP server Anonymous as its user name and uses a null password e g the equivalent of pressing the Enter key on your keyboard instead of entering text The FTP server must be configured as follows e Anonymous log ins are enabled The password for Anonymous is disabled or allows a null password Anonymous has read write privileges to Anonymous s home directory Obtain the current system firmware files E g 192 8001 bin 192 8000 bt 192 8002 fs from Symmetricom s customer support website Place the system firmware upgrade files in home directory of the anonymous user f you re using the preconfigured FTP server Cis
21. THIS FUNCTION PERFORMS A RESET OF ACCUMULATED TIME DEVIATION If this function has been entered in error simply press the TIME or STATUS buttons to exit the function without changing the preset value Front Panel Display Setup Pressing ENTER at this display allows the user to select which data is to be displayed on the XLi s front panel display The three selections are Time and Frequency Deviation System Frequency and Local Time Scroll to display the desired data then press ENTER to select FTM RS 422 Display Port Setup Press ENTER at this display to configure the FTM RS 422 display port The factory default values are Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity none Stop Bits 1 The default values on subsequent power ups will be those in use prior to the previous power down Using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys scroll to the desired setting then press the ENTER key to accept the currently displayed setting When all parameters are entered the display returns to FTM RS 422 Display Port Setup NOTE Stop Bits is 1 when data bits is 8 and parity is selected Display Port Data Address Setup Pressing ENTER at this display allows the user to set data addresses for all five data values transmitted out the FTM Display Port 64 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H At each data value prompt enter the desired address for that data value A negative sign preceding the address indicates that the da
22. World Map of Time Zones on page 291 for more information Local time is UTC plus a time zone adjustment and a Daylight Saving Time adjustment See F69 Time Mode on page 89 for an expanded explanation of the different types of time Note however that F69 does not affect F42 or the Multicode Output card XLi Time amp Frequency System 69 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Command Line Requesting the board number of installed cards Use F42 to set up the output on the Multicode Output card s Use the following format to request the board number s of the installed card s F42 lt CR gt lt LF gt The XLi responds using the following format F42 lt S gt B lt S gt lt N gt lt CR gt lt LF gt one board installed or F42 lt S gt B lt S gt lt N gt lt S gt lt N gt lt CR gt lt LF gt two or more boards installed where F42 ASCII string representing the Function Number CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character S space character B ASCII character B N the board number of a multi code card 1 to 10 Multiple occurrences of S N corresponding to the number of boards present For example enter F42 lt CR gt The XLi responds that one board board 2 in this case is present F42 B 2 lt CR gt lt LF gt Or that multiple boards boards 2 and 4 in this case are present F42 B 2 4 lt CR gt lt LF gt Or that no boards are present NO MULTICODE BOARDS
23. calibrated T VLF VLF radio OMEGA etc 258 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H callsign Generic radio LORC LORAN C radionavigation PRPPRPrPP GOES GOES UHF environment satellite GPS GPS UHF satellite positioning ACTS ACTS telephon IRIG Inter Range Instrumentation Group signal modem dial up Note for Symmetricom time servers only GPS ACTS and IRIG are presently used Further a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its reference identifier field set to ntp 14 END xli SMIv2 mib XliMib DEFINITIONS IMPORTS xli xliModule MODULE IDENTITY LAST UPDATED MODULE IDENTITY BEGIN ntpSysRefClockIdent FROM SNMPv2 SMI FROM SymmetricomTtm 02052000002 ORGANIZATION SYMMETRICOM INC CONTACT INFO Technical Support DESCRIPTION Symmetricom XLi Enterprise MIB xli 0 xliSystem OBJECT IDENTIFIER xli 1 xliMainCard OBJECT IDENTIFIER xli 2 xliTrap OBJECT IDENTIFIER xli 3 END e e xliSystem SMIv2 mib XliSystemMib DEFINITIONS BEGIN IMPORTS OBJECT TYPE NOTIFICATION TYPE MODUL I E IDENTITY IpAddress Unsigned32 FROM SNMPv2 SMI DisplayString FROM SNMPv2 TC xliSystem xliTrap FROM XliMib xliSystemModule MODUL E IDENTITY LAST UPDATED O
24. enter F100 lt S gt ST lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number lt S gt space ST specify ST command CR input line terminator The XLi responds F100 lt S gt ST lt S gt FLASH CRC lt S gt lt STATUS gt lt S gt RAM lt S gt lt STATUS gt lt S gt SERIAL lt S gt lt STATUS gt lt S gt NVRAM lt S gt VER lt S gt lt 5STATUS gt lt CR gt lt LFE gt 126 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 100 Unit function number lt S gt Space ST Specify ST command FLASH CRC Specify flash checksum result RAM Specify RAM test result SERIAL Specify Serial Port test result NVRAM VER Specify version test result This test compares the version of the code against the version recorded in Non Volatile memory STATUS Is either ASCII PASS or FAIL ASCII comma ASCII colon lt CR gt lt LF gt Output line terminator An example of the response is F100 ST FLASH CRC PASS RAM PASS SERIAL PASS NVRAM VER PASS lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 BH Burn Host Note Symmetricom recommends using the web Interface versus F100 commands as the most conve nient method for upgrading XLi firmware Use function F100 BH when upgrading firmware to select the FTP host and the file to be transferred To select the FTP host and file for upgrading enter F100 BH lt FTP HOST IP ADDRESS gt lt S gt lt UPGR
25. http standards ieee org reading ieee std public description relaying 1344 1995 desc html Overview Please refer to the Input and Output specifications in the front of the manual for details regarding the voltage amplitudes modulation ratios of the following time codes provided or used by the Model XLi IRIG Introduction The document 200 04 IRIG STANDARD TIME FORMATS by the Telecommunications Working Group Inter range Instrumentation Group Range Commanders Council describes IRIG B and IRIG A time codes The standard time formats of IRIG codes were designed for use in missile satellite and space research programs Use of these codes facilitates efficient interchange of test data These formats are suitable for recording on magnetic tape oscillographs film and for real time transmission in both automatic and manual data reduction IRIG B from the Model XLi is suitable for remote display driving magnetic tape recording and many other uses IRIG codes in the strict sense encode Coordinated Universal Time UTC in 24 hour format and not local time Nonetheless this instrument can encode UTC or local time in either 24 or 12 hour formats IRIG Code Format Reference IRIG Standard Format A on page 290 The level shifted pulse width modulated serial formats of IRIG B and IRIG A are divided into three segments The first segment encodes time of year in binary coded decimal BCD notation The second segment encodes control functi
26. latched faults have not been cleared systemFaultHistory 11 Gl faultTimeError OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a time error fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 12 faultTimeout OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a timeout fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 13 E faultNtp OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if NTP was in an alarm since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 14 E statusClock OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER locked 1 unlocked 2 MAX ACCESS read only 266 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H STATUS curren DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the clock locked or unlocked systemStatusGeneral 1 statusClockSourceOBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER clockIrigA 1 clockIrigB 2 clockIrigG 3 clockNasa36 4 clockPrimary 5 clockSecondary 6 clockAuxRef 7 clockNone 8 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Identifies th systemStatusGeneral 2 current clock source statusDescriptorStrOBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE MAX ACCESS read
27. lt CR gt lt LF gt where F3 ASCII string for function F3 S ASCII space character one or more TIME MODE the time mode the entered time refers to LOCAL STANDARD GPS UTC SEP one or more separator characters either space comma or tab MM two digit month DD two digit day of month lt YYYY gt four digit year ASCII character for slash delimiter ASCII character for a colon delimiter lt hh gt one or two digit hours lt mm gt two digit minutes lt ss gt two digit seconds lt CR gt carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character XLi Time Frequency System 51 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H For example to display the date and time send F3 lt CR gt XLi responds F3 UTC 01 01 2002 00 05 34 lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the time and date send F3 UTC 07 14 2002 18 20 30 lt CR gt Only valid times and dates are accepted The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LFE gt F4 Serial Port Configuration Use function F4 to change or display the serial port settings The factory settings are Interface RS 232 Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity NONE only available valid when Data Bits is set to 8 Stop bits 1 Command Line To display the Serial Port settings send F4 lt CR gt XLi responds F4 lt S gt lt RS gt lt SEP gt lt BR gt lt SEP gt lt DB gt lt SEP gt lt P gt lt SEP gt lt SB gt
28. lt N gt board number 1 to 10 SEP separator C channel number 1 to 4 FREQ 0 to 50000000 50 MPPS A value of 0 terminates output to the port An example of setting the frequency of one of the output channels follows Sample entry F120 B2 1 60000 CR LF sets card 2 channel 1 to 60000 MHZ Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt An example of setting all 4 channels on a card with one serial string Sample entry F120 B1 1 100000 2 2000 3 2048 4 16 lt CR gt sets board 1 channel 1 to 100000 MPPS channel 2 to 2000 MPPS channel 3 to 2048 MPPS channel 4 to 16 MPPS Response OK lt CR gt lt LEF gt 160 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F123 Have Quick Input 1 PPS Sync Configuration Use F123 to configure or view the status of the Have Quick Input 1 PPS Sync option card 87 8016 3 See HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 on page 216 The Have Quick 1PPS Time and Frequency Reference option card is a time and frequency reference for synchronizing the XL i The Have Quick 1 PPS Sync card s two BNC connectors take separate Have Quick time code and 1 PPSinputs F123 s INPUT MODE determines how these inputs are used to synchronize the time e HAVE QUICK The card gets major and minor time from the Have Quick time code input e 1PPS The card gets minor time from the 1PPS input Major time is determined by the XLi e HAVE QUICK 1PPS The
29. o oooooooooooooo 75 Guest Login User Name Password 38 H Fave Quick scutes vert Sad A A E Up i 199 Have Quick 1PPS Synch Configuration oo ooo oooooo o 161 Have Quick Output 2 0 eee eens 165 Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM Less 219 Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM 87 8016 6 219 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Have QUIE TFOM 10000 ta 16 High Performance Rubidium Oscillator Upgrade 224 High Stability OCXO Oscillator Upgrade o o ooo ooooooo o 223 Host ip configured successfully oo o oooooooooo o 233 HP OpenView Configuration oo oooooooomoooooo o 278 l Curtis A A dde 123 Informational Messages 0 ccc cee ee 233 Installation Configuration xis ELE TEE RR Re OE Rees 19 IP sae tude mm 120 IPAddress Lia du tae nase hd ols Ae 120 IRIGA 4o is yours quod Aen AE ret uS 69 116 138 171 IRIGSB mcer LC 29 69 116 117 138 171 TIN pcr x dice CEP TAE ade EISE PEE I DONE UN 181 UTG A ost serere rte to e Doo ees e E eden anti 181 TUTO Sot esae aaa TO Ea a eR eEy ec 181 J A O docte ad eA Ded whee So cA 132 J1 Time Code Input lisse 9 Jo InputtTime Gode zxscduserqux ruta Shida eas oe Oe Re xU 137 O oe s eA ID E n SALA AT A 10 J2 Output Rate atar asses rides te cit ase a eat 142 J3 Auxiliary Reference Input oooooooooooooooooooo 10 J3 I
30. 0 Pulse width code 0 No carrier index count interval 0 BCD TOY CF SBS IEEE1344 IS DEFINED IN IEEE1344 1995 R2001 ANNEX F AS See above OUTPUT Amplitude DC TTL into 50 Q Qty 1 Connector BNC female Phasing In phase with the XLi 1PPS 200ns Time Code Input IRIG B120 w IEEE1344 The selectable Code input has an additional selection for IRIG B 127 Configuration is via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML IRIG B 120 IS DEFINED IN IRIG STANDARD 200 04 AS Format B 100 pps 1 Sine wave amplitude modulated 2 1KHz carrier 1mSec resolution 0 BCD TOY CF SBS IEEE1344 IS DEFINED IN IEEE1344 1995 R2001 ANNEX F AS See section TIME CODE OUTPUT IRIG B120 200 04 W IEEE1344 for definition XLI SYNC 14 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The XLi first synchronizes to IRIG B 120 w IEEE 1344 when the Time Quality control bits are 0000 The XLi remains synchronized Locked while the Time Quality control bits are 0000 through 0101 ETE lt 10uSec The XLi utilizes the IRIG B 120 BCD TOY IEEE 1344 year leap second and leap second pending bit as the UTC epoch The XLi time format selection remains on the XLi including the Daylight saving time offset INPUT Amplitude AM 0 5 Vp p to 10 Vp p 100 ko to ground Ratio AM 3 1 10 Qty 1 Connector BNC female Time Code Input IRIG B000 w IEEE1344 The sel
31. 1 s Interface Balanced Z0 100 Q on wire wrap pins Wave Shaping T1 short loop DSX 1 0 655 feet Major and Minor Alarm Relay Closures Format Form C Normally Open and Normally Closed contacts Interface Wire wrap pins Contacts Rated to 115 VAC 150 VDC at 2 A 64 Kb s Composite Clock Output Aux Out 1 Format As per ITU T G 703 Centralized Clock Interface AMI with 5 8 duty cycle All 1 s with Bipolar Violations at an 8 Kb s rate Interface Balanced 2 V peak into 135 O on wire wrap pins Outputs Aux Out 2 3 4 Frequency 1544 Kb s Interface Balanced RS 422 levels into 100 2 on wire wrap pins Synchronization Synchronization Phase locked to the clock s internal 10 MHz CPU Aware No CE Compliant No Configuration Prior installing the T1 card configure the output settings as needed using S1 and JP4 through JP7 See Figure 12 The factory settings are indicated in Figure 12 and in the subsequent configuration tables 182 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Figure 12 Jumper view of the T1 Output Card 87 6000T1 8 with S1 and JP1 7 circled ss QUO RAPT C4 ines 5 x JP4 JP amp P8 e a a E u a a S gt a E rd a ani e Sl e a s1 u s z o a y 3 MN ER DS Par B eI S1 shown in Figure 13 configures T1 Output Wave Shaping Line Build Out for T1 short loop DSX 1 O 655 feet and T1 long loop CS
32. 10 TFOM ASCII string for TFOM output format request lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample request F128 B2 TFOM lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F128 B2 TFOM ENABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt To change the Have Quick Time Figure of Merit output enable disable selection send the following send the following string to the Serial Network port F128 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SP gt TFOM lt SP gt lt OUT gt lt LT gt where F ASCII character F 128 function number lt SP gt ASCII space character B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TFOM ASCII character to denote Time Figure of Merit selection lt OUT gt TFOM Output selection ENABLE or DISABLE lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample entry F128 B2 TFOM ENABLE lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt 166 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 6 Option Cards The following option cards are available for the XLi e Expansion Module 87 8034 1 87 8034 2 e Multicode Output 87 6002 XL1 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 87 8022 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 86 708 1 Low Phase Noise 5 MHz Output 87 8009 5 Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Output 87 8009 10 Enhanced Low Phase Noi
33. 293 AN A m OR p o eos AA 187 293 NS osa estar RO US AG E ane OIA He Rs 181 293 TAS Lune ite rcx Sus tacet A quc atout ad ae iac 171 293 LADA A Sd PrCPP P 174 293 TE A deis osse one E dt Had aya Unde dnce nd 293 DIO A eir du VIRIS TRE ED qe EU 177 293 87 8009 5 MARTE TEE Eq e dt een Ee eae 176 293 81 8012 12 da ad eit Pod 293 87 9012 24 ovs i ei mara quo tar abe EAS EUG Sa SES 293 97 8012 48 epe O RU C d 294 87 8010 deor sd o quu eiie e IH A e e DUM AH alt A 293 B1 80155 B amp S5 cr s O tus otia erp e usq 219 BITTE ass aries Sis TS DES TEN US EAM faeta d ier i 293 BT OU22 due eet aid em Does 173 293 ci feo 0 2 4 osse S qa VI E RARUS a ORE RO Re Mas 192 293 A eite exo Sar pecatesunos pea nuin SUE quc t eque aE 293 97 0025 PEPERIT 293 O Lo oa V SR a d e BOGS IN Vased dam tU ESQ RSS 293 BI OUZ8 2 oue y VERA MIU AU a ades ES 191 293 e S0 P CE AAA FADEN A DERE UPPER EE EUER 168 B 80 9452 x Loo ied stood US fro deo Dati se odes a deos BROS 168 SoA Ou xe da Eu dm due mapas d 293 O oro pec X Pe qe USC a Seu ate CN ar ae a Ed 293 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H A Alarte O A ge Det Ped Spe d bt od 33 Alarm Control Status 0 0 llle Ie 94 ALARM Outputs ut the Fe hu DU D ES US 12 Alarm Status LED EE 33 Alarm Status ED eo iR READS NINE 5 33 94 225 ANSLET1 10151994 occu a ds 181 Antenna Cable Delay i oko DES Ee aw od MEE Odo ey 11 AUISel dro o A do ARMS 10 J9 Input as ii
34. 357 lt CR gt lt LF gt To exit F9 press Ctrl C on your keyboard F11 Time Output Format Use function F11 to change the format of the F8 and F9 time output strings The factory setting for F11 format is null which enables the default time output formats for F8 and F9 lt SOH gt DDD HH MM SSQ lt CR gt lt LF gt for F8 lt SOH gt DDD HH MM SS mmmQ lt CR gt lt LF gt for F9 To display the default format for F11 enter F11 XLi Time amp Frequency System 59 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F11 responds F11 DDD HH MM SS mmmQ where lt SOH gt ASCII Start of Heading character CR ASCII Carriage Return character lt LF gt ASCII Line Feed character DDD day of year HH hours MM minutes SS seconds mmm milliseconds colon separator Q time quality character see the following table The time quality character Q is one of the following characters SPACE Time error is less than time quality flag 1 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 1 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 2 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 3 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 4 s threshold or a reference source is unavailable Note F8 does not display milliseconds regardless of the format defined in F11 Suppress the DDD HH MM SS mmm and Q segments of F11 by placing an X Shift X
35. 366 27 binary control characters see Table 1 reference IEEE1344 binary seconds of day XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Table 1 Binary Time Xli Estimated Time Error ETE quality 1111 Initial condition clock unlocked or 10Sec lt ETE 1011 Clock unlocked and 1Sec lt ETE lt 10Sec 1010 Clock unlocked and 100mSec lt ETE lt 1Sec 1001 Clock unlocked and 10mSec lt ETE lt 100mSec 1000 Clock unlocked and 1mSec lt ETE lt 10mSec 0111 Clock unlocked and 100uSec lt ETE lt 1mSec 0110 Clock unlocked and 10uSec lt ETE lt 100uSec 0101 Clock unlocked and luSec lt ETE lt 10uSec 0100 Clock unlocked and 100nSec lt ETE lt luSec 0011 Clock unlocked and 10nSec lt ETE lt 100nSec 0010 Clock unlocked and 1nSec lt ETE lt 10nSec 0001 Clock unlocked and ETE lt InSec 0000 Clock locked to a reference source OUTPUT Amplitude AM 3 Vp p 10 into 500 Ratio AM 3 1 110 Qty 1 Connector BNC female Phasing In phase with the XLi 1PPS 10 us Time Code Output IRIG B000 w IEEE1344 The selectable Code output has an additional selection for IRIG B 000 w IEEE 1344 configuration is via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML XLi Time amp Frequency System 13 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H IRIG B 000 IS DEFINED IN IRIG STANDARD 200 04 AS Format B 100 pps
36. 422 setup Keypad Display port Data Addresses Keypad User Serial Port Data Format Command Line FTM RS 422 Display Port The display driver is an RS 422 port located on the FTM card rear panel For the RS 232 option Pin 3 is Transmit and Pin 5 is ground for the DB 9 connector The RS 422 pinouts are as follows DB 9P DATA DB 25P ADAPTER PIN DIRECTION SIGNAL 1 OUT TxD 2 OUT TxD 3 IN RxD 4 IN RxD 5 GND 6 OUT RTS 7 OUT RTS 8 IN CTS 9 IN CTS The port is a transmit only port Transmitting characters to this port has no effect on port operation System Frequency Frequency Deviation Time Deviation System Time and Local Time data is transmitted once per second with a terminating lt etx gt character on time with the second 1 millisecond Each of the five data items is preceded by a three digit address for use by Symmetricom addressable displays These addresses can be entered via keypad F27 under the Display Port Data Address Setup selection XLi Time amp Frequency System 197 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The data transmitted is in a user selectable format as follows the actual string length is too long to place on a single line of type so it is broken into two lines here stx AAAdd mmm cr lf BBBsd mmm cr lf CCCsdd mmm cr lf DDDHH MM SS mmm cr lf EEEDDD HH MM SS lt tqf gt lt cr gt lt lf gt lt etx gt AAA BBB CCC DDD and EEE repr
37. 50 microsecond pulse occurring every 100 milliseconds i e repetitive pulses with 10 PPS frequency with the start time or rising edge at 5 uS and the stop time or falling edge at 55 uS or 100ms pulse period with 50 uS pulse width enter F111 PPO XXX XX XX XX X00005 XXX XX XX XX X00055 lt CR gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 145 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Or for example to produce a repetitive one minute pulse occurring every hour enter F111 PPO XXX XX 10 00 000000 XXX XX 11 00 000000 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Or for example to produce a repetitive one microsecond pulse occurring on every hour enter F111 PPO XXX XX 10 00 000000 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LE gt F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas Note Frequency Measurement is an optional feature If purchased at the same time as the XLi it comes enabled on the system To purchase this option after you have purchased the XLi contact Symmetricom Sales See H Sales and Customer Assistance on page 295 Use function F113 to configure the J3 Input on the XLi back panel section 3 Figure 5 for one of the following settings Auxiliary Reference Aux Ref input Frequency Measurement Freq Meas input Disable all J3 inputs F113 offers the following keypad settings e J3 Input Configuration Aux Ref Freq Meas Disabled J3 Input Frequency 1 MHz 5 MHz 10 M
38. 55 F8 Continuous Time Once per Second 0 0 0c lesse 56 F9 Tame On Request seres acest ithe ae at a Save 58 F11 Time Output Format is eases da A EVER a Lok ea es 59 F13 Time Eiron G26 77S 29e Qe bd dO MS vas der ere ae px Dea 61 F18 Software Version Request oooooooroomorsrrrmsmsrsrnnrrns 62 p27 F TMU Configuration rca ae 63 F42 Multicode Output Configuration 0 0 cece ee eee 69 F44 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 0 0 occ eee eens 73 F50 GPS Receiver LEA X Y Z Position i oczu eL Rer Gg ERE Pes RES 75 F51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay dr ia TH F52 Distribution Cable Delay cocino a ux xe RR RE TY EE RS 78 F53 GPS Operation Mode iss isses mb RE RE E REPRE E 80 F60 GPS Receiver Satellite astas ac oe Co ecd FRU Sen 81 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode 02 cece eee eee oo 84 F67 Manual Leap Second Entry 0 ccc cc eee ences 86 Adding a Leap Second 2 eoe ep RV ia A eee I EAS 87 Subtracting a leap second sisi dove aa E TS 87 Setting the manual leap second function to no event 88 F69 Time Mod soy S a esI ea et ER da 3 Sted deg plain betta 89 F71 Oscillator StatisueS4 ess Te epe PUE DESEE de a Ra USE 9 E72 A ac etsium i S PSOE uia eA d ubique T haa 92 F73 Alarm Control y Stas zoo bU neci RE RR as CE GA AU uu Vs 94 Alarms General Information io cetur ee te x QR ne ac 95 Clock Stats A RR HR Ane ee VOR OROSIUS wre eek Us 96
39. 9 10 s of msec 34 200 s of days 10 8 s of hours 35 20 s of sec 11 20 s of msec 36 Ground 12 10 s of hours 37 40 s of sec 1PPS 13 40 s of msec 38 STROBE 14 20 s of hours 39 1 s of min 15 80 s of msec 40 Ground 16 I s of days 41 2 s of min 17 100 s of msec 42 N U 206 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Table 9 PIN OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 18 2 s of days 43 4 s of min 19 200 s of msec 44 Unlock 20 4 s of days 45 8 s of min 21 400 s of msec 46 Ground 22 8 s of days 47 10 s of min 1kPPS 23 800 s of msec 48 STROBE 24 10 s of days 49 20 s of min 25 1 s of sec 50 Ground PTTI BCD Output 87 8045 The PTTI BCD Time Code is compliant with ICD GPS 060 Rev B as a 50 bit message It also supports an abbreviated format commonly referred to as 24 bit format There are two outputs one each on 9 pin D connectors Selection is via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML THE PTTI BCD TIME CODE FORMAT IS The PTTI BCD time code is a 50 bit message defining the UTC time of day day of year and TFOM transmitted at 50 bps The time code represents the previous 1PPS rollover THE ABBREVIATED PTTI BCD TIME CODE FORMAT IS The abbreviated PTTI BCD time code is a 24 bit message defining the UTC time of day The day of year and TFOM bits are set high 1 transmitted at 50 bps The time code
40. Burn FPGA Firmware Note See B Upgrading System Firmware on page 239 F100 BUFP Burn FPGA firmware from host to target flash Use Serial Network port F100 BUFP when upgrading FPGA firmware to write the FPGA program file selected with F100 BH to the flash memory Prior to issuing the F100 BUFP command the host computer must be setup as an FTP server with the new FPGA program file stored on the FTP server The existence of the FPGA program file on the FTP server and an Ethernet connection is checked when the command is issued To write the FPGA program to the flash send the F100 BH command with the FTP host file path and name and then send the following command F100 BUFP lt Enter gt This command is only valid for XLi with an 86 8000 Rev G or higher CPU board If the CPU board is of the wrong version an error message ERROR INVALID COMMAND will be displayed This command is valid only via the command line interface in the following scenarios 1 the terminal is communicating to the XLi directly via the serial port or 2 the terminal is connected to the XLi network port and the user is logged in as an operator If the terminal is connected to the XLi network port and the user is logged in as a guest this command will be deemed invalid and an error message ERROR ACCESS DENIED will be displayed Prior to burning the FPGA program to the target flash another error checking step is performed The new F
41. CR gt The XLi responds example F110 IRIG B PRIMARY 50 DC NEGATIVE 66161 us SYNC GEN OFF lt CR gt lt LF gt Or F110 TIET 50 POSITIVE lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the J1 Input Configuration make a command line entry using the same format as the XLi response above Only valid values are accepted For example F110 IRIG A SECONDARY 50 DC POSITIVE 1234 US SYNC GEN 1 FRAME lt CR gt Or if the TIET option is available first put the time code input on standby example F110 IRIG A STANDBY 50 DC POSITIVE 1234 US SYNC GEN 1 FRAME lt CR gt And then configure TIET example F110 TIET 100K POSITIVE lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Note Note If the TIET is configured the timestamp s of the rising edge of the J1input signal will be dis played each second Up to 100 time stamps can be spooled To obtain TIET measurement from J1 enter F110 TIET TIME lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt XXXXXXXXX lt CR gt lt LF gt Time Interval display continues until function termination with Ctrl C Or example 140 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F110 TIET EVENT lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt ddd hh mm SS XXXXXXXXX CR LF Event Timing display continues until function termination with Ctrl C For an IRIG Time Code with the IEEE 1344 extensions enter F110 lt CR gt to request the J1 Input Configuration and the
42. Configuration 50 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Notes Most IRIG time code doesn t contain year information For this reason use F3 to set the year before setting IRIG up as a primary reference source The year in F3 rolls over automatically at the end of the year if the unit is operating during the transition If it is not operating during the transition the user must manually set the year the next time the unit is operating This is important for scenarios where time code that does not provide year information is being used as a reference source Should the clock switch for example from GPS to the time code reference and the year is set incorrectly in F3 any time outputs or displays that use year information will be correspondingly affected Avoid saving new F3 settings while the XLi is locked to a reference source and distributing time information Doing so allows the XLi to distribute the potentially incorrect time set by F3 for up to 8 seconds until the XLi re synchronizes to the reference source s time The XLi will make this switch to and from F3 s time without generating an alarm In NTP for example this means that incorrect time information could be distributed in NTP packets that are marked as having the valid time Command Line To display the time and date send F3 CR XLi responds F3 lt S gt lt MM gt lt DD gt lt YYYY gt lt SEP gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt
43. Configuration 2 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 1 PPS Synch 161 Option Board iiis iaa a ete eS eU Us 152 OSCIIatOf 1 ecd Sed ex er S dad eee uU EE d 137 Standard XLI sc ee bees eh oy A APO SEU hay de Ade 29 XLi w two GPS receivers auus ceo svete Caw a eR ETE 30 Configure NTP amp SNMP Parameters 0 0000 131 235 D D4orS perFramMe 4x2 na td 181 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode 00 cece eee eee 84 Deleted previously set IP host address 0 000 ee eee 233 Dest file bytes written Configuration files transferred successfully 233 Display Con fig ring TIME aus duree dia a 24 Display Brightness Level osito a 150 Distribution Cable Delay o ooooooooooooooooooo 78 DSTI Mode 32 bv oa ratico Laa Ae 84 E E1 Telecom Interface Output 187 EP IS a DP 120 Editing MD5 keys on the NTP Client o oo ooooooooo o 285 Editing MD5 keys on the NTP Server o o ooooocooocooooooo o 284 A Yes ed edi est o a bea 283 Editing SAMECON isa sq a de al Roh ages a 270 ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE se ee RA Er PUER 231 OZ SY AAA TE eee te 231 03 BAD MISSING FIELD 1 34 d a 231 Action get or set is not specified o o 232 Can t create netdevice lllillillllllllllllls 231 Can t open destfile o oooooooooooooo o 232 Can t open source file 2 0 0c cece eee 232
44. Disabled DAC First Time Lock Time Error Time Error Threshold Alarm LED Blink Timeout Timeout Delay Power On Alarm Suppress NTP XLi Time 8 Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Alarm Enabled 0000 nS Alarm Enabled Alarm Enabled 300 sec 300 sec Alarm Enabled 29 XLi with a GPS Reference This XLi configuration includes a GPS receiver factory configured as the primary reference source Except for the following functions the factory settings are the same as those for the Standard XLi Description Setting Function amp Cross Reference J1 Time Reference STANDBY F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 GPS Antenna Cable Delay 60 nS delay F51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay on page 77 GPS Time Reference Bay1 Primary F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 GPS Primary Alarm Enabled F73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 XLi with GPS and Time Code References To configure an XLi with a GPS Reference to use a time code input on J1 as a secondary reference source complete the following additional steps Evaluate the relative quality of the time code source versus GPS to ensure that switching from one to the other is acceptable Set the Time Code as SECONDARY using F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET e Set E74 Clock Source Control to PRI SEC SEC Enable the IRIG alarm in F73 Alarm Control Status The followi
45. F118 Bl GPS RECEIVER F119 GPS Receiver Configuration Summary Use function F119 to select a specific GPS receiver display its status information and configure it as a reference source F119 s functions apply to all models of GPS receiver option cards available for the XLi Where differences exist this manual refers to the card by its name and part number In F119 a GPS receivers are identified by number of the option bay where they are located See Figure 1 on page 3 for a diagram of the option bay numbers F119 provides the following GPS receiver information and status e Availability indicates the option bay location Part Number e Software Version FPGA Number e GPS Status Locked or Unlocked GPS Antenna Ok Open or Short GPS Acquisition State Dynamic Mode Stop Site Survey Stop TRAIM Start Site Survey Start TRAIM Survey Position Position Hold e GPS Time Reference Primary Secondary or Standby Each of F119 s information status and configuration items are explained below Because F119 is an important function this section explains the behavior of F119 and related functions in some detail Part Number Software Version and FPGA Number This information is useful for identifying the option card GPS Status Locked or Unlocked During normal operation Locked means the GPS receiver has e A valid GPS solution the position of the antenna The current UTC time the curr
46. F128 to obtain information about the current version of the software installed on the Have Quick Out option board To obtain the Have Quick Out option board status information send the following string to the Serial Network port F128 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt S lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 128 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 S ASCII character for Status Request LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only The XLi Serial Network port will respond with a four line replay for status request similar to the following example Sample request F128 B2 S lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F128 B2 lt CR gt lt LF gt HQ OUT PART NUMBER 87 8016 6 CR LF SOFTWARE 230 01510 10v1 2 lt CR gt lt LF gt FPGA 230 01510 09v01 lt CR gt lt LF To obtain the Have Quick Out option board TFOM output format information send the following string to the Serial Network port F128 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt TFOM lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F XLi Time Frequency System 165 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 128 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through
47. F42 B1 T lt CR gt The XLi responds F42 Bl UTC lt CR gt lt LF gt Setting the time reference of a specific board Use the following format to set the type of time output by the boards For an explanation of the different types see F69 Time Mode on page 89 F42 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt T lt S gt lt TREF gt lt CR gt where F42 string representing the Function Number B ASCII character indicating board number to follow lt N gt the board number 1 to 10 lt S gt one or more separator characters space tab or comma lt TREF gt Time Reference UTC LOCAL STANDARD or GPS For example to have board 1 all ports output local time instead of UTC enter F42 B1 T LOCAL lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt F44 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer Use function F44 to select the N 8 rate for a specific output port on a specific N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 86 708 1 page 174 The N 8 output frequencies range from 8 kPPS to 8192 kPPS Command Line Use the following format to enter the F44 command In response the XLi displays the card addresses of the installed N8 cards F44 lt CR gt XLi responds with the card numbers in using the following format F44 lt S gt lt N gt lt S gt lt N gt lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 73 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F44 ASCII string indicating function 44 S Space or separator lt N gt the card number
48. HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 on page 216 Aux Ref Input If an Aux Ref input is available and enabled the XLi assumes that Aux Ref is a better frequency source than its own oscillator If a timing reference is not available or becomes unavailable and Aux Ref is enabled the XLi locks to the A to the reference lt 1 x 10712 ux Ref input Under those conditions frequency output accuracy is equal Note Manually set the time and date when using 1 PPS or Aux Ref as the primary references Set the date year when using IRIG A000 A130 B000 B120 or NASA 36 as the primary reference See F3 Time amp Date page 50 Chassis 1U Chassis Receiver Size Weight 2U Chassis Receiver Size Weight XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Standard 19 EIA Rack System hardware included 1 75 in x 17 1 in x 15 35 in Standard configuration without options 9 25 Ib Fully loaded 10 95 Ib Standard 19 EIA Rack System hardware included 3 5 in x 17 1 in x 15 35 in Standard configuration without options 12 55 Ib Fully loaded 21 00 Ib Standard Inputs and Outputs The following specifications describe the standard as opposed to optional inputs and outputs on the standard configuration of the XLi Serial I O Port The standard serial data port is a bi directional EIA standard RS 232C interface The serial data port is configured via the Keypad D
49. High Stability OCXO Rubidium or High Stability Rubidium This option can be added to the XLi in a Plug and Play manner and operates without hardware or software configuration The PLL status of all three Low Phase Noise option cards is given by the F73 Low Phase Noise PLL indicator See F73 Alarm Control Status page 94 Specifications This option provides four 10 MHz frequency output signals Signal Type Analog sine wave Synchronization Phase locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Amplitude 13 dBm 1 dBm Output Impedance 50 Q Quantity 4 Connector Female BNC Harmonic distortion 30 dBc Spurious 90 dBc 10 Hz 10 kHz SSB Isolation 70 dBc Phase Noise 85 dBc Hz 1 Hz offset 115 dBc Hz 10 Hz offset 140 dBc Hz 100 Hz offset 145 dBc Hz 1 kHz offset 150 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset CPU Aware No 176 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Output 87 8009 10 Introduction This Low Phase Noise LPN output module provides four 10 MHz output signals with high spectral purity and port to port isolation Each LPN module has an on board LPN oscillator that is phase locked to the XLi s internal oscillator Therefore the LPN outputs have the same accuracy and long term stability as the XLi s internal oscillator This option requires an XLi with an upgraded oscillator OCXO High Stability OCXO Rubidium or High Stability Rubidium This optio
50. Jo jo te fe te je fe je je 222 XLi Time 8 Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H P7 Oscillators The XLi comes with the standard TCVCXO oscillator described below The following optional oscillators are available as upgrades OCXO Oscillator High Stability OCXO Oscillator e Rubidium Oscillator High Performance Rubidium Oscillator The stability of the following oscillators is dependent on the reference source For reference source accuracies see System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 Standard TC VCXO Oscillator Frequency Timing Allan Deviation Stability 1x 10 1 sec 2 x 101 1K sec 1x 101 1 day Temp 5x107 over 0 C to 50 C when not locked to a reference Drift Rate 5 x 10 Day OCXO Oscillator Upgrade Frequency Timing Allan Deviation Stability 1x 107 1 sec 1x 101 1K sec 1x 10 Q 1 day Temp 1X10 over 0 C to 50 C when not locked to a reference Drift Rate 5 x 10 Day High Stability OCXO Oscillator Upgrade Frequency Timing Allan Deviation Stability 3x 10 1 sec 3x 101 1K sec 1x 10 1 day Temp 1x10 over 0 C to 50 C when not locked to a reference Drift Rate 1x 101 Day XLi Time amp Frequency System 223 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Rubidium Oscillator Upgrade Frequency Timing Allan Deviation Stability 3 x 101 1 sec 4 x 101 1K sec 1x 10 1 day Temp 3x10719 over 0 C to 50 C when not locked to a refere
51. L Remote Lockout ote e ads IO eR Paws da P9 125 F100 ST Self Test Status A re od Mut eRe a Fae bes 126 F100 BH Burn Host ts rs a dea 127 F100 BUB Burn BootLoader ooooocoooronorroroonmm ns 127 POO BW Batis edie Scot severe m i eer uN Od Me a a Ulead a 128 F100 BF Burn File System eck si os ea hee FR Ia RR ENTRO 129 F100 BUFP Burn FPGA Firmware 0 0 000 c eee ee 130 F100 CONFIG Configure NTP amp SNMP 2 0 0 cece eee eee 131 F100 J Factory Mode Jumper 2 trc veda oie das 132 FIQOK TE Ec ReDOOL s oe 3A WEAR ef ae akg tirs de S Ed 133 F100 P Change User Password vore ER 134 ETOQDL S PING tetas ER AI qa ved ERR UR dS 135 F100 PN Change User Name 2 uu unes a S esce hd Ene ed re Ie n 135 F108 Oscillator Configuration 0 ccc ccc ce eee eee 137 F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET 0 00 cece cece ene 137 FITI J2 Output CR ate PPO Seco al dad x SOME 142 F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas 0 ee eens 146 E116 Display Brightness Level nu ca seas a daba 150 F117 Factory Configuration iia 151 F118 Option Board Configuration 0 cece eee eee eae 152 F119 GPS Receiver Configuration 423 secos to rra 154 F120 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 42 uoi eh RETOUR EUR EARS 158 F123 Have Quick Input 1 PPS Sync Configuration ooooooooooomoo o 161 F126 Options Key Entry ius sese d eet rd RUE Y xor etu 164 F128 Have Quick Outp
52. Making Additional Connections Make the following optional connections to the standard input output connectors on the XLi back panel The ANTENNA connector to a GPS antenna cable Note Use a 12 volt capable GPS antenna The NET network port RJ 45 to an ethernet network using Cat 5 cable supplied This connection is needed to manage the XLi remotely or to use the optional NTP function The SERIAL I O connector to a PC using the supplied RS 232 null modem cable J1 J2 and J3 if needed See F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 F111 J2 Output Rate PPO on page 142 F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas on page 146 Figure 5 Connectors ANTENNA SERIAL I O J1 J2 J3 NET 1PPS CODE ALARM Connecting the Power Supply Warning Ensure that a disconnect device such as a switch with the appropriate voltage current rating is provided when operating installing the XLi Connect the Power Supply it to a power source The green STATUS light indicates that the XLi is receiving power Notes for optional DC power supplies Usea 15 amp circuit breaker in series with the DC power source avoid connecting directly to a DC power source without the breaker 14 gage wire is the minimum recommended for DC power source hookup DC Power Supply Only to be used in a restricted access area The screw torque range on the Power Terminal Block is 5 to 8 inch pounds When connecting to a DC
53. Output Specifications 0 0 0 ccc eee 219 Have Quick Signal Characteristics o0 448 cxx sate id 219 HaveQuick with selectable TFOM oooooooooomoomommooooo 219 Enhanced Low Phase Noise Module 87 8040 1 0 0 0 0 00 e cece eee nee 221 Lsgacy Option Card tia aa saad DI dee dw da ie NR UOS 222 GPS Receiver 36 8013 set tese tu HE oe eU AINT DeL REIS 222 Inttod ction 1 chest na Sete dee ger star Hir pu tiunt pe ented praeco dne pa 222 SDGCIBIC ADOS emu e Sesto AMA rud SpA eL P te ge 222 P7 Oscillators ceases E A ER USE ROCK COLE b e doe 223 OEXC Oscillator Upgrade aede e be D DERE EE HD ERE S 223 High Stability OCXO Oscillator Upgrade o oooooooooooonoonooo 223 Rubidium Oscillator Upgrade 2 it A ES Xr a S 224 High Performance Rubidium Oscillator Upgrade ooooooooomoom o 224 8 Power Supplies uranio RdA SUPRA owes Gh ene KNIE LU 225 Standard 110 VAC Power Supply der en ise AVR ERES SR a 225 12 VDC Power Supply Option 87 8012 12 2 0 0 ee eee 225 24 VDC Power Input Option 87 8012 24 2 0 eens 226 48 VDC Power Input Option 87 8012 48 2 0 ene 226 9 Software Options EA eens ER eee kay Sa es hoe AUR NAR ENCORE 227 Symmetricom TimeMonitor Software 0 0 eee eee ee eee 227 Logging TIET and Freq Meas Data 20 025 eee e mn 227 Other TA eds 228 10 XLi Generated Messages Sica di 231 Error Messages a a due es a a ah E ee 231 Informational MeSBRIBES Tes ts A TA A is 233 viii XLi Tim
54. Quick signal employs bi phase Manchester II transmission at approximately 1667 bits per second A one is defined as 300 microseconds of a low state followed by 300 microseconds of a high state A transmission of 240 milliseconds of logic ones 400 bits precedes the start of message indicator 16 bits and time day of year year and TFOM message 96 bits The transmission is initiated on a time mark so that the first bit of the 400 ones starts within 10 microseconds of the leading edge of the 1PPS The start of message indicator that follows the ones verifies that the time day of year year and TFOM message will follow Each 8 bit character in the data message time of day day of year year and TFOM is defined by a modified 8 4 Hamming Code The two start of message characters 8 bits each are not in the modified Hamming Code The modified Hamming code employs 4 parity bits and 4 data bits for each 8 bit character XLi Time amp Frequency System 217 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The Time Figure of Merit TFOM denotes the time quality of the incoming Have Quick code The input reads the integer assuming all bits high indicating no information or an integer from 0 8 indicating time error 1 nS 10 mS either case no fault is reported When set to an integer value of 9 indicating time error of 10mS or fault the Have Quick time and frequency reference reads the code unlocks Refer to ICD GPS 060 Rev A section 4 4 5 for t
55. Receiver acts as a Stratum O timing reference source to the XLi It tracks up to 12 L1 GPS satellites decodes their signals for time and position and feeds this data to the XLi through the internal backplane When available and enabled the GPS C A Receiver card provides superior time and frequency accuracy on the XLi See System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 The GPS C A Receiver card comes with an L1 GPS antenna cabling and mounting hardware unless otherwise specified at the time of purchase The GPS C A Receiver uses a TRAIM Time Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring algorithm to monitor the integrity of the receiver s timing solution Using redundant measurements TRAIM detects and quarantines anomalous GPS signals independent of the GPS health ephemeris data The quarantined signal is excluded from the timing solution for 12 hours before it is requalified for inclusion in the timing solution See Installing the GPS Antenna on page 19 for information on selecting an antenna site mounting the antenna and signal strength requirements The GPS C A Receiver card can be managed and configured using F53 GPS Operation Mode page 80 and F119 GPS Receiver Configuration page 154 XLi Time amp Frequency System 191 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Specifications Frequency 1575 42 MHz L1 signal Code Coarse Acquisition C A code Tracking Up to 12 satellites with TRAIM Position Accuracy Typically lt 10m
56. SEP gt lt MONTH gt lt SEP gt lt YEAR gt lt CR gt where XLi Time amp Frequency System 87 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H SUB ASCII string indicating a leap second will be subtracted MONTH Month number that the leap second will be subtracted on the last day of the month MAR JUN SEP DEC or NONE YEAR Year that the leap second will be subtracted 2001 to 2030 or NONE Sample entry F67 SUB DEC 2007 lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Setting the manual leap second function to no event To select no leap second insertion event enter a continuous string of the form F67 lt SEP gt NONE lt CR gt where NONE ASCII string indicating a manual leap second insertion function will be disabled The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE if the input string was in the correct format but contained a value probably numeric that was out of the range of acceptable values The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 02 SYNTAX if it receives a string in an incorrect format for example the second field should be ADD SUB or NONE The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 03 BAD MISSING FIELD if the input string lacks a required field 88 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F69 Time Mode Use function F69 to select the time type displayed by The XLi s front panel display
57. System 155 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H GPS Antenna Ok Open or Short The GPS antenna is powered by 12 volts from the ANTENNA connector on the rear of the XLi If this circuit is complete e g connected to an antenna GPS Antenna status is OK If the circuit is incomplete e g no antenna a cable break or a splitter the GPS Antenna status is Open If circuit detects a short the GPS Antenna status is Short GPS Time Reference Primary Secondary or Standby Configure the GPS receiver as a Primary or Secondary time reference This setting is used by F74 Clock Source Control to control switching between reference sources Selecting Standby makes the receiver unavailable as a reference source If one time reference is configured as Primary or Secondary and another time reference is assigned the same priority the first time reference is reset to Standby For example with GPS receiver 1 configured as Secondary when an operator configures GPS receiver 2 or an IRIG input on J2 as Secondary and saves changes GPS receiver 1 is reset to Standby The XLi front panel status display identifies the reference source and its priority e g GPs PRI GPS Acquisition State Please note that after starting the GPS receiver F119 may report several acquisition states before settling on the one that was selected using F53 With the GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 F119 reports the following GPS acquisition states after a rebo
58. Two Outputs A and B Format 16 Frame Multiframe Line code HDB3 AMI these are the same for all 1 s Interface Balanced Z0 120 Q on wire wrap pins Wave Shaping As per ITU T G 703 interface at 2048 kbits S Major and Minor Alarm Relay Closures Format Form C Normally Open and Normally Closed con tacts Interface Wire wrap pins Contacts Rated to 115 VAC 150 VDC at2 A XLi Time amp Frequency System 187 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 64 Kb s Composite Clock Output Aux Out 1 Format As per ITU T G 703 64 kBits S Centralized Clock Interface AMI with 5 8 duty cycle All 1 s with Bipolar Violations at an 8 Kb s rate Interface Balanced peak into 110 O on wire wrap pins 2048 kHz Sine Outputs Aux Out 2 3 4 Balanced 1Vrms into 100 2 Frequency 2048 kHz Amplitude Connector wire wrap pins Synchronization Synchronization Accuracy CPU Aware No CE Compliant No Configuration Phase locked to the clock s internal 10 MHz Refer to System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 Prior to installing the E1 card set the user configured jumper and DIP switch settings as needed The factory settings are as follows Figure 16 Jumper view of the E1 Output Card 87 6000E1 6 with S1 and JP1 7 circled a UO JP4 JPT ee E 4 JP4 JPS JPS a a u a e a a Emay pe JP1 JP rd JP8 T af e A PL mm Sl Lo a 5 Q1 a s y JPZ 4 Panam Y B PI
59. XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 87 8047 Command Line To display a summary of the XLi option bay information enter the following command F118 The XLi responds F118 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt lt OC gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where 118 lt S gt lt N gt lt OC gt lt CR gt lt LF gt ASCII character F function number ASCII space character one or more ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows Option Bay Number 1 through 10 Option Card Name GPS RECEIVER or N 1 FREQ SYNTHESIZER or FTM III MONITOR or HAVE QUICK SYNC or HAVE QUICK OUT or PTTI BCD Output or Parallel BCD Output or NOT RECOGNIZED if no Smart Option Card is installed carriage return line feed For example enter F118 lt CR gt XLi responds F118 F118 F118 F118 F118 F118 F118 F118 F118 F118 Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 NOT GPS N 1 NOT GPS NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT ECEIVER REQUENCY SYNTHESIZER ECOGNIZED ECEIVER ECOGNIZE ECOGNIZE ECOGNIZE ECOGNIZE ECOGNIZE RECOGNIZED E mj m mj c wj ou nj s O UU UU XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 153 To specify a unique option bay append the character B and the bay number For example enter F118 B1 lt CR gt XLi responds
60. You have completed the firmware upgrade procedure 242 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Troubleshooting Most problems upgrading the firmware are due to problems with the configuration of the FTP server such as e Setting the server to accept a null password e configuring the anonymous home directory setting the correct access rights entering the correct relative file path The following error messages may provide some indication of the underlying problem Message Can t set the burn host wrong IP address Cause The IP address entered for the FTP server is incorrect Check that you ve entered the IP address of the FTP server not the XLi and re enter if necessary Message gt Can t open file 192 Cause There s a problem with the FTP server that is preventing access to the file Verify the following The FTP server is correctly configured The anonymous user account is enabled The anonymous user account password is guest e The anonymous user account has read access to the ftpworkfiles directory The ftpworkfiles directory located in the anonymous user s home directory The FTP server is running There aren t any other anonymous users logged into the FTP server Try connecting to the FTP server as anonymous using an FTP client You should automatically see the product name directory e g XLi you created inside the anonymous users home director
61. a subset of ntpInErrors ntp 4 E ntpDesiredAcc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The desired worst case time accuracy in microseconds that the time server will attempt to steer to This variable is related to ntpEstError Should ntpEstError be greater than ntpDesiredAcc the NTP alarm condition will be set ntpSysLeap will be equal to 3 N n I ote outgoing NTP packets will have their leap indicator field set to tpSysLeap ntp 5 ntpEstErr OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION XLi Time amp Frequency System 247 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ntpSysLeap OBJECT TYPE ntpSysHostMode OBJECT TYP ntpSysStratum OBJECT TYPE ntpSysPoll OBJECT TYPE 248 The deprecated estimated time error in microseconds of the time server This variable is related to ntpEstError Usually this value is small and constant for a given type of time server However when primary synchronization is lost this value will slowly increase with time as the time server s oscillator flywheels away from true time Should ntpEstError be greater than ntpDesiredAcc the NTP alarm condition will be set ntpSysLeap will be equal to 3 Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packets will have its leap
62. a terminal session with the XLi and type commands to the XLi command line select the Terminal radio button and enter commands directly in the Response field Consult Chapter 5 Function Reference page 45 for the specific syntax of each command F113 C Command Terminal F5 ENABLE 00000001000 00000010000 00000100000 00001000000 gt F3 F3LOCAL 12 31 2005 17 33 31 gt F2 F2 D24 124 gt To end a Command or Terminal session with the XLi click the Disconnect radio button To display the location of all CPU aware option cards click the Bays button which sends the F118 Option Board Configuration command to the XLi Note the location of the GPS receiver 228 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To display the GPS receiver status select the option bay location of the GPS receiver using the pull down menu and then click the Status button This sends the F119 GPS Receiver Configuration command to the XLi e To display the GPS satellite status select the option bay location of the GPS receiver using the pull down menu and then click the Satellites button This sends the F60 GPS Receiver Satellite List command to the XLi e To display the complete GPS information select the option bay location of the GPS receiver using the pull down menu and then click the GPS button This displays the following window ID xd Computer Time 2006 03 06 17 07 21 Measurme
63. accuracy 1 PPS 1 KPPS AND 1 MPPS STROBE LINES Both 1 PPS and 1 KPPS strobe lines on the 50 pin output connector and the 1 MPPS strobe line on the 25 pin connector indicate valid BCD time data The 1 PPS 50 duty cycle output line on Pin 16 of the 50 pin connector switches to the high state 100ns after the second strobe This allows the user to use the rising edge of this strobe to clock data into a remote system The 100 ns delay allows for the output register time delay plus the user s interface setup time requirements At any time the 1 PPS strobe line is high the data lines from seconds up will not be changing states and are therefore available for reading The 1 kPPS 50 duty cycle output line on pin 9 of the 50 pin connector switches to the high state 100 ns after the millisecond strobe The 100 ns nominal delay allows for the output register time delay plus the user s interface set up time requirements At any time the 1 KPPS line is high the data lines from milliseconds up will not be changing states and are therefore available for reading The 1 MPPS 50 duty cycle output line on pin 24 of the 25 pin connector switches to the high state 100 ns after the millisecond strobe The 100 ns nominal delay allows for the output register time delay plus the user s interface set up time requirements At any time the 1 MPPS line is high the data lines from usec up will not be changing states and are therefore available for reading Parallel BCD
64. becomes unavailable it switches to the secondary source When the primary source becomes available again it switches back to the primary PRI NSEC PRI or Primary No Secondary Primary the clock synchronizes with the primary source If the primary source becomes unavailable it switches to the secondary source If the secondary source becomes unavailable AND the primary is available switches back to the primary The default setting is PRI for a single reference source and PRI SEC SEC for a dual reference source Clock source switching is affected by the setting in F73 Timeout When a reference source becomes unavailable or unlocked the number of seconds set in F73 Timeout must elapse before the switch occurs While the reference source is unavailable the clock relies on a frequency source such as its own oscillator or Aux Ref to keep time If Aux Ref is available and enabled the XLi will use Aux Ref as its frequency source See F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas on page 146 for more information After the timeout has elapsed the switching sequence begins Note the switching mode for time out takes place before each switch XLi Time amp Frequency System 107 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H When a time reference becomes unavailable the XLi switches to the other time reference if available The configuration of the time reference e g Primary or Secondary and the settings in F74 Clock Source Contro
65. board number follows lt N gt board number 1 to 10 O ASCII letter indicating output port lt C gt channel number 1 to 4 lt CODE gt IRIG A 130 IRIG A 133 IRIG B 120 IRIG B 123 IRIG E 111 IRIG E 112 IRIG E 121 IRIG E 122 IRIG G 141 IRIG G 142 IRIG H 111 IRIG H 112 IRIG H 121 IRIG H 122 2137 XR3 NASA 36 Note A dash is required when entering IRIG types NASA 36 is entered without a dash 2137 and XR3 have no dashes or spaces when entered CR Carriage Return For example to set board 1 output 1 to IRIG B 123 enter F42 B1 O 1 IRIG B 123 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Setting a port to IRIG A switches all output ports set to IRIG A to the same IRIG A type e g IRIG A 133 The same is true for IRIG G Therefore the following example would set all of board 1 s IRIG A outputs not just output 1 to IRIG A 133 time code F42 B1 O 1 IRIG A 133 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LE gt Requesting the time reference of a specific board Use the following format to request the Time Reference of a specific board F42 lt S gt B lt N gt T lt CR gt where lt N gt board number 1 to 10 lt S gt ASCII space character T ASCII letter requesting Time Reference The XLi responds with the Time Reference for the selected board 72 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H For example to requests the time reference from board 1 enter
66. card gets major time from Have Quick time code input and gets minor time from the 1PPS input F123 s HQ TIME REFERENCE setting identifies the Have Quick option card as a PRIMARY or SECONDARY reference source for F74 CLOCK SOURCE CONTROL or disables the card from being a reference source when STANDBY is selected Note Do not confuse the 1 PPS input connector on this card with other main clock 1PPS Keypad Using the front panel keypad enter ENTER 123 ENTER Press ENTER to step through the following displays Use the up down arrow buttons to select options Continue pressing ENTER to display HAVE QUICK SYNC AVAIL OPTION BAY Select from 1 10 or NOT AVAILABLE HQ PART NUMBER SOFTWARE VERSION FPGA VERSION HQREF STATUS LOCKED UNLOCKED HQPPL LOCKED UNLOCKED INPUT MODE Select from HAVE QUICK 1PPS HAVE QUICK 1PPS HQ TIME REFERENCE BAY N Select from PRIMARY SECONDARY STANDBY SAVE CHANGES Select from YES or NO and press ENTER XLi Time amp Frequency System 161 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Command Line Viewing Card Status For status of the Have Quick 1PPS option board send a command using the following format F123 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt S lt CR gt For example enter F123 B3 S The XLi responds example only F123 B3 HO PART NUMBER 87 8016 3 SOFTWARE 192 8008v1 6 FPGA 184 8016v02 HO REF STATUS LOCKED or UNLOCKED HO PLL LOCKED or UNLOCKED
67. change the time deviation offset but resets the accumulated time deviation to that value The four arrow keys and the numeric keys are used to edit the time deviation offset entry ENTER exits this display and steps to the next Time Deviation Entry Front Panel e VFD Setup Front Panel Display Port e RS 422 Setup Display Port Data Addr Setup XLi Time amp Frequency System 63 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H e Continue With Current Setup If the ENTER key is pressed at this time the FTM will begin displaying information using the current user configuration Line Frequency Entry Pressing ENTER at this point allows the user to scroll between 50 or 60 Hz for the Line Frequency to be measured The selection process is performed by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until the desired frequency is displayed At that time pressing the ENTER key selects the displayed frequency and returns to the Line Frequency Entry display Time Deviation Entry Pressing ENTER at this display allows the user to input a Time Deviation Preset value The range is 99 999 to 99 999 s The number keys are used to enter the desired value the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys may be used to move the cursor and the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys are used to change the sign of the value Pressing the ENTER key will load the displayed Time Deviation Preset into the FTM and reset the accumulated Time Deviation to the newly entered value
68. commands by connecting to the FTP server and transferring files to and from the FTP The XLi gives the FTP server Anonymous as its user name and uses a null password e g the equivalent of pressing the Enter key on your keyboard instead of entering text The FTP server must be configured as follows e Anonymous log ins are enabled The password for Anonymous is disabled or allows a null password Anonymous has read write privileges to Anonymous s home directory Get the IP Address of the FTP Server Workstation If the FTP server is running on your Windows workstation open a DOS command line window on the workstation Click Start Run and type cmd or e Click Start Programs and Accessories in some cases and select Command prompt or DOS prompt Atthe command line type ipconfig Make note of the IP Address For other operating systems and configurations consult the appropriate documentation for obtaining the FTP server s IP address XLi Time amp Frequency System 235 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Copy the Configuration Files to the FTP Server Telnet to the XLi or open a terminal session to it over the serial port Using the command line enter the commands below Replace IP Address with that of the workstation FTP Server Leave lt subdir gt blank the FTP server will save the files in anonymous s home directory Note See Using the Command Line Interface on page 26 if you need instructions fo
69. data bits for each 8 bit character The Time Figure of Merit TFOM denotes the time quality of the incoming Have Quick code While the Xli is locked all bits are high indicating no information no fault is reported When the time error in the Xli exceeds 10mSec the bits are set to an integer value of 9 indicating time error of 10mS or fault Other equipment such as the Xli with Have Quick input will read the TFOM and unlock Refer to ICD GPS 060 Rev A section 4 4 5 for the Have Quick interface requirements HaveQuick without TFOM Output Signal characteristics The Have Quick signal employs biphase Manchester II transmission at approximately 1667 bits per second A logical one is defined as 300 microseconds of a low state followed by 300 microseconds of a high state A transmission of 240 milliseconds of logic ones 400 bits precedes the start of message indicator 16 bits and time day of year and year message 88 bits as opposed to 96 with TFOM The transmission is initiated on a time mark so that the first bit of the 400 ones starts within 10 microseconds of the leading edge of the 1PPS The start of message indicator that follows the ones verifies that the time day of year and year message will follow Each 8 bit character in the data message time of day day of year and year is defined by a modified 8 4 Hamming Code The two start of message characters 8 bits each are not in the modified Hamming Code The modified Hammi
70. e Oe eae me Ore tide A rad ded aodio a RUP C e E ORA 97 IPN PEL 6 2 pep VR RESO EE bp D S Ies 97 GPS Primary Receiver and GPS Secondary Receiver 97 TA A eed a aq iau da a Sala d 98 AUX MM 98 osi A TEE TUO 99 Secondary POWE Vi si ias 99 Rubidium Oscillator 3 3 3 nv da d EM RE EE 99 DAG 02 a ed a Aou day Wl 100 o AA A Ek Sedet 100 Time Error and Time Threshold ooo oooooooooommoo o 100 Alarm LED BE v rat rd es es dt 101 Timeout and Timeout Delay lille eee 101 Power On Alarm Suppress ces des bL S PEN qx P eb a 101 DVD todas eu iius oS ELE SE ue S Sod 101 Clear Alarm Lael sra pb C Due ete a 102 Fi4 Clock Source Control ree rco Sa ERE ia 107 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F77 PTTI Output Configuration sir AS 109 F78 Parallel BCD Output Configuration oooooooooooooooo roo 112 F90 Code Output Configuration 0 20 24 424404046 ea y ev RR bI 116 F100 Network Port Configuration amp XLi Firmware 004 117 F100 EA lt Ethernet Address nta CF entrer OO 120 FIO0TPJIP AGddIe8S asa La RUE Ne eae a Eau 120 FIO00SM Subn t Mask o myr osen etene eand PRAEC ART ex d EUER 121 Tel OO Gr Gale Walt ades Ore ha ea us E RC DUE ie ae 122 F100 IC Network Port Settings 2 0 0 0 cece ene 123 F100 BASET 10 100 BASE T 0 eee ccc hn 123 F100 L LOCK UNLOCK Remote Lockout ooooooooommmm o 124 F100
71. example to enable an Aux Ref 5 MHz input frequency with 1 KQ input impedance enter F113 AUX REF 5MHZ 1K lt CR gt Or to disable F113 enter F113 DISABLE lt CR gt Or to enable Freq Meas of a 1 MHz input with a 50 O input impedance every 1 seconds enter F113 FREQ MEAS 1MHZ 50 1 lt CR gt To all three of the above examples the XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt If enabling Freq Meas display the Freq Meas measurements using the following format F113 lt S gt SHOW lt CR gt The XLi responds using the following format Interval lt S gt is lt S gt lt INT gt lt S gt seconds lt CR gt lt LF gt 4 HR He 4H H lt CR gt lt LE gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 149 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Where Interval is ASCII character string Interval is S ASCII space character or separator INT Frequency Measurement Interval seconds ASCII character string seconds ASCII plus or minus character ASCII integer from 0 to 9 e ASCII characters e lt CR gt lt LF gt line terminator either a carriage return and line feed for output strings or a carriage return only for input strings For example enter F113 SHOW lt CR gt The XLi responds example Interval is 1 seconds lt CR gt lt LF gt 9 600000e 10 lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 080000e 09 lt CR gt lt LF gt 1 560000e 09 lt CR gt lt LF gt To stop Freq Meas enter Ctrl C on the command line Note Freq Me
72. following startup while the XLi is acquiring a reference source F8 s displays time of year information from the XLi s unsynchronized system clock When the system clock acquires a reference source and synchronizes with it F8 displays the new time of year information The transition looks like this 56 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 365 16 00 14 365 16 00 15 365 16 00 16 365 16 00 17 199 13 56 03 199 13 56 04 In the first two lines above the unsynchronized time is followed by a time quality character In this case the indicates that the XLi system clock is not locked to a reference source As the XLi locks to the reference source the disappears After a couple seconds the new synchronized time of year information appears If the reference source becomes unavailable F8 continues generating time of year information based on the synchronized time and the character for the first time quality flag typically appears as the time error starts increasing 199 11 19 31 199 11 19 32 199211 19733 199 11 19 34 The format of time output can be changed using F11 Time Output Format described in the XLi manual The default output string format is lt SOH gt DDD HH MM SSQ lt CR gt lt LF gt where lt SOH gt ASCII Start of Heading character CR ASCII Carriage Return character lt LF gt ASCII Line Feed character DDD day of year HH hours MM minutes SS
73. gt F27 B lt N gt PS lt cr gt lt If gt REQUEST TIME DEVIATION PRESET VALUE To request accumulated Time Deviation enter F27 B lt N gt PS lt cr gt lt 1f gt F27 B lt N gt PS 99 999 lt cr gt lt If gt SET TIME DEVIATION PRESET VALUE Accumulated Time Deviation can be preset to a given value in the range of 99 999 to 99 999 seconds When executed this command presets the accumulated Time Deviation value to the entered value All previously accumulated Time Deviation is lost Example sessions follow Preset accumulated Time Deviation to 1 0 seconds Enter XLi Time amp Frequency System 67 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F27 B lt N gt PS 1 00 lt cr gt lt 1f gt Response OK lt cr gt lt 1f gt Request current Time Deviation Preset Value Enter F27 B lt N gt PS lt cr gt lt lf gt Response F27 B lt N gt PS 1 00 lt cr gt lt 1f gt Preset accumulated Time Deviation to 0 0 seconds Enter F27 B lt N gt PS O cr 1f Response OK cr lf Preset accumulated Time Deviation to 100 0 seconds Enter F27 B lt N gt PS 100 lt cr gt lt 1f gt Response ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE lt cr gt lt 1f gt F27 B lt N gt TD lt cr gt lt If gt DATA ON DEMAND OUTPUT The Data On Demand Output allows the user to request a single measurement by sending an upper case T lt cr gt lt lf gt while in the F27 B N TD mode Subsequent receipts of the letter T without the carriage return linefeed combination ar
74. gt lt LF gt To enable DST and set the DST entry and exit times use the following format F66 MANUAL lt INHOUR gt lt SEP gt lt INWEEK gt lt SEP gt lt INDAY gt lt SEP gt lt INMONTH gt lt OUTHOUR gt lt SEP gt lt OUTWEEK gt lt SEP gt lt OUTDAY gt lt SEP gt lt OUTMONTH gt lt CR gt 84 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where lt INHOUR gt time to enter DST in 24 hour format SEP one or more separator characters either space comma or tab characters For output strings this will be a single space character lt INWEEK gt which week to enter DST 1 2 3 4 or O for last lt INDAY gt day of week to enter DST 1 through 7 where Sunday is 1 lt INMONTH gt month to enter DST 1 through 12 where 1 is January lt OUTHOUR gt hour to exit DST in 24 hour format lt OUTWEEK gt which week to exit DST 1 2 3 4 or O for last lt OUTDAY gt day in to exit DST 1 through 7 where Sunday is 1 lt OUTMONTH gt month to exit DST 1 through 12 where 1 is January lt CR gt carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example enter F66 MANUAL 02 2 1 03 02 1 1 11 Meaning Manual settings are in effect The entry time is 02 a m week 2 second day 1 Sunday month 3 March The exit time is 02 a m week 1 first day 1 Sunday month 11 November To leave the value of any item unchanged insert
75. in the leading position of any segment followed by any placeholder characters and the following separator For example to suppress DDD enter Fll X To see the resulting change to F11 enter F11 F11 with DDD suppressed responds F11 XDD HH MM SS mmmQ With DDD suppressed the output of F8 would look like this example 16 23 32 60 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Ending a format string early no or separator at the end with a carriage return enables the remaining un typed characters This makes it easy to restore the default F11 formatting To return F11 to its default format enter F11 D To display the restored defaults enter F11 again F11 responds F11 DDD HH MM SS mmmQ The DDD HH MM SS mmm and Q segments can not be replaced with characters they can only be suppressed The and separators can be replaced with ASCII characters or suppressed using X For example to replace the separators with characters enter Fll D H M S When you check the results by entering F11 F11 responds F11 DDDDHHHMMMSSSmmmQ With the new formatting F8 displays 128D16H41M27 And F9 displays 365D16H45M225680 F13 Time Error Use function F13 to request the estimated worst case time error due to oscillator drift during periods of unlock from a reference source See System Time amp Frequency Accura
76. it Insert the edges of the E1 card into the grooves of the guide rails in the empty option slot Firmly push the E1 card into the option slot so the connector on the back of the card engages the backplane connector completely and the front of the card is flush with the adjacent surfaces on the back of the XLi Secure the E1 card using the previously removed screws Operation No special operation procedures are required However configuration of the Major and Minor faults using F73 affects the operation of this option when AIS and Output signal control is enabled via DIP switch S1 position 8 Note Note Alarm Relay closures are silk screened on the panel above the three wire wrap pins These silk screen legends indicate the non energized state of the relay closures During normal opera tion the relays are energized so that a power failure would indicate a fault condition Therefore the Alarm state is the non energized state which is described by the silk screened legends The XLi provides accurate time and frequency whenever the clock is locked to a reference source When the clock is unlocked the XLi flywheels on its internal oscillator or if available and enabled uses an external frequency reference on the J3 Aux Ref input The accuracy and stability of this card s outputs are characteristic of the internal oscillator or Aux Ref to which they are phase locked When the XLi is equipped with an optional OCXO or Rubidium oscillator this card i
77. keys file might look like il M truetime 2 M TTXli When you invoke the NTP client at the command line use the following options b to turn on broadcast reception k etc ntp keys to specify the name and location of the keys file d for debugging An example command line might look like ntpd d d d b k etc ntp keys Important lines in the ntp conf file of the ntp client not server are trusted key 1 2 If you do not use MD5 authentication remove from disable auth XLi Time amp Frequency System 285 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H This page was intentionally left blank 286 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H E Time Code Formats The following section provides a summary description of the three time code types used by the XLi The definitive IRIG time code specification the Range Commanders Council s IRIG Serial Time Code Formats IRIG Standard 200 04 is available on the Web at https wsmrc2vger wsmr army mil rcc manuals 200 04 TT 45 paf In addition to the IRIG Standard 200 04 document the IEEE Std space 1344 1995 document extends the Range Commanders Council document with additional fields These fields include leap second information Daylight Saving Time information binary coded decimal seconds and time quality information The IEEE Std 1344 1995 document is purchased at http standards ieee org The same document is summarized at the following link
78. letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number of the GPS option card 1 through 10 CR carriage return character SEP One or more space characters SIGN either or blank lt DELAY gt 1 to 6 digit delay from 0 nS to 999999 nS ns nanoseconds ns or NS for input string lt LF gt line feed character For example to see the antenna cable delay for the GPS card in option bay 4 enter F51 B4 lt CR gt XLi responds F51 B4 000060ns lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the antenna cable delay for an option card use the following format F51 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt lt DELAY gt NS lt CR gt For example to set the antenna cable delay for the GPS card in option bay 4 to 100 nS enter F51 B4 100NS lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LE gt F52 Distribution Cable Delay Use function F52 to display or set the distribution cable delay for the time code and 1 PPS outputs F52 compensates for the signal s travel time from the XLi to its point of use The distribution cable delay applies uniformly to all output ports The as shipped factory setting is 0 ns The range of possible values is 999 999 ns to 999 999 ns Positive values advance the timing signals while negative values retard them 78 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To calculate what the setting should be multiply the delay foot by the length of the cable in feet The typical de
79. long period of time or the problem may be incorrect firmware installed on the Processor Assembly Sine Wave Amplitude Adjustment Set the amplitude of the 1 5 and 10 MHz outputs to 1 Vrms into a 50 Q load by adjusting pots R9 R15 and R17 respectively on the 1 5 10 MHz MPPS card T1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000T1 8 Introduction The T1 Output Card card generates telecommunications timing signals that comply with ITU T G 703 and ITU T G 704 standards for 12 Frame Multiframe D4 or SuperFrame and 24 Frame Multiframe ESF or Extended SuperFrame In addition when the XLi is configured with an appropriate high stability oscillator option it meets the requirements of ANSI T1 101 1994 and ITU T G 811 for Primary Reference Clock operation The card is a single height plug in option card All of its output signals are balanced and provided through panel mounted wire wrap pins Two sets of Form C relay closures are also included for major and minor alarm indications These closures are accessible on the panel mounted wire wrap pins Figure 11 Wire wrap outputs on the T1 card iis E snl ai I Rl gog cm0 0o o0 0o ojo opn onon p XLi Time amp Frequency System 181 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H This option card operates without software configuration by the user Specifications Framed All 1 s DS1 T1 1544 kbps Outputs T1 Outputs A and B Formats SuperFrame D4 Line code B8ZS AMI these are the same for all
80. lose one second Note When using F73 in the front panel display interface the NTP indicator is only present if the NTP option is installed Otherwise this indicator is hidden Clear Alarm Latch Clear Alarm Latch does not report any errors Each F73 indicator has an Alarm Latch that is raised by a Fault or Unlocked condition When the indicator returns to a Locked or OK state the alarm latch remains raised This is useful for identifying and troubleshooting transient alarms The operator typically decides to clear the alarm latch after attempting to fix the cause of some transient alarm so that new transient faults can be identified after they occur Note An indicator must be enabled for the fault unlock state to raise the latch state If disabled a fault or unlocked state will not raise the corresponding latch The keyboard display interface shows the Alarm Latch as an asterisk next to an indicator as follows GPS PRI OK ALARM ENABLE Keypad Note The Alarm Latch asterisk is not the same as the reference source unavailable asterisk that can sometimes be seen on the STATUS display Command Line To see the fault status of the alarm indicators enter the following command F73 CR XLi replies F73 lt S gt S lt STATUS gt lt SOURCE gt lt S gt lt 12345678 9ABCDEFGHIJ gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 7 ASCII character 7 102 XLi Time amp Frequency System X
81. lt S gt BLINK lt SEP gt ENABLE lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To disable LED Blink enter F73 lt S gt BLINK lt SEP gt DISABLE lt CR gt 106 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To view the Power On Alarm Suppress setting enter F73 lt S gt SUPPRESS lt CR gt The XLi responds F73 POWER ON MINOR ALARM SUPPRESS 300 To set a new Power On Alarm Suppress value enter the following string replacing lt SEC gt with the number of seconds Range 0 to 86 400 seconds enter F73 SUPPRESS lt SEC gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt F74 Clock Source Control Use function F74 to select the primary and secondary reference sources and configure the fail over sequences The switching modes are PRI or Primary Ensures the unit remains connected to the primary source and doesn t attempt to switch SEC or Secondary Ensures the unit remains connected to the secondary source and doesn t attempt to switch PRI SEC SEC or Primary Secondary Secondary the clock synchronizes with the primary source If the primary source becomes unavailable it switches to the secondary source and stays there even if the primary source becomes available again It stays on secondary even if the secondary source becomes unavailable PRI SEC PRI or Primary Secondary Primary the clock synchronizes with the primary source If the primary source
82. mSec Output with Unlock Status 87 8090 2 This Parallel BCD module provides provides 42 lines of parallel BCD time data representing 100 s of days to units of milliseconds two data valid strobes and an unlock line Unlock which indicates when the XLi is unlocked from the selected reference source OUTPUT Day of year hours minutes seconds and milliseconds Outputs TTL LVTTL Levels 4mA source or sink Logic Low 0 4 V Logic High 2 4 V Qty 1 XLi Time amp Frequency System 205 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Connector Mating Connector Physical CPU Aware Compatibility Panel mounted 50 pin 3M ribbon type connector 3M Part Number 3425 6000 or 3425 6050 or equivalent Single high option bay Yes Legacy ExacTime 6000 GPS_Option_13A Parallel BCD 1kPPS STROBE This line goes to the high state on the second and remains high for 800nS 1PPS STROBE This line goes high 500nS after the 1KPPS STROBE and remains high for 800mS Unlock This line goes high when the clock is unlocked from a reference source 50 pin D MILLISECONDS CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT Table 9 PIN OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 1 1 s of msec 26 20 s of days 2 40 s of min 27 2 s of sec 3 2 s of msec 28 40 s of days 4 1 s of hours 29 4 s of sec 5 4 s of msec 30 80 s of days 6 2 s of hours 31 8 s of sec 7 8 s of msec 32 100 s of days 8 4 s of hours 33 10 s of sec
83. manual Provides instructions for changing the settings if needed Note Unless specified the settings remain the same as those in the Standard XLi 28 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Standard XLi The standard XLi configuration comes with an AC Power supply and CPU module The standard XLi does not require changes to its factory settings which are as follows Description Setting Function amp Cross Reference J1 Configuration IRIG B 120 AM E110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 J1 Time Reference Primary E110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 J2 Rate Out 10 MPPS F111 J2 Output Rate PPO on page 142 J3 Configuration Aux Ref Disabled F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas on page 146 1 PPS 1 PPS non configurable Non configurable Code Output Format IRIG B 120 AM F90 Code Output Configuration on page 116 Reference Source PRI F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 Additionally the Standard XLi s factory settings for F73 are as follows Indicator Parameter Name PLL Locked Low Phase Noise LPN PLL Locked GPS Primary Receiver GPS Secondary Receiver IRIG Fault Aux Ref Fault Primary Power Secondary Power Factory Setting Alarm Enabled Alarm Enabled Alarm Disabled Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Alarm Disabled Rubidium oscillator visible on display when Rb Osc is installed Alarm
84. new user name The XLi responds CONFIRM NEW USER NAME Enter the same new user name again to confirm the spelling If the same new user name has been entered twice The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt In this case the new user name will be used for the next login using the command line interface However if the new user name is entered differently the second time The XLi responds ERROR USER NAMES DO NOT MATCH NEW USERNAME REJECTED lt CR gt lt LF gt In this case the old user name will be used for the next login using the command line interface If you have forgotten the operator or guest user name and or password use Bootloader Mode to change them In Bootloader Mode log in using the default user names operator guest and passwords See Using the Command Line Interface on page 26 Then use F100 PN and F100P to set the new user names and passwords Once this has been completed reboot the unit and log in using the new username or password See F100 P Change User Password on page 134 Bootloader Mode To enter Bootloader Mode when resetting a forgotten user name F100 PN or password F100 P e Reboot the XLi using the F100 K L L Reboot command Immediately press the MENU key on the keypad and hold down while the XLi is rebooting The XLi display will hang while displaying BOOTING After a few moments release
85. on overview of the system status including the status of the clock and XLi Time amp Frequency System 275 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H the reference clock source The systemStatusGeneralGroup also contains the statusDescriptorStr object that returns a text string identical to the output of the F73 command on the command line interface The systemStatusDetail group contains objects describing the current status of each system object See the graph above and refer to the xliSystem SMlv2 mib MIB for a complete description of each object XLi MainCard Group xliMainCard 2 ntp 1 ys ntpInPkts ntpOutPkts ntpInErrors ntpAuthFail ntpDesiredAcc ntpEstErr ntpSysLeap ntpSysHostMode ntpSysStratum ntpSysPoll ntpSysPrecision ntpSysRootDelay ntpSysRootDisp ntpSysRefClockldent 14 OONOAARWN E A A CONO At present the xliMainCard group contains only the NTP subgroup as shown above Refer to the xliMainCard SMIv2 mib MIB definitions for a description of each of the NTP statistics XLi Traps All traps for the XLi product are defined under Truetime products xli xli Traps This is required to maintain compatibility with MIBS defined using the Structure of Management Information version 1 definitions The XLi SNMP agent will send SNMP version 1 traps This is done to maintain compatibility with SNMPv1 managers The traps presently defined are alarmSystemNotification The alarmSy
86. port will respond with the ASCII character string F110 lt SP gt lt Code gt lt SP gt lt Source gt lt SP gt lt Impedance gt lt SP gt lt SP gt lt Sign gt lt SP gt lt Delay gt lt SP gt lt Mode gt lt SP gt lt Bypass gt lt LT gt where F ASCII character F 110 function number lt SP gt ASCII space character one or more lt Code gt Input Code IRIG B120 1344 or IRIG B000 1344 lt Source gt Clock source PRIMARY SECONDARY STANDBY lt Impedance gt 100K 50 50 ohm impedance is selectable with IRIG B000 1344 type only lt Sign gt Code Sign POSITIVE NEGATIVE lt Delay gt Propagation Delay 0 99999uS lt Mode gt IRIG Mode SYNC GEN lt Bypass gt Error bypass OFF 1 FRAME 2 FRAMES 3 FRAMES 4 FRAMES 5 FRAMES 6 FRAMES 7 FRAMES 8 FRAMES 9 FRAMES 10 FRAMES lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample request F110 lt CR gt Response F110 IRIG B000 1344 PRIMARY 50 NEGATIVE 66161 us SYNC GEN OFF lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the J1 Input Configuration for an IRIG code with IEEE 1344 extensions send a character string with the previously defined F110 entry format to the Serial Network port Only valid values are accepted XLi Time amp Frequency System 141 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Sample entry F110 IRIG B120 1344 SECONDARY 100 POSITIVE 1234 US SYNC GEN 1 FRAME lt CR gt Respon
87. seconds mmm milliseconds colon separator Q time quality character see the following table XLi Time amp Frequency System 57 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The time quality character Q is one of the following characters SPACE Time error is less than time quality flag 1 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 1 s threshold j Time error has exceeded time quality flag 2 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 3 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 4 s threshold or a reference source is unavailable The four time quality thresholds are set by F5 Time Quality Setup See F13 Time Error in the standard XLi User Guide for more information Command Line For example to initiate Continuous Time once per second enter F8 lt CR gt The XLi replies 199 11 19 30 lt CR gt lt LF gt 199 11 19 31 lt CR gt lt LF gt 199 11 19 32 lt CR gt lt LF gt To stop F8 Continuous Time Once Per Second press Ctrl C on your keyboard hex 03 F9 Time On Request This function is available through the command line interface only It is not available from the keypad Use function F9 to record the exact time the XLi receives a request from the user Enter the command F9 lt CR gt to prepare the XLi for the user s request At the desired moment send the request to the XLi by entering an upper case T The XLi saves the current time of day accurate to within 1uS
88. the GPS Receiver should be very infrequent and short in dura tion Under more difficult conditions and with poorer visibility of the sky faults will be more frequent and last longer but they should still be intermittent coming and going as GPS satellites come in and out of view As long as the Clock Status doesn t alarm these brief GPS faults will have little effect on the XLi clock and corresponding outputs The person operating the XLi should characterize the frequency and duration of faults for a given installation and should investigate and take action if the pattern of faults changes significantly or doesn t meet requirements When the indicator reports a fault use F60 to check the number of visible satellites and F119 to check if the GPS antenna cable is showing an open or short condition Check that the GPS antenna installa tion conforms to the guidelines given in the GPS Antenna installation section Check the antenna antenna cable and connections for problems Note Note When using the GPS receiver with an antenna splitter an antenna fault may occur due to a DC block in the antenna path The antenna fault can be avoided by using a splitter that provides a load resistor to simulate the antenna current draw If a GPS receiver reports a continuous fault and the GPS antenna and antenna cable have been tested and found to be good contact Symmetricom Global Customer Assistance IRIG Status OK or Fault The IRIG indicator
89. the XLi User Homepage sets of pages Non administrative users e g user1 only have access to the XLi User Homepage set of pages Sessions Only one user can be logged into the web interface at a time The web interface does not support concurrent web sessions If a second user tries to log in the browser displays a 503 Web Page Server Busy message The XLi supports concurrent user sessions on the web and command line interfaces on the network or serial port However Symmetricom recommends avoiding concurrent administrative user sessions The XLi s web server automatically closes inactive web sessions after 30 minutes of inactivity User Names and Passwords The ten administrative user names operator1 through operator10 have Zeus as the default password Some older units when upgraded may have casey as the default password The ten non administrative user names user through user10 have ttm as the default password Only administrative users can change the user names and passwords User names and passwords must have 1 to 15 characters and are limited to upper lower case alphanumeric and underscore characters No special characters Logging In To log in enter the IP address of the XLi s NET network port into the web browser s address field At the XLi Home Page click the Login button Enter the appropriate user name and password and click the Login button with your mous
90. the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 5 El faultAuxRef OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if an auxiliary reference clock fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 6 GI faultPrimaryPower OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a primary power fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 7 GI faultSecondaryPower OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a secondary power fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 8 GI faultRbOsc OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION XLi Time amp Frequency System 265 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H TRUE if a rubidium oscillator fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 9 El faultDac OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a digital to audio converter fault has occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 10 El faultFirstTimeLock OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if the system clock has failed to lock since power on and the
91. to a buffer and then outputs it to the command line interface The XLi continues to provide the time of day each time it receives a T until F9 is cancelled To cancel F9 enter Ctrl C on your keyboard The command line disregards all input other than SHIFT T and Ctrl C hex 03 The time of day output is only available on the network or serial port used to give the F9 command F9 s default output string is as follows lt SOH gt DDD HH MM SS mmmQ lt CR gt lt LF gt 58 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where lt SOH gt ASCII Start of Heading character CR ASCII Carriage Return character lt LF gt ASCII Line Feed character YYYY year DDD day of year HH hours MM minutes SS seconds mmm milliseconds colon separator Q time quality character see the following table The time quality character Q is one of the following characters SPACE Time error is less than time quality flag 1 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 1 s threshold E Time error has exceeded time quality flag 2 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 3 s threshold Time error has exceeded time quality flag 4 s threshold or a reference source is unavailable For example to prepare Time on Request enter F9 lt CR gt Then to request the current time enter SHIFT T on your keyboard T does not appear XLi responds lt SOH gt 128 20 30 04
92. to the previously mentioned IRIG codes The NASA 36 code frame also contains 100 bit elements like the IRIG codes In the strict sense NASA 36 encodes Coordinated Universal Time UTC in 24 hour format and not local time Nonetheless this instrument can encode UTC or local time in either 24 or 12 hour formats NASA 36 Code Format The level shifted pulse width modulated serial format of NASA 36 is divided into two segments The first segment encodes time of year in binary coded decimal BCD notation The second segment encodes control functions unused on Model XL i The two code segments are contained within one frame The frame length for NASA 36 is 1 second long and contains 100 elements pulses each of which start every 10 milliseconds An element may represent either a binary zero a binary one a reference marker or a position identifier A zero is 2 ms a one is 6 ms a position identifier is 6 ms A reference marker is 5 consecutive position identifiers A reference marker locates the beginning of each frame XLi NASA 36 Time Code Input Output The XLi generates and decodes the following NASA 36 time codes NASA 36 AM 1 kHz sine wave amplitude modulated BCD NASA 36 DC DC level shift pulse width coded BCD XLi Time amp Frequency System 289 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Figure 20 IRIG Standard Format A E Y LVNUOd OHYONYLS DIU SOMOONS CLE Er ELLAN PI NOA IE BAVO LL 32 1MO SIM LY a ret INN pU
93. uua EO queo ieu ena voi emet du 133 Remote Lock Status 20 ied Fee iS 125 Remote Lockout sitos sch eee aie a fen S Dat se dedos es Ire de Doa edd 124 Restarting the Unit Please wait oo oooooooooomoomo 233 Rubidium Oscillator Upgrade o o oooooooooooo oo o 224 S Satellite A aded AILLEURS DIVERSES qM 81 Self Test olatus usina ai ER IQ A RES 126 Seal POS tus ei A uice sites cu e tuu s MILLE IAN tig 2 8 Serial Port COMMGUPAUON s e pe opas t Ert e D Dogg Ex ota Ad 52 Ello ciue Suae ar exa ioter ER bu oai da tete eia 26 Gonhectihg TIO anita veo EIA ee ec ab e ee ee as 26 A O 39 SOSSION TIMSOU vos deus ees ee fed ob rs redada y 39 SOSSIONS e rs TS AA IIA A ER 41 Signal Strength Requirements GPO abe 2 ine Pe pie eiie E NE bets s bs beaten 21 c eT EE EE REPE 121 SNMP 117 119 131 132 232 235 236 237 245 270 271 272 273 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 Configure Parameters 0 0 0 cece eee eee nee 131 235 8 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Configuring and Testing ciar 278 Glossary of Related Terms llle 277 SNMP Addressing ie recostada 271 SNMP Private Enterprise MIB Structure o o o 271 snmp conf editing 22 asa co ers d ba RENE ric EG ire ees 270 Software System Firmware upgrading oooooooooooo 239 Software Options llle 221 SoftWare Velsibn estepas cas ed i bee d d eU 62
94. w Main CPU Card Model XLi 2U Chassis w Main CPU Card Non Plug in Options OCXO Oscillator High Stability 10 MHz OCXO Oscillator e Rubidium Oscillator for 1U chassis e Rubidium Oscillator for 2U chassis e High Stability Rubidium Oscillator Software Key Enabled Options Network Time Protocol on Standard Network Port Time Interval Event Time TIET on Main CPU J1 Programmable Pulse Output PPO on Main CPU J2 e Frequency Measurement Freq Meas on Main CPU J3 Plug in Options e Replacement Main CPU Card e L1 L2 GPS Antenna w 50 coax e GPS C A Receiver w TRAIM Antenna amp Cable GPS Receiver Antenna 8 Cable legacy item 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output Card e Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 e T1 Telecom Interface Card E1 Telecom Interface Card Multicode 4 AM Output Card Low Phase Noise 5 MHz Card Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Card Enhanced Low Phase Noise Card N 8 Frequency Synthesizer Card N 1 Frequency Synthesizer Card Frequency amp Time Deviation Monitor Card Have Quick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference Card Have Quick with TFOM Output Card PTTI BCD Output Card e Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality Parallel BCD uSec with Time Quality Parallel BCD mSec Output 12 VDC Power Module 24 VDC Power Module XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 1510 602 1510 652 87 399 18 87 399 19 87 399 RB1U 87 399 RB2U 87 399 RB2UA 8
95. water pipe or conduit that is rigid enough to withstand high winds without flexing Use guy wires to stabilize masts longer than 10 ft 3 048 m Notes The XLi requires a 12 Volt compatible antenna Antennas not rated for 12 V will be damaged Use a splitter to connect a GPS antenna to multiple receivers Avoid using BNC T connectors TheL1 GPS antenna is designed to operate with up to 150 ft 60 96 m of RG 59 coax cable An optional Down Converter can be used for cable runs of 1 500 ft 457 2 m using RG 58 coaxial cable XLi Time amp Frequency System 19 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ae gt Symmetricom O 0000000000 Figure 3 L1 GPS Antenna methods for cabling and mounting Connecting the Antenna to the Receiver Note that the pipe in the left image of Figure 3 does not separate from the antenna as shown It is shown in this image for conceptual purposes The antenna itself is mounted inside the top half of white antenna assembly In the image above this part has the Symmetricom logo on it and the dotted line with the TNC signal connector below it The top half of the antenna housing is sealed and therefore weather proof The lower part of the white antenna housing shown above below the dotted line is used for support and for protecting the antenna cable connection The two halves of the white antenna housing are secured together by four 4 40 UNC captive
96. when tracking four 4 satellites TRAIM Mask 148 XLi 1 PPS Accuracy 30 nS RMS UTC USNO 100 nS Peak 99 Antenna input Female BNC Antenna Power 20 mA 220 mA 12 V CPU Aware Yes Related topics Installing the GPS Antenna on page 19 XLi with a GPS Reference on page 30 XLi with two optional GPS receivers on page 30 F50 GPS Receiver LLA XYZ Position on page 75 E51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay on page 77 F60 GPS Receiver Satellite List on page 81 F69 Time Mode on page 89 E73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 E119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 lo o le Jo le jo je je je je Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 Introduction The Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor FTM option is specifically designed for power utilities to monitor power line stability When installed in a Symmetricom XLi this option samples one phase of the 50 Hz or 60 Hz frequency supplied from the user s power line and provides frequency and time information The XLi outputs the frequency and time information on the XLi s front panel display via FTP through the XLi s command line and through the FTM RS 422 display driver port Use F123 to configure and view the status of the Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 option card See F27 FTM III Configuration on page 63 The FTM provides an accurate measurement of the lo
97. 0 21 24 09 2002 where LOCKED The System Clock is Locked or Unlocked to the current reference source See Clock Status in F73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 i A reference source input has been configured but is not available Note When using GPS may remain visible for up to 13 minutes See F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 GPS PRI Shows the reference source type The function that controls each one is noted below e GPS PRI GPS SEC F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 HQ PPS PRI HQ PPS SEC F123 Have Quick Input 1 PPS Sync Con figuration on page 161 AUX REF E113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas on page 146 Automatic switching between the reference sources listed above is controlled by F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 UTC Time display mode GPS UTC Standard or Local F69 Time Mode on page 89 200 21 24 09 2002 The time in DDD HH MM SS YYYY format See Time Display on page 34 Menu Display To use the XLi functions that are available from the keypad press the MENU button on the keypad Function Summary on page 45 lists which functions are available from the Menu Display XLi Time amp Frequency System 35 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Pressing the MENU key on the front of the XLi displays the first function F1 TIME ZONE OFFS
98. 0 4 s of sec 22 440 2 s of sec 23 460 1 s of sec 24 480 800 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 25 500 400 s of days High 1 1f Abbreviated 26 520 200 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 27 540 100 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 28 560 80 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 29 580 40 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 30 600 20 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 31 620 10 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 32 640 8 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 33 660 4 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 34 680 2 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 35 700 1 s of days High 1 if Abbreviated 36 720 TFOM 8 High 1 if Abbreviated 37 740 TFOM 4 High 1 if Abbreviated 38 760 TFOM 2 High 1 if Abbreviated 39 780 TFOM 1 High 1 if Abbreviated 40 49 800 980 Unused High 1 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 209 TIME QUALITY INDICATORS Table 11 TFOM XLi Estimated Time Error ETE Number 1111 Not Used 1011 Not Used 1010 Not Used 1001 Initial condition clock unlocked or 10mSec ETE 1000 Clock unlocked and 1mSec lt ETE lt 10mSec 0111 Clock unlocked and 100uSec lt ETE lt 1 mSec 0110 Clock unlocked and 10uSec ETE lt 100uSec 0101 Clock unlocked and 1uSec lt ETE lt 10uSec 0100 Clock unlocked and 100nSec ETE lt luSec 0011 Clock unlocked and 10nSec lt ETE lt 100nSec 0010 Clock unlocked and 1nSec ETE lt 10nSec 0001 Clock Locked to a
99. 00 BH to flash memory F100 BUFP Burn FPGA Firmware N S Upgrading system firmware burn the FPGA program file bin selected using F100 BH to the flash memory F100 CONFIG Configure NTP amp N S w 2 Transfer the NTP and SNMP configuration files between SNMP the XLi and an FTP server for editing F100 J Factory Mode Jumper NS View the status of the factory mode jumper which is used by factory technicians Not of interest to most end users F100 K L L Reboot N S Reboot the XLi F100 P Change User Password N S W Change the XLi password F100 PI PING N S Ping from the XLi to another host on the network F100 PN Change User Name N S W Change the User Name F108 Oscillator Configuration K N S W View the oscillator type F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET K N S W Configure the J1 input connector F111 J2 Output Rate PPO K N S W Configure the J2 output connector F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas K N S W Configure the J3 input connector F116 Display Brightness Level K Set the brightness of the display on the XLi s front panel F117 Factory Configuration K N S W View some of the factory settings such as the serial number or NTP state F118 Option Board Configuration K N S W View the contents of each option bay Only recognizes certain cards F119 GPS Receiver Configuration K N S W Configure and display status for GPS Receivers F120 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer K N S W Configure and display stat
100. 034 2 Connector Quantity and Type Four female BNC Mechanical 1 slot 2 slots with Alarm relay option IRIG Code Out Format IRIG A B IEEE 1344 or NASA 36 Amplitude AM AM 3 0 Vp p 1V into 50 Q Ratio AM 3 1 10 Amplitude DC TTL into 50 Q Phasing In phase with carrier 10 uS Alarm Active High Amplitude TTL Levels into 50 Q Rates Rate 1 PPS 1 kPPS 10 kPPS 100 kPPS 1 MPPS 5 MPPS 10 MPPS Duty cycle 60 40 10 Amplitude TTL TTL Levels into 50 Q 168 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Optional Programmable Pulse On time edge Rising Amplitude TTL Levels into 50 Q Alarm Relay 87 8034 2 Connection Terminal strip COM NO NC Max Voltage 48 VAC VDC Max Current 2A 24 VDC Configuring the Expansion Module Each of the Expansion Module s outputs can be independently configured to generate a signal type This is done using jumpers and switches located on the module Symmetricom configures the output signals at the factory per the customer sales order To change the configuration identify the jumper at JP2 that corresponds to the output you are configuring For example jumper J4 AM corresponds to the J4 output To generate time code AM move the plug in JP2 to the AM jumper For example to generate time code AM on the J4 output move the plug from J4 DC to J4 AM At this point the configuration procedure would be complete Note the format of th
101. 14 Goes High Second 15 Goes High Third 17 Goes High Fourth PIN ESTIMATED WORST CASE 50 GOES HIGH First Threshold 14 GOES HIGH Second Threshold 15 GOES HIGH Third Threshold 17 GOES HIGH Fourth Threshold ERROR ALL PINS LOW Less than First Threshold When time is again synchronized the time quality lines will again go low as the unit re corrects to the proper time At initial turn on or after a power failure the time quality lines will remain in the high state until the clock has synchronized The time quality lines can therefore be used as read inhibit lines to guarantee a given timing accuracy 1 PPS 1 kPPS STROBE LINES Both 1 PPS and 1 kPPS strobe lines on the 50 pin output connector indicate valid BCD time data The 1 PPS 50 duty cycle output line on Pin 16 6 of the 50 pin connector switches to the high state 100ns after the second This allows the user to use the rising edge of this strobe to clock data into a remote system The 100 ns delay allows for the output register time delay plus the user s interface setup time requirements At any time the 1 PPS strobe line is high the data lines from seconds up will not be changing states and are therefore available for reading The 1 kPPS 50 duty cycle output line on pin 9 20 of the 50 pin connector switches to the high state 100 ns after the millisecond The 100 ns delay allows for the output register time delay plus the user s interface set up time requirements At any
102. 32 422 Serial I O Port Vacuum florescent display 19 button keypad 90 264 VAC In addition the XLi s standard features can be expanded with the following optional configurations GPS C A Receiver References Programmable Pulse Output PPO Network Time Server NTP Multicode Output Card N 1 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer Low Phase Noise 5 MHz Output Card Low Phase Noise 10MHz Output Card Enhanced Low Phase Noise Module T1 E1 Output Card Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 Rate Generator 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output Card Have Quick Input 1 PPS Sync Reference Card Have Quick with TFOM Output Card PTTI BCD Output Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality Card Parallel BCD uSec Output with Time Quality Card Parallel BCD mSec Output Card Oscillator Options OCXO Rubidium Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor Time Interval Event Time Option DC Power Supplies for 12 24 and 48 VDC applications Redundant power supplies TimeMonitor Software Expansion module See 6 Option Cards on page 167 for more information Optional oscillator upgrades provide enhanced short term stability when locked to a reference source and improved holdover flywheeling when a reference source is unavailable See P7 Oscillators on page 223 for more information 2 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Clock Architecture The following figures provide a simpl
103. 6 when the user attempts to access any function other than F6 F6 remains available through the keypad at all times The factory setting for F6 Keypad Lock is disabled Command Line To display the Keypad Lock status send F6 lt CR gt XLi responds F6 lt S gt lt STATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 55 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 6 function number S ASCII space character one or more STATE ENABLE or DISABLE CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example to display the Keypad Lock status send F6 lt CR gt XLi responds F6 DISABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt To enable Keypad Lock send the following string F6 ENABLE lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To disable Keypad Lock send the following string F6 DISABLE lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LEF gt F8 Continuous Time Once per Second This function is available through the command line interface only it is not available through the keypad F8 generates time of year information e g 199 10 41 08 once per second over the XLi s command line interface available from the serial or network ports The format and type of time can be modified using F2 F11 and F69 The command line standard out outputs the lt CR gt character at the end of the time of year string at the 1 PPS mark 1 millisecond If F8 is used
104. 6 IN OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 1 Ground 26 10 s of min 2 Not used 27 8 s of min 3 200 s of days 28 4 s of min 4 100 s of days 29 2 s of min 5 80 s of days 30 1 s of min 6 40 s of days 31 40 s of sec 7 20 s of days 32 20 s of sec 202 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Table 6 IN OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 8 10 s of days 33 10 s of sec 9 1KPPS Strobe 34 8 s of sec 10 8 s of days 35 4 s of sec 11 4 s of days 36 2 s of sec 12 2 s of days 37 1 s of sec 13 1 s of days 38 800 s of msec 14 Time Quality Bit 2 39 400 s of msec 15 Time Quality Bit 3 40 200 s of msec 16 1PPS Strobe 41 100 s of msec 17 Time Quality Bit 4 42 80 s of msec 18 20 s of hours 43 40 s of msec 19 10 s of hours 44 20 s of msec 20 8 s of hours 45 10 s of msec 21 4 s of hours 46 8 s of msec 22 2 s of hours 47 4 s of msec 23 1 s of hours 48 2 s of msec 24 40 s of min 49 1 s of msec 25 20 s of min 50 Time Quality Bit 1 25 pin D MICROSECOND CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT XLi Time amp Frequency System Table 7 PIN OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 1 NOT USED 14 GND 2 I s of usec 15 GND 3 2 s of usec 16 GND 4 4 s of usec 17 GND 5 8 s of usec 18 GND 6 10 s of usec 19 GND 7 20 s of usec 20 GND 8 40 s of usec 21 GND XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 203 Table 7
105. 7 8017 87 8026 87 8024 87 8025 86 8000 142 613 50 87 8028 2 86 8013 86 8008 87 8047 87 6000T1 8 87 6000E1 6 87 6002 XL1 87 8009 5 87 8009 10 87 8040 86 708 1 87 8022 87 8023 87 8016 3 87 8016 6 87 8045 87 8090 87 8090 1 87 8090 2 87 8012 12 87 8012 24 293 48 VDC Power Module Rack Mount Kit e 2mounting brackets for 1 U chassis 4 flat head Phillips screws Antenna L1 Antenna 12V W 50 RG59 cable 294 87 8012 48 206 800 241 008 005 142 614 50 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H H Sales and Customer Assistance Symmetricom s Customer Assistance Centers are a centralized resource to handle all of your customer needs Customer Assistance Center Telephone Numbers e Worldwide Main Number 1 408 428 7907 e USA Canada Latin America including Caribbean Pacific Rim including Asia Australia and New Zealand 1 408 428 7907 USA toll free 1 888 367 7966 1 888 FOR SYMM e Europe Middle East amp Africa 49 700 32886435 Technical Support can be obtained either through the Online Support area of our website http www symmetricom com support index aspx or by calling one of the above Customer Assistance Center numbers When calling the worldwide main number or USA based number e Select Option 1 for technical support e Then select Option 2 for Timing Test and Measurement Division customer support Technical Support personnel are available by
106. 79 Installation Installation requires inserting the 1 5 10 MHz MPPS card into an empty option slot in the rear of the XLi Time and Frequency System The card is supplied with mounting hardware A Phillips screwdriver is the only equipment needed Remove the cover plate of an empty option slot and save the screws Slide the option card into the guides on the side rails of the slot Firmly press the card all the way in so it s connector engages the Bus Backplane connector When the connectors are engaged the front of the card should be flush with the adjacent surfaces Using the previously saved screws secure the card in the option slot Sine Wave Outputs 1 5 and 10 MPPS back plane signals are discretely buffered and routed into the appropriate bandpass filters These filters select the desired sine component from the square waves Pots R9 R15 and R17 set the amplitude of the 1 5 and 10 MHz respectively The signals are then routed to Jumpers JP1 JP2 JP3 and JP4 where they can be selected for input to the output drivers Square Wave Outputs 1 5 and 10 MPPS signals are discretely buffered and routed to Jumpers JP1 JP2 JP3 and JP4 where they can be selected for input to the output drivers Maintenance This option has been designed to provide maintenance free operation Under normal use it will require no calibration of adjustment Adjustment procedures are provided for uses only after repair This section contains troub
107. 8 Rev H F53 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt lt STATUS gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F f or F for input string 53 the function number lt SP gt ASCII space character one or more B ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 lt SEP gt one or more space characters lt STATUS gt DYNAMIC MODE or AUTO MODE lt CR gt carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example enter F53 B1 Example response F53 Bl AUTO MODE or DYNAMIC MODE To set the GPS Operation Mode enter a command using the following format F53 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt lt MODE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where lt MODE gt equals DYNAMIC MODE or AUTO MODE For example enter F53 B1 DYNAMIC MODE F53 responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt F60 GPS Receiver Satellite List Use function F60 to display the identification number and signal strength of tracked or current satellites Tracked means a satellite s signal is being received and interpreted by the receiver or that the XLi has GPS data that suggests this satellite should be visible to the antenna GPS satellite are grouped into the following categories e Tracked the XLi is receiving the GPS signal but isn t using it to calculate time and position e Current the XLi is using the satellite s GPS signal to calculate time and position XLi Ti
108. A Symmetricomr XLi Time amp Frequency System User Guide Issue 8 June 2008 Manual Part Number XLi User Manual CD Part Number Xli Man CD XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 08 Rev H Notices Symmetricom Inc Timing Test 8 Measurement 3750 Westwind Blvd Santa Rosa CA 95403 1053 http www symmetricom com Copyright O 2008 Symmetricom Inc All rights reserved Printed in U S A All product names service marks trademarks and registered trademarks used in this document are the property of their respective owners The manual s contents do not apply to previously released versions of XLi hardware or software 11 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 08 Rev H Table of Contents 1 Equipment Overview a cuisine AR 1 XLi Time and Frequency System Description and Features ooo ooo ooooo 1 Features and Optio erica pa Aa 1 Clock Arehitectire a A dare Toi BEES 3 2 System Specifications seess vea x Ra oe A m RR OR E CR ie eee REOR 5 Mechanical Exviromneutal e e ne usb e he io ete ee 5 AC Power Supply o2 ous es oe A etu Lo uu etes 5 System Time amp Frequency Accuracy oooooooooooomorrrrmmrmsrsrrrr 6 GPS Recover a dao sio no 6 Time Code Input ra A A CR ii 6 Have Quick Input ar IE a A 7 PAS ADULTAS AD E R 7 AUX Re pU A A A A TE E 7 Chassis a Ed PEST RR e FX QUERN ROB eek ke REPRE RA a 7 Standard Inputs and Outputs csse ker ek da te Eg eh ges 8 Seral L
109. ADE FILE PATH gt lt FILE NAME gt lt CR gt Use UNIX style forward slashes in path and do not describe the drive for example C in the path For example F100 BH 10 1 7 20 truetime x1li 192 8001 bin lt CR gt The XLi responds BURN HOST IS READY lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 BUB Burn BootLoader Note See B Upgrading System Firmware on page 239 XLi Time amp Frequency System 127 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H When upgrading the system firmware use function F100 BUB to burn the BootLoader to write the BootLoader to flash memory To write the BootLoader to the flash send the F100 BH command with the FTP host file path and name and then enter F100 BUB lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt For example gt 100 bub A 192 8000 bt WITH SIZE 452164 TO PARTITION 0 SECTOR 0 URNING FIL x 0 ana Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q Ej Ej Ed EH EH DH ED Q Q R R R RE R R R A td A A DE EE EPI ee oe oo NOP WN EF 0 LASH SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED CRC32 0x9EFBE60A FNNNNHHNHNHNWO If more than ten flash sectors are written during this process you must rewrite both the bootloader sectors 0 to 9 and the program binary sectors 10 to 93 F100 BU Burn Note See B Upgrading System Firmware on page 239 Use function F100 BH when upgrading firmware to write the file selected with F100 BH to the flash memory Flash memo
110. ALL servers are optional when GPS is synchronized The first server in the list is the Trusted Server The following are public Symmetricom NTP Timeservers server 69 25 96 11 server 69 25 96 12 Private time servers example only server 192 168 1 35 Uncomment the broadcast line below to enable NTP broadcast mode with MD5 using key 1 The key may be omitted but is less secure If a key is used here a corresponding entry for that key must appear in the NTP key file A maximum of 20 keys for broadcast can be defined on this line broadcast 192 168 1 255 key 1 Command below lists trusted keys See NTP keys file for the actual keys and key numbers Keys ID s 1 and 2 are examples A maximum of 20 trusted keys can be defined on this line trustedkey 1 2 Editing MD5 keys on the NTP Server NTP keys are needed if you are using NTP in broadcast mode with MD5 authentication This and the following section provide configuration guidelines For additional information consult Dr Mills NTP site at http www ntp org Broadcast mode adjusts its periodicity according to feedback from its broadcast client The periodicity will typically settle out to about every 2 minutes This activity is not adjustable MD5 private keys have to be edited on both the NTP server and the NTP client The private keys are defined in the ntp keys file The NTP client ntp keys file is identical to the one on the NTP server For the specific
111. Alarm Status LED Fan XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F 8 C per hour 55 C to 85 C 67 F to 185 F To 95 non condensing Maximum 4 km 2 49 mi or 13147 ft Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD 4 38 x 0 88 11 13cm x 2 24 cm 160X16 pixels Displays startup messages clock status time and day of year and interactive clock functions The TIME button displays Time and Day of Year TOD on one full height line 0 9 UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT ENTER CLR TIME STATUS MENU Full user selectable RS 232 422 communication protocol up to 19200 baud IEC 320 connector UL 100 240 VAC Universal 90 264 VAC and 110 370 VDC 47 Hz 440 Hz 5 2 V 5 0 to 5 4 V 25 watts 0 to 5 amps 12 V 11 4 to 12 6 V 45 watts 0 to 3 8 amps 12 V 11 4 to 12 6 V 32 watts 0 to 2 7 amps 104 watts The Fault Detector monitors all three output voltages and provides a visual panel LED and fault status if any output voltage decreases by 10 Green LED on with no fault and AC power applied Green LED off with fault or no AC power applied Exhaust 3 6 CFM System Time amp Frequency Accuracy The tables below describe system clock accuracy while locked to the reference source indicated GPS Receiver 1 PPS Output UTC USNO 30 nS RMS 100 nS peak Frequency Output Accuracy 4 x 102 1 day Frequency Timing Allan 1x 10 Q 1 sec D
112. Antenna For units that include the GPS option install the GPS antenna and cable as described below Selecting a GPS Antenna Site Outdoors Select a site that e sthe highest point available e Offers a full 360 view horizontally to within 10 vertically of the horizon e Is higher than neighboring buildings obstructions e s protected from strong radio frequency RF and microwave transmissions e sset away from RF reflective surfaces that cause multipath interference e sset3 ft 1 m away from other GPS antennas e Mounting the antenna between tall buildings or next to walls and equipment Cable runs from the antenna to the receiver that exceed the specified length e Patching multiple cables together to make a single cable run Running the cable through bulkheads and along side high energy cables e Crimping or damaging the cable Blocked signals and multipath cancellation significantly increase GPS acquisition time Multipath cancellation is caused by reflected signals that reach the antenna out of phase with the direct signal due to vertical reflective objects positioned to the side and above the antenna To solve these problems mast mount the antenna at least 1 meter away from and above the reflecting surface Mounting the GPS Antenna Mount the GPS antenna on an antenna mast recommended or on the peak of a building The GPS antenna kit includes special mounting brackets For the mast use 2 inch 5 08 cm diameter
113. BY For example to make it a primary reference source enter F119 B1 C PRI lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt F120 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer Use F120 to view the status and configuration of the N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 87 8022 page 173 and to change the frequency of its outputs The N 1 Frequency Synthesizer card s four independently programmable outputs generate frequencies from 1 PPS to 50 MPPS with a tuning resolution of 1 PPS Keypad Using the front panel keypad enter F120 ENTER 120 ENTER Continue pressing ENTER to step through the following displays Use the up down arrow buttons to select options N 1 FREQ SYN AVAILABILITY OPTION BAY Select from 1 10 or NOT AVAILABLE N 1 PART NUMBER N 1 FPGA NUMBER N 1 PLL LOCKED UNLOCKED OUTPUT PORT 1 Enter a value from 1 Hz to 50 000 000 Hz OUTPUT PORT 2 Enter a value from 1 Hz to 50 000 000 Hz OUTPUT PORT 3 Enter a value from 1 Hz to 50 000 000 Hz OUTPUT PORT 4 Enter a value from 1 Hz to 50 000 000 Hz SAVE CHANGES Select from YES or NO and press ENTER 158 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Command Line Use Serial Network Function F120 to obtain information about the current version of the software installed in the N 1 Frequency Synthesizer Option Board and to configure the N 1 Frequency Synthesizer Option Board for frequencies to be generated To obtain the N 1 Fre
114. CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To enter the Code Output selection for Time Code with I following character string to the Serial Network port F90 lt SP gt lt CODE OUTPUT gt lt CR gt I I E 1344 extensions send the T where F ASCII character F 90 function number lt SP gt space lt CODE OUTPUT gt IRIG B120 1344 or IRIG B000 1344 lt CR gt carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character Sample entry F90 lt SP gt IRIG B120 1344 lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE if the input string was in the correct format but contained a value probably numeric that was out of the range of acceptable values The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 02 SYNTAX if it receives a string in an incorrect format The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 03 BAD MISSING FIELD if the input string lacks a required field IRIG B120 1344 F100 Network Port Configuration amp XLi Firmware F100 provides two groups of commands Group 1 available through the keypad display and the command line provides access to network port settings and hardware Firmware status information e Group 2 available through the command line only provides commands for changing system firmware changing NTP amp SNMP parameters cha
115. CR gt Use the following format to set the IP address and restart the unit enter F100 lt S gt IP lt S gt lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number S space IP specify IP command nnn nnn nnn nnn dotted decimal address 0 to 255 CR inputline terminator For example enter F100 IP 206 54 0 21 lt CR gt 120 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt ESETING THE UNIT lt CR gt lt LF gt PLEASE WAIT lt CR gt lt LF gt wy To obtain the IP address of the unit Standard network port enter F100 IP lt CR gt The XLi responds example F100 IP 206 54 0 21 lt CR gt lt LF gt The three commands F100 IP F100 SM and F100 G can be concatenated to set all three values simultaneously To do so use the following format F100 lt S gt IP lt S gt lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt S gt SM lt S gt lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt S gt G lt S gt lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt CR gt Note The three commands i e IP SM G can be used in any order relative to each other A colon separator can be used instead of S following IP SM and G e g 1P 192 168 46 150 For example using appropriate values for your network enter something similar to F100 IP 192 169 46 150 SM 255 255 255 0 G 192 168 46 1 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt ESETING THE UNIT lt CR gt lt LF
116. CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 151 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F118 Option Board Configuration Use function F118 to query the XLi for the option bay location of CPU aware cards The following figure shows the position of the option bays as seen when viewing the XLi from the rear Figure 8 Option Bay Positions The e jo te te je je fe The o jo jo jo e e 152 1 U Chassis Power Supply XLi CPU Module 2 U Chassis Opt Power Supply Power Supply XLi CPU Module cards recognized by F118 are as follows N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 87 8022 GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM 87 8016 6 PTTI BCD Output 87 8045 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality 87 8090 Parallel BCD uSec with Time Quality 87 8090 1 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Unlock Status 87 8090 2 GPS Receiver 86 8013 cards not recognized by F118 are as follows N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 86 708 1 Multicode Output 87 6002 XL1 Low Phase Noise 5 MHz Output 87 8009 5 Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Output 87 8009 10 Enhanced Low Phase Noise Module 87 8040 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output 86 8008 T1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000T1 8 E1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000E1 6 XLi Time amp Frequency System
117. Can t set host ip aeda na e a a a a E SE aa 231 Cant write file ir a a a a di 232 Configuration failed seso eccere a id Cauda fan 232 Configuration type is not specified o ooooooo 232 Invalid COMMANG Aa Rove cs 231 Error IB o Se d adu NM RT aS e coh 61 Error Messages dass PRISE E 2e us E SR ae eda age 231 ESF cbe AE e cM tuc Oe e a e M e es 181 Ethernet Address sox agile cade aw E ws oL RUN A ERA TER E 120 Event Time ado is Lait d WEGEN QU Pa Sa s nas 9 Expansion Module CONMMOUIING MEC RCM DEEP 169 Stalingrado eoe anaes arb tude Daal dis 31 Extended SuperFrame 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 181 F E Time Zone esac soso a ia ole bao ede 24 48 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F100 Network Port amp XLi Software ooo o o o 117 F100 BASET 10 100 BASE T 0 ccc ccc ec eens 123 F100 BF Burn File System ooo ooooooooooooooo o 129 F100 BH Burn AOSt 44504445 p saene nrp oea e ad Pid 127 F100 BU BUM 3o da a pee eats Baw cok edie 128 F100 BUB Burn BootLoader 0 0 c cece eee nee 127 F100 BUFP Burn FPGA Firmware 000 cece ences 130 F100 CONFIG Configure NTP 8 SNMP 008 131 F100 CONFIG Configure NTP amp SNMP Parameters 131 235 F100 EA Ethernet Address ccoo la a 120 F100 G GAN A elt b ud 122 F100 IC Network Port Settings o ooooooooo
118. During normal operation the relays are energized so that a power failure would indicate a fault condition Therefore the Alarm state is the non energized state and is in agreement with the silk screened legends Theory of Operation The XLi provides accurate time and frequency whenever the clock is locked to a reference source However the accuracy and stability of this card s outputs are characteristic of the internal oscillator or Aux Ref to which they are phase locked When the XLi is equipped with an optional OCXO or Rubidium oscillator this card is capable of providing Telecommunications Stratum I Primary Reference Source performance Alarm Operation The logic resident in the FPGA U7 implements major and minor alarm generation by monitoring two bytes broadcast once per second over the XLi bus by the host microprocessor and the LFA and LFB signals sourced by U8 and US which indicate T1 output line faults XLi Time amp Frequency System 185 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H One of the two broadcast bytes gives the indication that the XLi is operating properly and within its specifications for time and frequency accuracy and stability The other broadcast byte provides direct indication of major and minor alarm status of the XLi The logic in the FPGA combines the line fault signals and the broadcast byte inputs to form a summary major alarm indication The FPGA uses the broadcast byte minor alarm information verbatim to control min
119. ENTIFIER enterprises 1896 trapMsg OBJECT IDENTIFIER symmetricomTtmEnt 1 ntp OBJECT IDENTIFIER symmetricomTtmEnt 2 ntsControl OBJECT IDENTIFIER symmetricomTtmEnt 3 gps OBJECT IDENTIFIER symmetricomTtmEnt 4 acts OBJECT IDENTIFIER symmetricomTtmEnt 5 products OBJECT IDENTIFIER symmetricomTtmEnt 6 xli OBJECT IDENTIFIER products 1 nic56k OBJECT IDENTIFIER products 2 trapMsgColdStart OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated ESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to UDP port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server reinitializes The message is Cold Start Trap PDU from AR gH Where 44 4 is the dotted decimal notation of the IP address of the booting unit trapMsg 1 GI 0 255 UO trapMsgNtpAlarm OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to the UDP trap port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server s detects change of the NTP status This could be due to a line breakage in the timing source loss of GPS satellites etc The message is NTP Status aaaaaaaa where aaaaaaaaa can be NTP UNLOCKED NTP client mode or NTP LOCKED trapMsg 2 E 0 255 XLi Time 8 Frequency System 245 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008
120. ERFACE SER NAME operator ASSWORD sss ETWORK INTERFACE 192 8801 lt c gt 1998 2006 SYMMETRICOM GHIS RESERVED OGIN SUCCESSFUL E Related topics Configuring Network Settings on page 24 F100 L LOCK UNLOCK Remote Lockout on page 124 Using the Web Interface The network port also provides remote access to the XLi s web interface To connect to the web interface 1 Use function F100 Network Port Configuration amp XLi Firmware page 117 on the front panel key pad or F100 IP IP Address page 120 on the command line to obtain the IP address of the XLi 2 Enter the XLi s IP address in the address bar of a web browser 3 Atthe XLi Home Page click the Login button see note after step 5 4 Enter the appropriate user name and password The factory default settings are operator1 through operator10 for the user names and zeus for the passwords Also user1 through user10 for the user names and ttm for the passwords In some cases older units that have XLi Time amp Frequency System 27 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H been upgraded may have casey as the password Settings are operator1 through operator10 for the user names and casey for the passwords Also user1 through user10 for the user names and ttm for the passwords 5 Click the Login button with your mouse Note Keep track of the user name and password The
121. ET Fl TIME ZONE OFFSE Pressing the UP ARROW key increments to the next function F2 12 24 HOUR FORMAT and so on Pressing the DOWN ARROW key skips to the highest available function F128 Have Quick Output Configuration page 165 and from there decrements through the functions The section 5 Function Reference on page 45 provides detailed information on all of the XLi s functions Keypad Operation Use XLi s front panel keypad to operate the menu driven keypad display interface a 090090 O o e ENTER MENU 9 0 09 The following table explains how the individual keys work UP ARROW DOWN ARROW RIGHT ARROW LEFT ARROW 0 9 ENTER CLR TIME STATUS MENU 36 Increase value Display next choice above Decrease value Display next choice below Move cursor right Move cursor left Enter numeric values Enters currently displayed choice e g a function or yes confirmation to save changes Clears the current selection choice and returns to the last saved value Displays the current time Can also be used to exit a function without saving changes Displays the clock status and time Can be used to exit a function without saving changes Displays first item in function menu Use UP DOWN ARROWs to display other functions XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Keypad Examples The following examples show how to use the keypad effectiv
122. GPS detects change of the GPS status The message is Time synchronization type is now where can be GPS ACTS or NTP trapMsg 6 El El 0 255 trapMsgCrossCheckAlarm OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to UDP trap port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server s detects a chan in time synchronization types check peer and the server is not in a system alarm condition trapMsg 7 E 246 XLi Time 8 Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H El ntpInPkts OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Total number of NTP packets delivered to the NTP application layer from the transport layer rar do mtp ds GI ntpOutPkts OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Total number of NTP packets passed from the NTP application layer to the transport layer ntp 2 Gl ntpInErrors OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Total number of NTP packets reject for any reason by NTP application layer ntp 3 ntpAuthFail OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Total number of authentication failures This is
123. Hz J3 Input Impedance 1kO 50 Q The factory settings are Disabled 10 MHz and 1kQ For J3 Input specifications see J3 Input Auxiliary Reference or Frequency Measurement on page 10 Auxiliary Reference Aux Ref Input If an external frequency reference with better long term stability than the XLi s own oscillator e g a Cesium reference is available connect it to the J3 connector and enable Aux Ref using F113 Once this is done the XLi will use the Aux Ref input rather than its own oscillator as its frequency source if the XLi s reference source s become unavailable 146 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H For example with a single GPS receiver card configured as PRIMARY in F119 and F74 Clock Reference set to PRI When the XLi reacquires a time reference source and is steering its own internal oscillator it stops using Aux Ref as its frequency reference For Aux Ref to work The Aux Ref frequency source must be connected to the J3 input e F113 Input Configuration must be set to Aux Ref e F113 Input Frequency must be set to the correct frequency F113 Input Impedance must be set to the correct impedance Frequency Measurement Freq Meas Input The Frequency Measurement Freq Meas option measures an external frequency applied to the J3 input relative to the disciplined XLi oscillator Operation Measurements are displayed on the front panel display and on the command line at t
124. I O port or the web interface HTTP Flash CRC Status Passed or failed RAM Status Passed or failed Serial Status Passed or failed Version Test Status Passed or failed XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The following table gives the command line equivalents for each of the preceding parameters Description F100 followed by Ethernet address EA MAC address IP Address IP Subnet Mask SM Default Gateway G IP Address Subnet Mask IC and Default Gateway 10 100 BASE T BASET Remote Lockout L for status LOCK UNLOCK Flash CRC ST RAM ST Serial ST Version Test ST NVRAM Ver Group 2 Comments Displays information Displays configures and reboots Displays configures and reboots Displays configures and reboots Displays several IP parameters Displays network port setting Displays and configures Displays information Displays information Displays information Displays information The following expanded command set is available through the command line interface Description Burn Host BH Burn BU Burn Bootloader BUB Burn Filesystem BF Burn FPGA BUFP Configure NTP amp SNMP Parameters CONFIG Factory Mode Jumper J Reboot KILL Change User Password P Ping PI Change User Name PN F100 followed by Comments Configure Commit action Commit action Commit action Commit action Move files Display only Commit action reboot the
125. II dE E E RE qup AE 178 Installatt n 2s e esp US Rer nc Sa wee Fox deudor de eee AR as 180 Sine Wave Outp ts signi Sp tree qe bou Pei ok 180 Square Wave Outputs qo EAE e ue Tote tua e a ee e ura deco Fbace 180 MAME eas ee ow arme tcd aa o EPA qat NS dar ped 180 Equipment R quired 2056 A A SORS e wed 180 No Output Or Outputs 2 esten en re e REI da 181 Noisy OUIDUES 5 sd dona ane ede d t de ead ead ads 181 Incorrect Frequencies iore ens de Ve Ee ER IUE acd RU Peel ake 181 T1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000T1 8 0 0 0 eee 181 Lb COGO BOR oues Se pottea o ME S I RM Ed quia SN as 181 Specifications RP C ERE 182 COUN BULAN OMS ag 2 dapes Siga se HR PR Maas Nutz bs qu tig 182 Frame Format Selection csse cetus exa e xe RR TR ATA n 184 T1 AIS Assertion and Output Signal Control on Major Fault 184 Output Signal Frequency Selection oooooooooooomooorommmo o 185 A See eked EE UPPER ERE Pe epe eei PS 185 A et eM Ba LE A tst LA EU us s Pd 185 Theory of DPS a dua AI m E den Ee ea da a 185 Alarm OPC ri dq tu qe s verd Ss rebut pis vdd 185 Maintenance voco leds a pice ed e tcn o ERU sti e taa 186 El Telecom Interface Output 87 6000E1 6 0 0 eee 187 o ert rat weder Ves inca Mrd hse ERR ad ess 187 SDECIFICAHODS cti dre o pace th oi Er ye E a Wide stats te Pe 187 CoD bUt atlas a a eid aai pu ak e ON a A VAS 188 Tnstallattoti 4 sss avast O ose NE ee Ru REN Meads RUP eet A ae 190 Opetation 205 S vetri dn
126. IRIG B000 200 04 w IEEE1344 13 TIME CODE OUTPUT IRIG B120 200 04 W IEEE1344 12 Tite DISpIay 1 5 25344 Tic a ide o et eee 2 34 37 CONQUE ERAS A AA RA YA hs VeL 24 TIGE TOP oss eu eC tue c s e Ld e CURATUS E Eg ios 61 Time tal canal cama beo EO CETT S whe ioe ga ard 9 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Time Interval Event Time oo oooooooo ooo 137 Tirtie Modest EE ad 89 Tite Zone oec bc eto teh p ed EN EN 48 291 Timezones vivas piter y arts a ele 291 Time Quality SOPAS Bre o 53 U Upgrading s osasse ias t Een rte a C se pe oa d 117 System FIImmWSaFe a resa ed doe A aes ac oM 239 User Interfaces vo v c eR ARA ee OBI E e E Ro s 35 User Nares etes eta teen DE E ele ie 38 41 Change 5554 4 o dau se e e Ae ants do adatto 135 User Privileges tere arr ee Oe bb date ao tec 40 Username ENANA a A c ee E Ay 39 Using F100 Config 22 222 1e dem Ira E sedeo Ire eat aeu 235 V Version SOMWANS 2 0 A IRI E Red smt p ee eiua 62 W Web Interface i213 rra A ed 40 X XLi Additional Configuration s bua ecu ope ue Eie od dac caesus 28 Clock Architecture sic 22 34 cr ir Cere Saeed dacs 3 CONTIGUA ia A AR e aue deh 28 280 MainCard Group o ooooooooo o 276 NI A E IIA 1 Rack Mounting ANA ur ttl perc D ra x SES TRI a Seen 31 O O iA denas Sor pea 117 System GOP h rmo het tec A Tuus Duos 273 System Status Group cani a it 275 Traps enana atacan 276 XLi G
127. Li man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 3 SP SEP S lt STATUS gt lt SOURCI E ASCII character 3 ASCII space character one or more one or more separators characters space tab or comma ASCII character S Status delimiter L Locked U Unlocked A Clock IRIG A B Clock IRIG B N lock NASA 36 P Clock Primary S Clock Secondary R Clock to Aux Ref F None PLL Synthesizer Locked C PLL Synthesizer Unlocked LPN PLL Locked L LPN PLL Unlocked Primary OK P Primary Fault Secondary OK S Secondary Fault IRIG OK l IRIG Fault Aux Ref OK A Aux Ref Fault Primary Power OK W Primary Power Fault Secondary Power OK w Secondary Power Fault Rb oscillator OK R Rb oscillator Fault DAC OK X DAC Fault First time lock OK a Clock Status has locked since power on but still within the user defined power on time out XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 103 A Clock Status has not locked since power on C Time error OK U Time error Fault D Timeout OK T Timeout Fault NTP OK N NTP Fault Future Use E Future Use au Q n Future Use I Future Use J Future Use To see the states the Alarm Latches for all of the indicators enter F73 lt S gt LATCH lt CR gt XLi replies F73 lt S gt LATCH lt SEP gt lt 12345678 9ABCDEFGHIJ gt lt CR gt lt LF gt T
128. NASA 36 Amplitude AM 3 Vp p into 500 10 Ratio AM 3 1 10 Amplitude DC TTL into 500 Quantity 1 Connector Female BNC Phasing In phase with carrier 10 uS Default Configuration IRIG B 120 Many IRIG reader devices only decode the BCD time of year TOY portion of the IRIG frame Reader devices designed to the IRIG B122 B002 A132 A002 standard should be compatible with the XLi s time code outputs 11 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ALARM Output High Z High Z Low Z Drive Max Voltage Max Current Quantity Connector Power off Alarm enabled alarm fault Normal no enabled alarm faults Open Collector 25 VDC 50 mA 4 Female BNC Time Code Output IRIG B120 w IEEE1344 The selectable Code output has an additional selection for IRIG B 120 w IEEE1344 Configuration is via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML IRIG B 120 IS DEFINED IN IRIG STANDARD 200 04 AS Format B 100 pps 1 Sine wave amplitude modulated 2 1KHz carrier 1mSec resolution 0 BCD TOY CF SBS IEEE1344 IS DEFINED IN IEEE1344 1995 R2001 ANNEX F AS IRIG B format lt sync gt SS MM HH DDD lt control bits gt lt binary seconds gt where lt sync gt SS MM HH DDD control binary seconds 12 is the on time marker seconds 00 59 60 during leap seconds minutes 00 59 hour of day 00 23 day of year 001
129. OPE ti eae a ste R ue catu suo a a 8 NEL N6twork Port e a ea ag 8 J1 Input Time Code or Time Interval Event Time 9 J2 Output Rate Out or Programmable Pulse Output 10 J3 Input Auxiliary Reference or Frequency Measurement 10 1 PPS Pulse Per Second Output us de seta ye ee e Rx RR 11 CODE Time Code Output 2 3 caridad as tie 11 ALARM Outp t id A sa as ed aie ls 12 Time Code Output IRIG B120 w IEEE1344 o ooooococcococooooo 12 OB DP S Lanes une sS RI HI PRESE ESI Pump x fd 13 Time Code Output IRIG B000 w IEEE1344 0 0 0 0 0c ee eee 13 OUTPUTS parade et 25a AA C tti aad SN EN Ks 14 Time Code Input IRIG B120 w IEEE1344 ooocococccccccco o o 14 INPUT Lu os repr cese ep LR poto ded debe Tabor 15 Time Code Input IRIG B000 w IEEE1344 0 0 0 eee ee eee 15 Manual Leap Second Entry oot dca AA E aH 16 blaveOuicke TEOM uta euet da sette ud buo eh Ord o nexu et tdt 16 Certifications RNC ld LR A o Rate aide 17 3 Installaton Confipuratioh 4 242 A E ER 19 Installing the GPS Antenna ovo vex RA VE EXER AROS 19 Selecting a GPS Antenna Site Outdoors 20 0 eee eee eee 19 Mounting the GPS Antenna A 19 Connecting the Antenna to the Receiver 02 eee eee eee eee 20 GPS Signal Strength Requirements s au taria qaa aha 21 GPS xelated ACCESSORIES s pensaita ia uant a e 22 Lightning ALSO tana a E e Peta vd 22 XLi Time am
130. PGA program size is checked against the designated memory sector in the target flash If the memory sector is not big enough to store the FPGA program the command will be aborted an error message FILE FN EXT yyy BYTES TOO LARGE FOR PARTITIONING zzz BYTES LOAD ABORTED will be displayed and the new program will not be loaded to the flash After all the requirements for burning the FPGA program are met XLi will proceed to burn the FPGA program from the FTP host computer to the target flash by responding with the following output string OK lt CR gt lt LE gt Then during the file burning process output strings will be displayed on the terminal to provide status to the operator The following is an example of a successful F100 BUFP command execution BURNING FILE 184 8000 bin WITH SIZE 97652 TO PARTITION 3 SECTOR 10 FILE 97652 BYTES PARTITION 393204 BYTES 24 used SEC 10 RE 0 SEC 11 RE 0 LASH SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED trj To load the FPGA program from the target flash to the FPGA a reboot of the XLi is required for the new FPGA program to take effect The XLi can be rebooted via power cycle or by issuing the F100 KILL command on the serial port interface 130 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F100 CONFIG Configure NTP amp SNMP Note Symmetricom recommends using the Web Interface versus than F100 CONFIG as the most conve nient method for edi
131. PI to ping a remote host to see if it is reachable If no IP Address is provided F100 PI uses the XLi s own IP Address and tests whether the XLi s network port has a good network connection To ping a known host enter F100 PI lt S gt lt IP Address gt lt CR gt For example F100 PI 206 254 000 021 lt CR gt The unit responds example PING 206 254 000 021 REMOTE HOST FOUND lt CR gt lt LF gt or PING 206 254 000 021 REMOTE HOST NOT FOUND lt CR gt lt LF gt To test if the XLi s network port has a good connection enter the following using in a serial port session gt 100 PI lt CR gt The XLi responds PING REMOTE HOST FOUND lt CR gt lt LF gt or it responds PING REMOTE HOST NOT FOUND lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 PN Change User Name Use function F100 PN to change a user name In a network port session F100 PN changes the name of the user you logged in as operator or guest In a serial port session F100 PN changes the name of the operator user See Command Line Interface on page 38 To change the user name enter F100 lt S gt PN lt CR gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 135 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number lt S gt space PN specify User Name command CR _ input line terminator The XLi responds ENTER NEW USER NAME When you enter a
132. RGANIZATION CONTACT INFO DESCRIPTION 02052000002 SYMMETRICOM INC Technical Suppor Symmetricom XLi xliSystem 0 systemFault SystemStatus XLi Time amp Frequency System Enterprise MIB OBJECT IDENTIFIER xliSystem 1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER xliSystem 2 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 259 FaultMaskType Boolean alarmDatalpAddroBJECT TYP alarmDataTimeStampOBJ 260 SystemAlarmType temAlarm temAlarmData temFaultConfig temFaultHistory Sys Sys Sys Sys Sys Sys Sys Sys temFaultConfigData temFaultConfigMasks temStatusGeneral temStatusDetail INTEGER INTEGER Gl SYNTAX IpAddress INTEGER OBJ OBJ OBJ OBJ OBJ OBJ OBJ ECT ENTIFIE sys ECT ENTIFIE sys ECT ENTIFIE sys H HHH CJ 2 oe ECT V NN NN N Aa c cs ENTIFIE Sys ECT ENTIFIE Sys ECT ENTIFIE Sys ECT ENTIFIE Sys OBJ disabled 1 HHHH OUOUUGJ V NN NN AS ECT ENTIFIE alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm gt sys PllSynthesizer LpnPll PrimaryRefClk SecondaryRefClk IRIG alarmAuxRef alarm alarm alarm alarm alarm PrimaryPower SecondaryPower RbOsc Dac FirstTimeLock alarm alarm alarm enabled false true MAX ACCESS
133. Requesting the time code settings of a specific output port Use the following format to request the time code settings of a specific output on a specific card 70 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F42 lt S gt B lt N gt 0 lt S gt lt C gt lt CR gt where F42 ASCII string representing the Function Number lt S gt One or more separator characters space tab or comma B ASCII character indicating board number to follow lt N gt the board number 1 to 10 O ASCII letter ohh indicating output port not zero lt C gt output number 1 to 4 CR carriage return For example to request the time code on board 1 output 1 enter F42 B10 1 lt CR gt Or optionally F42 B1 01 lt CR gt The XLi responds with the time code of the output F42 B1 1 IRIG B 120 lt CR gt lt LF gt If the time code is IRIG A or IRIG G the response includes a parenthetical reminder that all outputs set to that time code e g IRIG G are also set to the same time code type e g 141 F42 B1 1 IRIG G 141 ALL G PORTS Setting the time code of a specific output port Use the following format to set the time code for a specific output port F42 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt 0 lt S gt lt C gt lt S gt lt CODE gt lt CR gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 71 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where FA2 string representing the Function Number S separator B ASCII letter indicating
134. Rev H Gl trapMsgSnmpAuthFail OBJECT TYP SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to UDP port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server determines the SNMP authentication for a SNMP PDU is in correct The message is SNMP Authentication Failure Trap PDU from RR GHH Where is the dotted decimal notation of the IP address of the unit attempting the invalid access trapMsg 3 Gl 0 255 El trapMsgGpsAntennaFault OBJECT TYP SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to UDP trap port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server s GPS detects change in the antenna status The status can be OK or FAULT trapMsg 4 I trapMsgGpsUnlocked OBJECT TYP SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to UDP trap port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server s GPS detects change of the GPS status The status can be is unlocked trapMsg 5 Ea El 0 255 trapMsgNewSyncType OBJECT TYP SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an ASCII string sent to UDP trap port 162 or user defined when the TrueTime time server s
135. S Antenna co se a iid ra SUR Cr etra ee 19 Multi Code Output o ooooooooooonnoor I nes 171 Multicode Output Configuration ooooooooooooo o 69 N N 1 Frequency Synthesizer oo o oooocooomooooo 158 173 NS a teas Og e UE e AL ura 174 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 0 0 ccc ccc eee ooo 174 Pad Bits ara it Ad dl 73 NASA s DAS aue qud ad c ea t M ERE AS 116 NASASO pass el eee One ond qa ee s dM qx 69 116 171 Navigating niin Dess tre o e Ure ice CP er p vele 41 NET Notwork POT 455 cl a da Las ces 8 Network CONTGUNING so AAA AAA AAA 24 Network Port Connecting ios a i aaa a e ek tur p edad 27 Connecting tOn A ARAS dd eats x nias 27 Network Port amp XLi Software oo oooooooooooomo 117 Network Port Settings vinos cialis ra wk uu eeelswi s qa 123 Network Settings COMMQUIING c 2 6 a Sng uc a Tro redu E RS SERT OU ES eunt 24 NOTICE Cannot respond to command because Utility Port session has priority 233 NEP uu ee E Che ns dece p pt ts Ados head 283 COMIQUIS datada sois capis eia at ecd SD a 131 Configure Parameters 0 ccc eee een een eee 235 ntp conf editing cart coe us O a dri canes ances OMe qucd 283 O OCXO Oscillator Upgrade a AS Pu erar eas 223 OK sak SIU O BRE YBN PI se BE LIEV ABT Dep Pla 233 Operator Login urnas Sas aerated ewan rod Suc e dog 38 Option bay positions Le A E x rie A ia et piod 33 Option Board Configuration ooooo
136. S gt FREQ MEAS lt S gt lt FREQ gt lt S gt lt IMP gt lt S gt lt INT gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Where the F113 entry and request formats are defined as F ASCII character F TES function number SHOW ASCII character string SHOW for displaying frequency measurements DISABLE ASCII character string DISABLE to disable J3 as input port AUX REF ASCII character string AUX REP to set J3 to take auxiliary reference input FREQ MEAS ASCII character string FREQ MEAS to set J3 to make frequency measurements S ASCII space character one or more FREQ AUXREF or FREQ MEAS Input Frequency 1MHZ 5MHZ 10MHZ IMP nput Impedance 1K or 50 lt INT gt Frequency Measurement Interval This is the gate time of the measurement Range 000001 999999 in seconds line terminator either a carriage return and line feed for output strings or a carriage return only for input strings lt CR gt lt LF gt For example enter 148 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F113 lt CR gt The XLi displays the current configuration example F113 AUX REF 1MHZ 50 lt CR gt lt LF gt Or F113 DISABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt Or F113 FREQ MEAS 1MHZ 50 000001 lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the J3 Input Configuration enter a character string using the same formats as the preceding XLi responses Only valid values are accepted For
137. SA 36 and modulation type AM or DC on the XLi s standard CODE output The factory settings for F90 are IRIG B and AM Although the factory configuration outputs UTC time in 24 hour format the following can be used to modify the code output of F90 for non standard applications F2 12 24 Hour Format on page 49 selects between a 12 or 24 hour time format e F69 Time Mode on page 89 selects between the following timescales Local Standard GPS UTC and TAI Command Line To display the current settings enter F90 lt CR gt XLi responds using the following format F90 lt S gt lt CODE OUTPUT gt lt TYPE gt lt CR gt where F 90 S lt CODE OUTPUT gt lt TYPE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt For example enter F90 lt CR gt ASCII character F function number Space IRIG A IRIG B IRIG B120 1344 NASA 36 AM DC carriage return character line feed character XLi responds example F90 IRIG B AM lt CR gt lt LF gt 116 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To change the Code Output selection enter F90 IRIG B DC lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Sample request for Time Code Out with IEEE 1344 extensions F90 CR Response F90 IRIG 120 1344 To enter the Code Output selection send the following character string to the Serial Network port Sample entry F90 lt SP gt IRIG B DC lt
138. SE UTILITY PORT SESSION HAS PRIORITY Web Interface The web interface presents most of the XLi s functions in a convenient and easy to use way Symmetricom XLi Time amp Frequency System Logo XL Adron Homepage e No Ayr Retrieve at 16 0631 1201668 LOCAL tine User Home Geserd System Configuration Svstem Status Arcounts Admin Clock Setinos Alarm Control 1U Chassis Back NTE Conta Admin NTP MDS Corin Admin System WO 7 Commuricsions Ports Code Output Pod 2U Chassis Back eS Opon Hay 9 Option Bey Open Bay 1 SIN X Lcixbe Option Bay Option Bay 4 Option Rey 7 Option Ray amre anig Option Bay 1 PSNI RECEIVER OOOO Bay 2 HAWE QUICK OUT Option Bay 2 Q iion Agy 4 a 4 f n Owm E Figure 7 The web interface showing the XLi Admin Homepage User Privileges Administrative users can view status information and change the XLi s configuration Non administrative users can view status information but cannot change the XLi s configuration 40 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The web interface manages this distinction by providing two sets of web pages Pages available from the XLi Admin Homepage display status information and let the user change the XLi s configuration settings Pages available from the XLi User Homepage only display status information Administrative users e g operator1 have access to both the XLi Admin Homepage and
139. Source Control CIOGKu su ono A ah ete Io E Deoa tet BORE ahead 107 Source file bytes read MEUSE pcr NEED Gad Tt MEE MCA 233 Specifications aapa ee aes eU AREE RDUM EE NUR 5 AC Power Supply zero esp eR ere quo rape ER Pe acu 5 Chassis aii at a a Ean 7 Mechanical Environmental o 5 Time 8 Frequency Accuracy 0 cee cee eens 6 ER RE RD RR AR IE a ee ONE A RAE RETE CERCA 126 Standard 12 VDC Power Supply 0 0 cece cece e eee 225 Standard Inputs and Outputs 6 0 0 000 eens 8 Standard TCVCXO Oscillator Luisa ladies 223 Statistics OSCIIBIOE spin ir O a 91 Status Alarm Controls uino AA SN ae aO whe 94 Fault 24 oe O Abe toe STA Scu a ME 92 cca qe DTE ET 126 Status Display sica ida ie heo dal io 35 37 38 Submitting Changes xasssuzxe vo cae sy awe pad oes deeds eae x 42 Subnet Mask coca ad Reti d td a ae ak dag dd dd ex al pena 121 T T1 Telecom Interface Output ooo ooooooooocoomoooo 181 TesbProcBdul ccu vacca do a 280 TAE Sat reus Hew Av us etd tare C ul sa estt odit nado 9 137 TIME as eie ed case E E E 14 ime S Date tuo ares ue T Ried Du tS eae atk Sets E 50 Time Code JEU o RS ae a e NN a AMETE hte 137 Time Code linput IRIG B000 200 04 w IEEE1344 15 Time Code Input 2 0c cece ee ee ah ha 9 Time Code Input IRIG B120 200 04 w IEEE1344 14 TIME CODE OUTPUT IRIG B000 200 04 W IEEE1344 13 Time Code Output
140. U 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 0 dB pulse template requirements for outputs A and B Frame Format Selection Superframe D4 or Extended Superframe ESF for all outputs T1AIS Assertion and Output Signal Control on Major Fault Figure 13 51 has eight dip switch positions Lettering inverted for this illustration 2766843021 o HEN gt He o XLi Time Frequency System 183 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H T1 Output Wave Shaping T1 Output A T1 Output B S1 Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 Do not use ON ON JON JON JION JON 7 5 dB CSU OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 15 0 dB CSU ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 0 dB 0 133 CSU DSX 1 JOFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 133 266 DSX 1 ON ON OFF JON ON OFF 266 399 DSX 1 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 399 533 DSX 1 ON OFF OFF JON OFF OFF 533 655 DSX 1 OFF OFF OFF JOFF OFF OFF This is the factory setting Note Do not set switches 1 3 and 4 6 to ON at the same time Frame Format Selection Superframe D4 S1 Position 7 OFF Extended Superframe ESF S1 Position 7 ON This is the factory setting T1 AIS Assertion and Output Signal Control on Major Fault Assert AIS and turn outputs off S1 Position 8 OFF No AIS and leave outputs on 1 Position 8 ON This is the factory setting Figure 14 JP4 JP5 JP6 and JP7 Positions numbered 1 6 for this illustration JP4 JFS JPS oho Co dm om JP 184 XLi Time a
141. Verify that a popup appears saying Set has completed successfully 9 sizer entry is set to enabled 10 Trap Testing 1 1 Perform an action to generate a trap 2 2 Select the menu item Fault gt Alarms 3 3 Verify in the All Alarms popup that there is an entry of the form Normal Thu Mar 21 1 private enterprises trueTimeEnt prod 192 168 11 218 2 private enterprises trueTimeEnt prod HH MM Ss UTC 3 private enterprises trueTimeEnt prod alarmPrimaryPower 4 private enterprises trueTimeEnt prod OctetString F73 S LP LL PSR XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 281 This page was intentionally left blank 282 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H D Network Time Protocol NTP As an option Symmetricom can factory configure the XLi to function as a Stratum 1 network time server Network time servers use Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize computer clocks across a network Support for version 4 0 of the NTP RFC 1305 as well as the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP RFC2030 is available In addition the XLi responds to TIME protocol requests RFC868 The Network Time Server responds to time synchronization requests from hosts using these User Datagram Protocol Internet Protocols UDP IP Type Protocol Port Number RFC NTP ver 4 0 UDPPort123 RFC1305 SNTP UDP Port 123 RFC2030 TIME UDP Port 37 RFC868 NTP Packe
142. XLi Configure Commit action Commit action You can reconfigure two or more network parameters in a single entry by sending the F100 command and entering new values Leading zeros may be omitted when entering IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Any field may be omitted and order is not significant Blanks are allowed on either side of a colon The unit reboots after any network parameter is changed XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 119 F100 EA Ethernet Address Use function F100 EA to display the Ethernet Address MAC Address Note An Ethernet or MAC Address is not the same thing as an IP Address a fixed six byte hexadecimal value specific to the unit s standard network port The first three bytes are registered to Symmetricom Inc the last three bytes are the hex value identifying the network port To display the Ethernet address of the unit standard network port enter F100 EA lt CR gt The XLi responds F100 EA 00 A0 69 xx xx xx CR LP where 00 20 69 is the portion of the address assigned to the manufacturer and xx xx xx is unit s unique address in hexadecimal An example of the response is F100 EA 00 A0 69 99 00 37 Attempts to set this field will be rejected with a syntax error message F100 IP IP Address Use function F100 IP to display or change the unit s IP Address Use the following format to display the IP address F100 lt S gt IP lt
143. XO Rubidium and High Stability Rubidium and locked to a GPS reference or equivalent the requirements of ANSI T1 101 1994 and ITU T G 811 pertaining to primary reference source operation are met Frequency 1544 kbit s Interface Balanced RS 422 levels into 120 Synchronization Phase locked to the clock 10MHz 212 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Qty Four outputs Comnector Two Male 9 pin D Physical Single high option bay CPU Aware no CE Compliant Yes 9 pin D specifications Connector P3 Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 2 N C 3 N C used for Second Serial Talker only 4 T1 Out 1 RS 422 Levels 6 T1 Out 2 RS 422 Levels 1 T1 Out 2 RS 422 Levels 8 T1 Out 1 RS 422 Levels 9 TST T1 Connector P4 Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 2 N C 3 N C used for Second Serial Talker only 4 T1 Out 3 RS 422 Levels 6 T1 Out 4 RS 422 Levels XLi Time amp Frequency System 213 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H E1 OUTPUT When the clock is configured with an OCXO a High Stability OCXO or a Rubidium option the requirements of ITU T G 811 pertaining to Primary Reference Source MTIE operation are met Frequency Interface Synchronization Qty Connector Physical CE Compliant 9 pin D specifications Connector Pin Assignment
144. a 146 B BASEST ta A Umi tod e a a tats SES 123 BE crs ii as a eR thing no ato bos 129 Be ae a ed A A e A e a e CM Ph 127 Bootboader ii rt da 127 Bootloader Mode prd a rado 136 BU aras a oer eur tes d ar Mori A tbe ato 128 BUB ei E hte Ses a hd ule qaa a 127 BURP roit abaci ed etia bdo ig n bias aic e 130 BUM ii di ii A tede debe 128 Burn Bootkoader orar a Dat a ep ares vals 127 BUM BIlG Systems aoe eer Son eee OR end eee oa be PEAS eR ee 129 Burn FPGA Firmware 0000 00 cece RR eh 130 B tn Host i2 s a ital ald tale reU ENTE See NT ee BR 127 C Cable Delay DiStribUtiOFi 5 5 Len tr Or ad RU hed Bk Ow SOEUR Lae ES 78 GRASA imis ere USA emis o E G 77 Certifications ccce Mating io eon is is pee aa bees 17 Change User Name o eda ne ee ES ea ee ae Oe ee 135 Change User Password vecino cerco errar do daa 134 Glock Architecture oo uer la a ad 3 Glock Source Gontrol 5er n RE elu EET MES 107 CODE Time Code Output ooooooocooooooooooooooooo 11 Code Output eva Ss ke hace dz 116 Code Output Configuration Configuration aca rers nda adas ras 116 Command Line Interface oooooooooooo ooo 26 38 PE AA O ie Le tuni tius 26 GONEIG pa rna p eter vero Vos ec OR et 131 235 CONFIG Parameters lcs 131 Configuration Additional 25 pue ARE RS eX E DO 28 Factory nutus Stata dosh Sek edebos Ache tas du delato Seeley Self 151 GPS RECEIVE sac pa Re ele Po dem WS PME RET PS 154 Have Quick
145. a semicolon in its place For example to change the week DST begins enter F66 MANUAL 0 lt CR gt XLi responds to all changes with OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Meaning that Local time will enter DST on the last week of the month All other parameters remain unchanged The XLi automatically reboots when the user changes the DST entry exit times in F66 If any of the items in an input string are invalid an error message will be returned XLi Time Frequency System 85 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F67 Manual Leap Second Entry Use Serial Network Function F67 to manually enable a leap second insertion into the XLi clock time structure To request the present status of the manual leap seconds settings send F67 lt CR gt to the Serial Network port The port will respond with the ASCII character string F67 lt SP gt lt LS gt lt SP gt lt SELECT gt lt SP gt lt DATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 67 function number lt SP gt ASCII space character one or more lt LS gt current leap seconds value in seconds for GPS Epoch TAI Epoch SELECT NONE ADD or SUB DATE Date of next leap second insertion or blank if SELECT is NONE CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character If the Manual Leap Second function is set with leap second event values the port will respond with the string described below Sample request F67 lt CR gt R
146. accessible for notify STATUS current DESCRIPTION TimeError Timeout Ntp The IP address of the unit generating the trap SYNTAX DisplayString STATUS current DESCRIPTION The time in UTC ECT TYPE SIZE systemAlarmData 1 E 0 255 MAX ACCESS accessible for notify cem cem cem cem cem cem cem cem at which the trap was generated systemAlarmData 2 Fau Fau Fau Fau bere Cr EL ER E Faul Faul Stat Stat WN FRO tConfig 1 tConfig 2 us 1 us 2 A OS ON ON gt gt oS FAPA EE A E A WANA C A NA AAA AAA Aaa bUONnNRAD oS u gt uo UA aa XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H alarmDataCodeOBJECT TYPE SYNTAX SystemAlarmType MAX ACCESS accessible for notify STATUS current DESCRIPTION The code of the event that generated the alarm systemAlarmData 3 alarmDataStatusDescriptorOBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 MAX ACCESS accessible for notify STATUS current DESCRIPTION A description of the the XLi system at the time the alarm was triggered The format matches the output of the F73 command systemAlarmData 4 alarmSystemNotification NOTIFICATION TYP OBJECTS Gl alarmDatalpAdar alarmDataTimeStamp alarmDataCode alarmDataStatusDescriptor STATUS curr
147. ample F100 K I L L lt CR gt XLi responds OK C RESET R gt lt LF gt PLEASE ING THE UNIT lt CR gt lt LF gt WAIT lt CR gt lt LF gt In a network port session rebooting the XLi terminates the network port session open a new network port session when the XLi has finished rebooting In a serial port session the XLi displays text similar to the following example when the XLi has finished rebooting and is ready to receive additional commands ESULTS gt SYSTEM POWER ON SELF TEST R SERIAL LOOPBACK TEST PASSED RAM TEST PASSED PROG CRC TEST PASSED NETWORK INTERFACE 192 8001 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED FLASH FILE SYSTEM MOUNTED SOURCE FILE SYSTEM REV 1 80 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H c 1998 2008 SYMMETRICOM FILE config truetime conf BYTES READ 1210 133 SCAN FOR OPT CARD BEGINS FOUND 8 ADDR 30004000H ID NUM 86H SCAN FOR OPT CARD ENDS INSTALL SMART OPTIONS BEGINS FOUND GPS CARD QTY 1 ID 8013H INSTALL SMART OPTIONS ENDS QUERYING FOR SYMMETRICOM DEVICE PLEASE WAIT SYMMETRICOM GPS DEVICE XLi INITIALIZATION SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED gt F100 P Change User Password Use function F100 P to change a user pas
148. an be selected by the user Using this command all FTM II and FTM I formatted strings can be emulated Data transmitted out the serial port is in the following order Local Time Time Deviation Frequency Deviation System Frequency and System Time Each datum can be deselected for output using the format string X X X X X e g Local Time Frequency System System Time Deviation Deviation Frequency Time X X X X X Entering an F27 B lt N gt FS lt cr gt lt If gt requests the current format string in use by the FTM serial port The serial port responds with the current format string An example follows F27 B lt N gt FS lt cr gt lt lf gt user entry requests current format F27 B lt N gt FS X X X X X cr lf FTM response The X s represent data enabled for output A format string with Local Time and System Time deselected would be X X X Note the absence of X s in those positions To deselect all but Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation the following command line and FTM card response is as follows F27 B lt N gt FS X X cr lf F27 B N OK cr lf The commas are necessary placeholders and the X s are in the Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation positions Subsequently when F27 B lt N gt lt cr gt lt lf gt is sent requesting the once per second Mode only Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation is transmitted once per second T 00 432F 0 003 lt cr gt lt 1f gt T 00 432F 0 003 lt cr gt lt 1f
149. aracter string TIET for configuring J1 for TIET measurement S ASCII space character one or more Code Input Code IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 Note F110 Input Code Notes 1 IRIG doesn t contain year information Enter the current date using F3 before using IRIG as a primary reference source Failure to do so can cause the incorrect time information to be distributed Source Clock source PRIMARY SECONDARY STANDBY Set IRIG to STANDBY for TIET Impedance 100K 50 50 O impedance is selectable with DC type only Note If 50 O impedance is specified with AM modulation format XLi will overwrite the impedance input 50 Q with 100 kQ lt Type gt Code Type AM DC AM type is selectable for 100 kQ impedance only Note For DC code set the appropriate level for the length of the input cable Short runs 200 ft get 100 KQ and long runs 2200 ft get 50 Q Sign Code Sign POSITIVE NEGATIVE Note negative not supported with TIET Delay Propagation Delay 0 99999 uS Mode IRIG Mode SYNC GEN XLi Time amp Frequency System 139 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F ASCII character F lt Bypass gt Error bypass OFF 1 FRAME 2 FRAMES 3 FRAMES 4 FRAMES 5 FRAMES 6 FRAMES 7 FRAMES 8 FRAMES 9 FRAMES 10 FRAMES line terminator either a carriage return and line feed for output strings or a carriage return only for input strings lt CR gt lt LF gt Sample request F110 lt
150. aracter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 S ASCII character for Status Request LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only The XLi Serial Network port will respond with a two line replay for status request similar to the following example Sample request F78 B2 S lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F78 B2 lt CR gt lt LF gt PARALLEL BCD PART NUMBER 87 8090 CR LF 112 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H FPGA 230 01510 38v01 lt CR gt lt LF gt To obtain the Parallel BCD Output option board BCD Time Mode information send the following string to the Serial Network port F78 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt TM lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character 78 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TM ASCII character for TM selection request lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample request F78 B2 TM lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F78 B2 TM LOCAL lt CR gt lt LF gt To change the Parallel BCD Output option card BCD Time Mode selection send the following send the following string to the Serial Network port F78 lt SP gt B lt N gt l
151. ary Receiver OK Fault Alarm Disabled GPS Secondary Receiver OK Fault Alarm Disabled IRIG Fault OK Fault Alarm Enabled Aux Ref Fault OK Fault Alarm Disabled Primary Power OK Fault Alarm Enabled Secondary Power OK Fault Alarm Disabled Rubidium oscillator OK Fault Alarm Disabled XLi w optional Rubidium oscillator DAC OK Fault Alarm Disabled First Time Lock OK Fault Alarm Enabled Time Error OK Fault Alarm Enabled Time Threshold Range 0 to 99 999 nS 0000 nS Alarm LED Blink n a Enabled Timeout OK Fault Alarm Enabled Timeout Delay Range 0 to 86 400 sec 300 sec Power On Alarm Suppress Range 0 to 86 400 sec 300 sec NTP Fault OK Fault Alarm Enabled XLi w NTP option Clear Alarm Latch Yes No No 94 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Alarms General Information With Alarm Disabled an F73 indicator does nat trigger and alarm when it enters an Unlocked or Fault state With Alarm Enabled an F73 indicator triggers an alarm when it enters an Unlocked or Fault state and the following events take place The Alarm Status LED changes color from green to amber or red See In the user interfaces the card positions are referred to by Option Bay number see Figure 6 on page 33 The ALARM output on the rear panel changes from low Z to high Z impedance If configured SNMP sends a trap out over the network port See C SNMP on page 245 The following items may delay an unlocked or f
152. as or with one GPS antenna receiver and one time code or 1PPS reference In addition the 2U chassis when configured with multiple options provides dual redundancy and distribution in a single unit Optional oscillator upgrades provide enhanced short term stability when locked to a reference source and improved holdover flywheeling when a reference source is unavailable See P7 Oscillators on page 223 for more information Features and Options Three user interfaces are available for managing the XLi The web interface available using a browser connected to the network port The command line interface available from the serial port and standard network port telnet e The keypad display interface available on the front panel of the XLi The XLi s modular design allows customization for a wide range of applications The following range of features are available in the standard configuration Voltage controlled temperature compensated crystal oscillator VCTCXO 1 PPS Output Rate Output 1 10 100 PPS 1 10 100 kPPS 1 5 10 MPPS Code Output IRIG A B and NASA 36 Alarm Open Collector Output Code Input AM or DC IRIG A B and NASA 36 Auxiliary Reference Frequency Input 1 5 10 MHz Network Port 10 100 Base T Command Line Interface Telnet and Port Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Web Interface HTML XLi Time amp Frequency System 1 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H RS 2
153. as is remains active while the function is displayed on the front panel or command line Changing the function on the front panel or command line terminates Freq Meas F116 Display Brightness Level Use function F116 to adjust the brightness of the front panel display on a range from 1 to 10 with 1 being the dimmest and 10 being the brightest Note F116 is available from the keypad display only It is not available using the command line inter face 150 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F117 Factory Configuration Use function F117 to display the XLi factory Serial Number and the availability of optional software features Send the string F117 lt CR gt XLi responds F117 lt S gt SN lt S gt lt SERIAL gt lt CR gt lt LF gt NTP lt STATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt FREQ MEAS lt STATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt TIET lt STATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt PPO lt STATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 117 function number S ASCII space character one or more NTP NTP option FREQ MEAS FREQ MEAS option TIET TIET option PPO PPO option CR carriage return STATE ENABLE or DISABLE lt LF gt line feed For example enter F117 lt CR gt XLi responds F117 SN 31234 lt CR gt lt LF gt NTP ENABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt FREQ MEAS ENABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt TIET ENABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt PPO ENABLE lt
154. ata at a once per second rate The rising edge of the start bit of the last CR in the string is sent on time If all information is enabled for transmission the formatted string is as follows DDD HH MM SSQTsDS thmFsU thmSFDU thmSTHH MM SS thm CR LF For example 068 12 17 55 T 01 537F 0 123SF 60 095ST12 17 53 463 lt CR gt lt LF gt where DDD HH MM SS Local Time of Day through seconds Q XLi Time Quality Indicator TsDS thm Time Deviation Through milliseconds T begins the accumulated Time Deviation in seconds FsU thm Frequency Deviation through millihertz F begins Frequency Deviation in Hz from nominal where a positive value represents a frequency higher than nominal SFDU thm System Frequency through millihertz SF begins the System Frequency Hz System frequency is measured over a 1 second period STHH MM SS thm System Time through milliseconds ST begins System Time Day of Year through milliseconds the time a clock would display if the line voltage were used as its timing reference lt CR gt lt LF gt End of line carriage return at 1 PPS mark 1 millisecond To exit F27 once per second mode transmit a C Ctrl C character to the XLi 66 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F27 B lt N gt FS lt cr gt lt If gt FORMAT SELECT once per second DATA The data that is transmitted once per second via the F27 B lt N gt lt cr gt lt lf gt command c
155. atellites in Trimble linear units Generally this number should be 4 or greater for good reception gps 5 Gl gpsAltitude OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 2147483647 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Altitude of the GPS antenna in centimeters above or below the WGS 84 reference ellipsoid The referenc llipsoid is a rotated ellipse that is centered on the Earth s center of mass The surface of the ellipsoid is not necessarily the same as sea level The ellipsoid surface may be as much as 100 meters different from actual sea level XLi Time amp Frequency System 251 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H i gps 6 I gpsLongitude OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 2147483647 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Longitude location of GPS antenna where 2147483647 is maximum east longitude 2147483647 is maximum west longitude and 0 is Greenwich England To calculate the longitude in radians use the following formula gpsLongitude PI 2 31 1 longitude in radians For degrees gpsLongitude 180 2 31 1 longitude in degrees Note longitude varies from PI to PI in radians and 180 to 180 in degrees Ss gps 7 gpsLatitude OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 2147483647 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Latitude loca
156. atusAuxRef OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the auxiliary reference clock systemStatusDetail 6 Gl statusPrimaryPower OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the primary power systemStatusDetail 7 268 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H statusSecondaryPower OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER El ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the secondary power systemStatusDetail 8 statusRbOsc OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER El ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the rubidium oscillator systemStatusDetail 9 statusDac OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ok CH fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current D E SCRIPTION Gives th systems tatusDetail 10 statusFirstTimeLock OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER firstTimel firstTimel firstTimeNotLocked Gl MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of clock since power on LockedOn
157. atusDescriptor 4 faultPllSynthesizer 1 faultLpnPIl faultPrimaryRefClk faultSecondaryRefClk 4 faultlrig 5 faultAuxRef faultPrimaryPower faultSecondaryPower faultRbOsc faultDac 10 faultFirstTimeLock faultTimeError faultTimeout 13 faultNtp 14 systemFaultConfig 1 systemFaultConfigMasks 2 configDataLatchClear configDataThreshold configDataTimeout configDataPowerOnSuppress AROPFKN maskPlISynthesizer 1 maskLpnPIl 2 maskPrimaryRefClk maskSecondaryRefClk maskIRIG 5 274 maskAuxRef 6 maskPrimaryPower maskSecondaryPower maskRbOsc maskDac maskFirstTimeLock maskTimeError maskTimeout maskNtp RWON O XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The XLI systemAlarmData group defines SNMP traps and cannot be directly retrieved by the SNMP manager When a system alarm event occurs an SNMP trap alarmSystemNotification is sent to the SNMP managers previously configured to receive traps Included in the trap message are the variables contained in the systemAlarmData group IP address timestamp alarm code and the F73 status string The systemFaultConfig sub group contains parameters to control the generation of system alarms The timeout threshold and power on suppress values are contained in the systemFaultConfigData group Also in this group is a method object configDataLatchClear By setting t
158. ault state from triggering an alarm immediately Timeout and Timeout Delay postpone Time Error alarms for a user configured interval See Timeout and Timeout Delay on page 101 Power on Alarm Suppress prevents alarms from being triggered for a user configured interval after the XLi boots and starts See Power On Alarm Suppress on page 101 The following sections provide detailed information about each of the alarm indicators and settings avail able in function F73 Table C gives the following information The name of the indicator or setting The factory default setting for an XLi with a single GPS receiver installed The status reported by each indicator or the range for each setting Table C Indicators and Settings under function F73 Name Default Status Clock Status Enabled Locked or Unlocked PLL Locked Enabled Locked or Unlocked LPN PLL Locked Disabled A Locked or Unlocked GPS Primary Receiver Enabled A OK or Fault GPS Secondary Receiver Disabled A OK or Fault IRIG Fault Disabled B OK or Fault Aux Ref Fault Disabled B OK or Fault Primary Power Enabled OK or Fault Secondary Power Disabled A OK or Fault Rubidium oscillator Disabled A OK or Fault DAC Disabled C OK or Fault XLi Time amp Frequency System 95 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H First Time Lock Disabled C OK or Fault Time Error Enabled OK or Fault Time Threshold 350 nS Range 0 to 99 999 nS Alarm LED Blink Enab
159. ay need to move other cards to clear the two option bays Remove the cover plates from the two option bays and save the screws Slide the FTM card into the guides on the side rails of the lower slot Firmly press the card so its connector engages the Bus Backplane Secure the FTM card using the previously saved screws The FTM card will be recognized and enabled by the software upon power up Attempting to access FTM card functions without the FTM card installed will produce an error message After powering up the XLi check the FTM card s line frequency setting to ensure it is set to the local line frequency The factory configuration for line frequency is 60 Hz The default line frequency value remains the same from one power cycle to the next unless changed by the user Operation The FTM begins operation after XLi power up and runs continuously whether or not data is being accessed by the user All configuration information is stored in non volatile memory and is reloaded automatically on power up Even though the FTM starts operating on power up line frequency and time deviation measurements aren t in specification until the XLi has locked to its timing source The user can initialize and format the FTM card s data output to the serial port network ports and front panel display After powering up the XLi check the FTM card s line frequency setting to ensure it is set to the local line frequency The factory configuration for line freque
160. ber is set by changing the SW2 DIP switch settings The unique card ID number has no relation to the physical location of the card in the option bays Changing the card ID number is not required if there is only one Multicode N 8 Frequency Synthesizer card or if the cards in the XLi were factory installed To set a unique card ID number compare the SW2 DIP switch settings with those of the other Multicode N 8 Frequency Synthesizer cards present Then set individual switches using the following table as a guide Card ID SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 SW2 4 Off Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off On Off Off On On Off Off Off On Off On Off Off On On Off On On On Off oO o OA BRB Qo MP a O O z O 2 174 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Card ID SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 SW2 4 10 On Off Off On 11 Off On Off On 12 On On Off On 13 Off Off On On 14 On Off On On 15 Off On On On 16 On On On On XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Low Phase Noise 5 MHz Output 87 8009 5 Introduction This Low Phase Noise LPN output module provides four 5 MHz output signals with high spectral purity and port to port isolation Each LPN module has an on board LPN oscillator that is phase locked to the XLi s internal oscillator Therefore the LPN outputs have the same accuracy and long term stability as the XLi s internal oscillator This option requires an XLi with an upgraded oscillator OCXO
161. cal line frequency relative to the XLi reference frequency The results of this measurement are reported as System Frequency and Frequency Deviation from nominal 192 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Additionally by continual integration of the measured frequency error time information is derived from the frequency measurement From this integration accumulated Time Deviation from nominal and System Time are calculated Accumulated Time Deviation represents the amount of time a clock would gain or lose if it used the measured line frequency as its timekeeping reference System Time represents the time that would be displayed by a clock using the line frequency as its timekeeping reference System Time is calculated by adding Time Deviation plus a user entered constant Time Deviation Preset to the XLi s local time The beginning point of the Time Deviation calculation is when the Time Deviation Preset is initialized Whenever a new Time Deviation Preset value is entered the current accumulated value of Time Deviation is overwritten by the Time Deviation Preset value and the Time Deviation calculation is continued from this new value Entering a value of zero 0 effectively resets the accumulated Time Deviation The FTM processes the incoming line frequency on a cycle by cycle basis performing frequency comparison and calculations over single second periods continuously with no dead time between measurem
162. card in the XLi Each card needs to have a unique card ID number The card ID number is set by changing the SW2 DIP switch settings The unique card ID number has no relation to the physical location of the card in the option bays Changing the card ID number is not required if there is only one Multicode N 8 Frequency Synthesizer card or if the cards in the XLi were factory installed XLi Time amp Frequency System 171 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To set a unique card ID number compare the SW2 DIP switch settings with those of the other Multicode N 8 Frequency Synthesizer cards present Then set individual switches using the following table as a guide Card ID SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 SW2 4 1 Off Off Off Off 2 On Off Off Off 3 Off On Off Off 4 On On Off Off 5 Off Off On Off 6 On Off On Off 7 Off On On Off 8 On On On Off 9 Off Off Off On 10 On Off Off On 11 Off On Off On 12 On On Off On 13 Off Off On On 14 On Off On On 15 Off On On On 16 On On On On Adjusting Amplitude and Modulation Ratio Perform these steps to change the Amplitude and Modulation ratio from the factory defaults To perform adjustments Remove the top lid of the XLi and retain the screws Install the Multicode card in the XLi Use a top slot so the output level and modulation ratio potentiometers are accessible by removing the top cover from the XLi chassis See Installing or Removing Option Cards on page 21 Using a BNC T and coax cables make a th
163. ce LockedOnceWithinTimeout e current status of the digital to analog convertor 1 indicates the clock has locked at least once since power on 2 indicates the clock has locked since power on but is still within the power on suppress timeout 3 indicates the clock has not locked since power on systemStatusDetail 11 statusTimeError OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER El ok 377 fault 2 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 269 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the time error indicator systemStatusDetail 12 statusTimeout OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the timeout fault indicator systemStatusDetail 13 StatusNtp OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER E ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the NTP alarm systemStatusDetail 14 END Editing snmp conf By default SNMP is disabled To enable SNMP or configure its parameters follow the steps outlined below Please open edit save and close the snmp conf file without changing its name or saving it as a new file type An example snmp conf file might look like the following with each string that follow
164. ce source The rate at which the oscillator counts time is slightly faster or slower than the reference source The resulting difference time error accumulates over time XLi Time amp Frequency System 53 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The XLi estimates the time error based on the oscillator type and on the degree of steering DAC value applied to the oscillator before the reference source became unavailable As time error grows and exceeds the thresholds of each time quality flag the XLi generates a different time quality indicator The time quality indicator is represented as a time quality character in the following text based time outputs F8 Continuous Time Once per Second on page 56 F9 Time On Request on page 58 In addition a time quality indicator is encoded in IRIG B time code generated by the following functions e E27 FTM Ill Configuration on page 63 e F90 Code Output Configuration on page 116 For more information on time quality indicators see IRIG Standard Format A on page 290 The XLi accepts threshold values from 200 nS to 40000000000 nS The factory settings for F5 are as follows e Time quality reporting enabled Firsttime quality flag 1000 nS e Second time quality flag 10000 nS Third time quality flag 100000 nS Fourth time quality flag 1000000 nS Related topics Time Error e F13 Time Error on page 61 displays the current time error F71 Oscilla
165. cles such as ships land vehicles or aircraft With Dynamic Mode selected the receiver updates the position information repeatedly to arrive at the best time calculations for a mobile environment Select Time Mode if the receiver used in a static environment such as a server room With Time Mode the receiver averages the position data over time to determine the antenna position and calculate the time precisely and accurately TRAIM is also supported in Time Mode only Keypad While viewing the Status screen on the XLi front panel display press the following keypad buttons ENTER 53 ENTER If an GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 is available F53 displays GPS C A AVAILABILITY OPTION BAY Where is the option bay number the card is located in If no GPS is available F53 displays GPS AVAILABILTY NOT AVAILABLE If more than one GPS is present use the UP DOWN ARROW buttons to select the option bay location of a specific card To view the mode the GPS is in press ENTER again and F53 displays the current mode GPS MODE SELECT AUTO MODE or DYNAMIC MODE To change the mode use the UP DOWN ARROW buttons and press ENTER F53 asks SAVE CHANGES YES To save changes press ENTER Command Line To request the GPS operation mode of an GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 enter F53 B N F53 responds using the following format 80 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 200
166. cy on page 6 for more information on time error for different reference sources Time error begins to accumulate when the receiver loses lock to a reference source The XLi calculates the worst case time error based on the stability of system clock s oscillator type and the time elapsed since loss of lock Command Line The Command line interface will report time error when it receives the following string F13 lt CR gt The XLi responds F13 lt S gt lt ERROR gt lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 61 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F13 ASCII string for function F13 S ASCII space character ERROR calculated worst case error in seconds CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed For example to display the time error enter F13 lt CR gt XLi responds example F13 TIME ERROR 0 002932863 lt CR gt lt LF gt F18 Software Version Request Use function F18 to display the current firmware version numbers of the firmware in the XLi e Bootloader e Software firmware e File System Project Rev FPGA Command Line Use Command Line Function F18 to obtain the system s firmware version information For example enter F18 lt CR gt The XLi responds F18 BOOTLOADER 192 8000 SOFTWARE 192 8001 FILE SYSTEM 192 8002v1 80 PROJ REV 2 1 FPGA 184 8000V50 Note The values will be different from this example represe
167. d Features Propagation delay 0 99999 uS Error bypass See F110 on page 137 The Time Interval Event Time TIET option measures a 1 PPS or Event input signal on J1 against the XLi derived time The rising edge of the pulse is measured against XLi time with 5 nS resolution Pulse Width 100 nS min Active Edge Rising Amplitude DC Logic Low 1 25V and Min 300mV Logic Hi gt 1 25V and Max 10V Impedance 100 KQ 50 Q Polarity Positive Resolution 5 nS Single Shot Accuracy Refer to System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 See F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 Note Any stray input capacitance loading will impact TIET measurements XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H J2 Output Rate Out or Programmable Pulse Output Rate 1 PPS 10 PPS 100 PPS 1 kPPS 10 kPPS 100 kPPS 1 MPPS 5 MPPS 10 MPPS PPO if PPO option is installed Duty cycle 40 60 10 Amplitude TTL TTL Levels into 50 Q Quantity 1 Connector Female BNC Factory Configuration The Rate Output is default 10 MPPS The Programmable Pulse Output PPO option part number 87 8024 generates a precisely synchronized trigger pulse at an arbitrary time and with arbitrary pulse width in integer multiples of 1 uS The start and stop edges of the PPO can be programmed with 1 uS resolution Pulse Width Programmable in 1 uS steps Start Rising Stop Falling Amplitude TTL levels into 50 Q Accu
168. d and a new group 6 products has been added For the XLi and future Symmetricom products groups 1 through 5 will be absent from the XLi Enterprise MIB definition supplied with the unit The top structure for the XLi is XLi Time amp Frequency System 271 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H TrueTimeEnt 1896 products 6 Additional xli 1 Products xliTrap xliSystem xliMainCard xliOptionCards 0 1 2 3 T Additional systemFau systemStatus n xe 1 2 s Option Cards systemAlarmData mper 24 id systemFault systemStatus Config Detail 22 2 systemFault History 3 The level under the x i group is divided into four groups the first two of which will be explained later The optionCardGroup has all the available option cards under it Under each option card is a table for that option card type because there may be multiple cards of that type within an XLi chassis The current traps message group is located under the fault The ntp group is under the xliMainCard group as an option and is related to only to NTP on the standard network port on the main XLi CPU module For each instance of an NTP option card the NTP group will be repeated under the optionCards group GPS is located under the optionCards group and is repeated for each GPS option card The ntsControl and acts groups have
169. d enter the following command F100 IC F100 IP 192 168 47 156 SM 255 255 255 0 G 192 168 47 1 Is the null modem cable necessary What if I m upgrading a XLi remotely The null modem cable is optional If you decide to Telnet to the XLi over TCP IP network the null modem cable isn t needed I m using a null modem cable to connect to the XLi from my laptop and the XLi keeps rebooting An ungrounded voltage level on one of the pins in the null modem cable causes the unit to reset Use one of the following work arounds Connect the laptop to a grounded power supply if it has one or ground the laptop s chassis Do away with the null modem cable Telnet to the unit over the network Use a regular PC instead of the laptop The PC is connected to a grounded power supply and doesn t cause this problem 244 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H C SNMP SymmetricomTtm SMIv2 mib SymmetricomTtm DEFINITIONS BEGIN IMPORTS MODULE IDENTITY OBJECT TYPE enterprises Counter32 FROM SNMPv2 SMI DisplayStringFROM SNMPv2 TC symmetricomTtm MODULE IDENTITY LAST UPDATED 03022700002 ORGANIZATION SYMMETRICOM CONTACT INFO Technical Support DESCRIPTION Symmetricom Test Timing and Measurement Enterprise MIB symmetricomTtmEnt 0 symmetricomTtmEnt OBJECT ID
170. d in the Function Reference section of the XLi User s Guide and Reference Manual The Command Line sub sections provide instructions and examples Troubleshooting Tip If the terminal emulation software has trouble displaying XLi responses looks like the unit doesn t respond to inputs add a 1 ms character delay to the software s serial port settings 26 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Connecting to the Network Port TELNET The network port provides remote access to the XLi s command line interface Complete the following steps to connect to the network port 1 Use function F100 IP IP Address page 120 to obtain the XLi s IP address 2 Open a telnet session from your PC to the XLi n Windows click Start Run enter telnet where the s are the XLi s IP address and click OK Open a telnet session using a program such as HyperTerminal TeraTerm Pro or Minicom Consult the program s documentation for instructions 3 Log in as user name operator and password janus Press Enter on your keyboard to get a command prompt From the command prompt gt you can use the functions described in the Function Reference section of the XLi User s Guide and Reference Manual The Command Line sub sections provide instructions and examples D Tera Term 192 160 47 150 VT 1 El xj File Edt Setup Conbol Window Hep ELCOME TIO SYMMETRICOM NETWORK INT
171. d write privileges Provide the IP address of the SNMP management stations within that community These addresses are required in order for the management station to receive SNMP traps and to communicate with the XLi system using SNMP IP Note A special address of 255 255 255 255 grants any IP addressed unit access to the Enterprise MIB variables SNMP Private Enterprise MIB Structure This section describes the top level structure amp design of the XLi SNMP Private Enterprise MIB SNMP Addressing SNMP addressing is structured as a very large tree database A root node address is an integer value that ranges from 0 to some very large number Conceptually there are no limits to the numbers of sub nodes either SNMP addressing is written in dotted decimal notation For example the address of Symmetricom s ntplnPkts Enterprise MIB variable is 1 3 6 1 4 1 1896 6 1 2 1 1 0 The address fragment 1 3 6 1 4 1 is fixed by the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority and is the address of the SNMP Private Enterprise MIB s The 1896 is the address assigned by IANA to Symmetricom for our Enterprise MIB s Symmetricom assigns the addresses after that at our discretion and design New Top Level Structure of Enterprise MIB for XLi The former address structure of Symmetricom s Enterprise MIB is as follows TrueTimeEnt 1896 TrapMsg 1 ntp 2 ntsControl 3 gps 4 acts 5 For the XLi groups 1 2 3 4 and 5 have been deprecate
172. ded use F110 J1 Input Configuration or F113 J3 Input Configuration to check the corresponding settings on the XLi 3 Check that the Comms and Measurement settings are correct see Figure 19 4 Enter a Measurement Title 5 Click the Start button in TimeMonitor XLi Measurement to start logging the measurement data Please note that start and end data can be trimmed later on in TimeMonitor Analyzer 6 When the data collection process is complete click the Stop button The application displays the path and filename of the data file just below the graph To modify the file name or location click this path T Click the Exit button The TimeMonitor XLi Measurement software closes XLi Time amp Frequency System 227 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Figure 19 Setup Measurement and Comms Setup Gate 5 TI Rate 1 000 Hz C 1MHz 41 Ohm 43 Ohm C 5MHz C 50 C 50 10MHz 100k 1k RS 232 TCP IP Measurement Comms Time Interval RS 232 C Frequency C TCPAP Other Features Aside from logging TIET and Freq Meas data the TimeMonitor XLi Measurement software can be used as follows To send pre configured commands to the XLi Select the Command radio button and select a command from the pull down menu The results of the command are displayed in the Response field F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freg ES y b Command C Terminal C Disconnect To open
173. e The browser displays the XLi Admin Homepage or XLi User Homepage Navigating Several notes about using the web interface The home page presents an image of the XLi s front panel to assist with identification should the user need to find it on a rack The images of the 1U and 2U chassis show the position of the options bays as seen from the rear of the unit XLi Time amp Frequency System 41 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The links on the left navigation bar provide access to three different aspects of the XLi e General the general status and configuration of the XLi system e g user accounts clock settings alarms SNMP and NTP e System I O the status and configuration of the input and output connectors on the rear of the main CPU card e g communication settings code out J1 J2 and J3 e Subsystem configuration of the option cards located in the option bays Under Subsystem the XLi names CPU aware option cards to the right of the option bay where they are located Cards that are not CPU aware can be present and fully operational in an option bay but are not shown in the web interface For more information see F118 Option Board Configuration page 152 Please note that whether the XLi is a 1U or a 2U high model the web interface shows links for ten option bays in the left navigation bar Only option bays with CPU aware option cards will have active links Clicking the link of an unpopulated or n
174. e amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H A Using F100 Configuration ooooooooooocrorcrorrorcrrrrrrorro ss 235 Configuring NTP amp SNMP Parameters 0 0 0c eee eee eee eee 235 Querview Of Steps cal eV Pie t etu bg d adu PR a bU 235 Serup the FTP Sever Cea semet va TCI Sacs S Ter ee ys 235 Get the IP Address of the FTP Server Workstation oooo ooooo o 235 Copy the Configuration Files to the FTP Server oooo ooooooo o o 236 Edit the Configuration Files 1 iue S a acd RUE e OR RES 236 Move the Configuration Files Back to the XLi ooooooooo o 237 B Upgrading System Firmware o ooooooooooocoorcrorrorrorcro rro rr 239 Overview of Pr e Dl 239 A A NA 239 Open a Command Line Session on the XLi 0 0 0 0 eee eee 240 Uperadethe Firmware e A O A 240 Troubleshooting s oos y e Rhe a CU dae eaa ed d ordi 243 FAQ oct d ae Gute ta ahah AR ER RA SORORE UR Sd d GTC d RSEN 244 CC SNMP lig ake hg usa etu RIA AS ESAS 245 SymmetricomTtm SMIv2 mib 15000 torreta at s 245 xhiMaincard SMISZ Mib ta a hue catur we ae FAL da 255 SS MZ Mib ai e daas EPA ANS uar d 259 XliSystem MIO af etes S eoe Wi P see Veit laret SORS d o 259 Editing snmp CONt ou A IR Cete AR Dae See AS 270 SNMP Private Enterprise MIB Structure 0 00 0 cece eee ee eee 2 SNMP Addressing 22 use o see Vae RR eC Gece a ER 271 New Top Level Structure of Enterprise MIB for XLi
175. e offset drift and DAC values View clock and power supply fault status View the status of all the alarm indicators Enable disable alarms for each indicator Set alarm thresholds Enable or disable LED blink Select the pattern of switching between reference sources Configure and display status of PTTI card Configure and display status of Parallel BCD Output board Configure settings for CODE time code output Configure the standard network port settings Display the Ethernet MAC address Configure the IP address Configure the subnet mask Configure the default gateway Display all the standard network port s settings View network port setting Lock remote access to the XLi s standard network port Display the status of F100 LOCK Locked through the network port serial port and keypad Can be unlocked only through the keypad or serial port Display the XLi s self test results for Flash CRC RAM Serial Port and NVRAM Upgrading system firmware select the FTP host path and filename of the system firmware Upgrading system firmware burn the bootloader file bt selected using F100 BH to flash memory XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F100 BU Burn N S 5 Upgrading system firmware burn the system firmware file bin selected using F100 BH to flash memory F100 BF Burn File System N S 5 Upgrading system firmware burn the file system file fs selected using F1
176. e 1 2 4 8 IRIG B Time Quality Flags Five flags are encoded in the control function segment of the IRIG B code The first flag encoded at element P5 40ms is the LOCK indicator It is a binary 1 when the XLi is not locked to a reference The second flag encoded at element P5 60ms is a binary 1 when the worst case time error exceeds threshold 1 refer to Function 5 Time Quality Enable Setup Element P5 70ms is a binary 1 when the worst case time error exceeds threshold 2 Element P5 80ms encodes a binary 1 when the error exceeds threshold 3 and P5 90ms when the error exceeds threshold 4 XLi IRIG Time Code Input Output The XLi generates and decodes the following IRIG timecodes compliant with the IRIG 200 04 Standard or IEEE 1344 standard IRIG B B120 1kHz sine wave amplitude modulated with BCD time of year CF SBS B120 1344 1kHz sine wave amplitude modulated with BCD time of year CF SBS BCD year leap second DST time offset time quality B000 DC level shift pulse width coded with BCD time of year CF SBS B000 1344 DC level shift pulse width coded with BCD time of year CF SBS BCD year leap second DST time offset time quality IRIG A A130 10 kHz sine wave amplitude modulated with BCD time of year CF SBS A000 DC level shift pulse width coded with BCD time of year CF SBS 288 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H NASA 36 Introduction The NASA 36 time code is similar
177. e 34 F8 Continuous Time Once per Second on page 56 F9 Time On Request on page 58 F90 Code Output Configuration on page 116 le o e jo F2 affects how all four types of time Local Standard UTC GPS appear when displayed or output The 12 hour format counts hours from 1 to 12 twice per day like a conventional wall clock The 24 hour format counts hours from 0 to 23 once per day For example in the 24 hour format 18 00 is equivalent to 6 00 PM in the 12 hour format i e 18 00 12 00 6 00 PM Note Local time is commonly displayed in both 12 and 24 formats The specifications for Standard UTC and GPS call for using the 24 hour format Applying the 12 hour format to any time type leads to ambiguous time notation For example if the 12 hour format is applied to UTC the clock will display 249 10 21 34 once in the morning and once at night The factory settings for F2 are 24 hour format for the display and 24 hour format for IRIG F90 Command Line To display the current hour format send F2 lt CR gt The XLi responds F2 lt S gt D lt HH gt lt SEP gt I lt HH gt lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 49 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 02 Function number S ASCII space character one or more D ASCII character for Display format lt HH gt 12or24 E ASCII character for IRIG format CR Carriage return character
178. e completely independent from each other The Multicode Output card is configured from the front panel keypad and command line interface using F42 Multicode Output Configuration page 69 It can also be managed using the web interface Specifications Quantity 4 Connector Female BNC Output impedance 250 Amplitude into 50 Q 0 3 Vp p adjustable via internally accessible potentiometer 3 Vp p is the factory setting Amplitude into 600 Q 0 10 Vp p adjustable via internally accessible potentiometer Modulation Ratio 2 1 through 5 1 adjustable via internally accessible potentiometer 3 1 default Time Codes IRIG A 130 IRIG A 133 IRIG B 120 IRIG B 123 IRIG E 111 IRIG E 112 IRIG E 121 IRIG E 122 IRIG G 141 IRIG G 142 IRIG H 111 IRIG H 112 IRIG H 121 IRIG H 122 2137 XR3 NASA 36 All codes in 24 hour format Time References Standard UTC GPS or Local Occupies 1 Bay CPU Aware No Note The IRIG time code standard calls for UTC as the time reference The Multicode option card can also output Standard GPS and Local time for non standard applications of IRIG such as dis playing the local time on an LED time display unit The factory settings are e Amplitude into 600 Q 6V Modulation Ratio 3 1 Time Code IRIG B 120 Time Reference UTC Installation Multicode cards that were not factory installed in the XLi require additional installation if there will be more than one Multicode or N 8 Frequency Synthesizer
179. e files are in c ftpworkfiles xli you would enter the command as follows F100 bh 192 168 49 120 x1i 192 8000 bt On the other hand if the files are in c ftpworkfiles the anonymous user s home directory you would drop the relative path and enter the command as follows F100 bh 192 168 49 120 192 8000 bt Issuing the Upgrade Commands Adapt the following examples as needed to match your system such as differences in IP address path and filename Enter the following command F100 bh IP address relative path gt lt file bt gt For example F100 bh 192 168 49 120 192 8000 bt 240 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H XLi responds BURN HOST 15 R EADY lt CR gt lt LF gt Then burn the bootloader to the XLi s flash memory by entering F100 bub The XLi responds OK BURNING FILE 1 SEC O RE 0 SEC 1 RE 0 SEC 2 RE 0 SEC 3 RE 0 SEC 4 RE 0 SEC 5 RE 0 SEC 6 RE 0 FLASH S Do the same for the 92 8000 bt WITH SIZE 452164 TO PARTITION 0 SECTOR 0 UCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED CRC32 Ox9EFBE60A firmware bin file F100 bh IP address relative path gt lt file bin gt For example F100 bh 192 168 49 120 192 8001 bin The XLi responds BURN HOST IS RI Then enter F100 bu The XLi responds OK BURNING FILE 1 SEC 10 RE 0 SEC 11 RE 0 SEC 12 RE O SEC 13 RE 0 SEC 14 RE 0 SEC 15 RE
180. e pan da an dite d pra boire dus derit 190 Alarm Operation A tet se uS UI A ded ele ura ILU 191 INATEC pra FA TEM rae E Eaa a 191 GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 us a er LER ARCU ER C YA EM KS ROS 191 InttodHde id a 191 Specifications uoo cara d A e een 192 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 0 o oooooooooommmmomo 192 A voe but id d EE nde SM CE A airs 192 SPECIES atu taste 194 InstallattoH E ef std AA 195 OPEN IS Fat etd rea ute ee aA CO SR Sd alie nok BE 196 Contiguratlot vos ie a aha Stated oe oak Ped UAE T dU e dA RE ES 197 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 0 000 cece eee eee 198 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality 87 8090 6 199 Parallel BCD uSec with Time Quality 87 8090 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 201 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Unlock Status 87 8090 2 o o o o o 205 PTTI BCD Output 87 9045 os clue deu old pga ake Res Ote pactos Pes 207 PTTI 10V TIPPS and IPPM Output v e cef p a habeis 210 Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 87 8047 lel 212 HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 216 IPPS Input Specifications sr e eves US OP EE DERE 216 Have Quick Input Specifications cce oec Re ee 217 Have Quick Signal Characteristics 0 0 cece auna 217 Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM 87 8016 6 o ooooooomo o o 219 Have Quick
181. e responded to with the current data values Local Time of receipt of the T to the millisecond is recorded System Time is calculated from the recorded Local Time and the complete FTM data string is transmitted back to the user An example session follows F27 B lt N gt TD cr lf T 069 15 25 27 5450T 00 477F 0 011SF 59 989ST15 25 28 022 Ab 069 15 25 31 9320T 00 477F 0 013SF 59 987ST15 25 32 409 T 069 15 25 32 5240T 00 476F 0 012SF 59 9885T15 25 33 000 AC OK cr lf 68 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The Time On Demand string contains an additional four characters representing the decimal point and milliseconds of the Local Time at the time of receipt of the T Exit F27 B lt N gt TD mode by entering a C or Ctrl C F42 Multicode Output Configuration Use function F42 to view or set up the time code outputs of the Multicode Output 87 6002 XL1 page 171 Notes Board Identifies the card to which the following settings will apply Select between multiple cards using the UP DOWN ARROWs buttons on the keypad The card number is determined by the position of DIP switches on the Multicode card Each card must have a unique number See Installation on page 171 Output Identifies the output to which the settings apply e g J1 through J4 Code The time code output by the port The note below provides a complete list of all the time code types available Time R
182. e time code is the same as selected for the standard XLi time code output See Function F90 XLi Time amp Frequency System 169 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To generate any other signal type three steps are required First move the plug in JP2 to the DC jumper e g J4 DC Second select a signal type from the following table and note the corresponding switch position e g 10 MPPS position 1 Finally using a small flat head screwdriver turn the rotary switch e g S4 to the appropriate switch position e g 1 In this example the J4 output would be set to generate 10 MPPS and the procedure would be complete The same method can be used to configure any of the outputs Switch Position Signal Type Off 10 MPPS 5 MPPS 1 MPPS 100 kPPS 10 kPPS 1 kPPS 1 PPS Time Code DC PPO Alarm F Not Used U gt O o 00 o No o Note PPO and Alarm are only available if those options have been purchased and are enabled using F126 Options Key Entry page 164 170 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Multicode Output 87 6002 XL1 The Multicode Output option card generates four AM time code outputs Each of the outputs can be independently configured to generate a specified time code signal All outputs configured for IRIG A will output the same type of IRIG A e g IRIG A 130 Likewise all outputs configured for IRIG G will output the same type of IRIG G All the other time code types ar
183. ectable Code input has an additional selection for IRIG B 000 w IEEE1344 Configuration is via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML IRIG B 007 IS DEFINED IN IRIG STANDARD 200 04 AS Format B 100 pps 0 Pulse width code 0 No carrier index count interval 0 BCD TOY CF SBS IEEE1344 IS DEFINED IN IEEE1344 1995 R2001 ANNEX F AS See section TIME CODE OUTPUT IRIG B120 W IEEE1344 for definitions XLI SYNC The XLi first synchronizes to IRIG B 120 w IEEE1344 when the Time Quality control bits are 0000 The XLi remains synchronized Locked while the Time Quality control bits are 0000 through 0101 ETE lt 1uSec The XLi utilizes the IRIG B 120 BCD TOY IEEE 1344 year leap second and leap second pending bit as the UTC epoch The XLi time format selection remains on the XLi including Daylight saving time offset Input Amplitude DC Logic Low lt 1 25V gt 0V XLi Time amp Frequency System 15 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Logic Hi 22 5V 10V Impedance 100K or 50 Q d Qty 1 Connector BNC female Manual Leap Second Entry The Manual Leap Second Entry is configurable via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML This function allows the user to enter leap second data This mode of operation will allow the user to maintain UTC with the XLi clock without an external time reference providing leap second data or in a standalone m
184. ed for input strings a carriage return only For example enter F123 B3 C SEC HAVE QUICK 1PPS The XLi changes INPUT MODE to HAVE QUICK 1PPS changes HQ TIME REFERENCE to SECONDARY and responds OK XLi Time amp Frequency System 163 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F126 Options Key Entry Use function F126 to enter the Options Key which enables certain functions e g PPO TIET NTP FREQ MEAS if the correct key is entered To check the status of these XLi options see F117 Factory Configuration on page 151 After entering the key code using F126 reboot the XLi To set the Options Key code enter the following F126 lt S gt lt KC gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F f or F for input string 126 the function number lt S gt ASCII space character one or more lt KC gt Key Code 0 to 999999999999999 A value of all nines will clear all Option enable flags CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example enter F126 lt S gt 5674397586090 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Use function F117 to verify that the correct code was entered Then reboot the unit to activate the option 164 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F128 Have Quick Output Configuration The Have Quick Out time code status can be determined via the Serial or Network port using Function F128 Use Serial Network Function
185. eference The type of time e g UTC Standard Local GPS output by all ports on the card Even though this setting is shown for a specific output it sets the type of time for all ports The code output types include IRIG A 130 IRIG A 133 IRIG B 120 IRIG B 123 IRIG E 111 IRIG E 112 IRIG E 121 IRIG E 122 IRIG G 141 IRIG G 142 IRIG H 111 IRIG H 112 IRIG H 121 IRIG H 122 2137 XR3 NASA 36 If IRIG A 130 or IRIG A 133 is selected as the output type for a specific port all other ports set for IRIG A will be bumped to the same type 130 vs 133 Ports set to other time code types e g IRIG B are not affected The same is true for IRIG G If IRIG G 141 or IRIG G 142 is selected as the output type all the other ports set for IRIG G will be bumped to the same type 141 vs 142 Ports set to other time code types e g IRIG B are not affected For more information on the code output types see E Time Code Formats on page 287 For Time Reference the following is a summary explanation of the different types of time UTC Coordinated Universal Time differs from GPS Time by the addition of leap second cor rections to compensate for variations in the earth s rotation GPStime is derived directly from the GPS constellation It doesn t contain leap second adjustments or other GPS to UTC corrections Standard time is UTC plus a time zone adjustment For example Pacific Standard Time is UTC minus 8 hours See F
186. ely To open a function using ENTER Press Result ENTER Displays the FUNCTION prompt 2 Enter the function s number 2 in this example ENTER Displays F2 s first screen DISPLAY HOUR FORMAT 24 HOUR To open a function using MENU Press Result MENU Displays F1 on the front panel display UP DOWN ARROW Scrolls through the list of functions ENTER Opens the function and displays its first screen To change the settings in a function and not save them Press Result MENU Displays F1 TIME ZONE OFFSET ENTER Displays TIME ZONE OFFSET 08 00 UP ARROW Changes the minus sign in 08 00 to a plus in 08 00 RIGHT ARROW Moves the cursor to the right under 0 UP ARROW Changes 0 to 1 making 18 00 ENTER XLi asks SAVE CHANGES YES UP ARROW Changes YES to NO ENTER Abandons the changes and displays the Status Display Other ways to abandon new settings in a function Press Result CLR Abandons all changes and displays to the first screen in the function TIME Abandons all changes exits the function and displays the Time Display STATUS Abandons all changes exits the function and displays the Status Display XLi Time amp Frequency System 37 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To enter numeric values in a function Press Result ENTER Displays the
187. ene AI E A a 35 Ment Display uiri v abcr hd puis RES VASMELNCUE ES E E NE bus 35 Keypad ODetatlol a ts ce ba ea das 36 Keypad Example 22a ts eta once aa qo teu a tane a ea 37 Command Line Interact ORIS Se wu a aa ia 38 Logging M porre ve Peele Be Ck ws We rine en IES 38 Operator L gin oan da ta osa EE eRe dee Ae da 38 Guest LOZIN 2 ecl e xeu d ace SC SORT OD aes a Pu OH 38 Copo Out oua asia ended vi efle deg eda 39 Changing Username and Password 0 ccc eee cece neces 39 Session Time out and Priority 3 e dec eee REDE RP DES 39 WED ACC qne eer vede noD PES INE IS Puit e d eg atr 40 Ir dulu MP 40 SESSIONS Mx 4 User Names and Passwords eus eva Ex REG ERAT ERES 41 Logging lr A Lieben oq e tact pq 41 A eae ueri dd et tam Mi eril true e MA IDE cades 41 Submitting COAST A RR 42 E cb ecg et eee Re ne MEAG 4 ante eps dd Bx Y qa Sd ales 42 INOLGS oes etate ode stan At um Mul hae pulse EM 42 5 Function Reference stage xa P ERES E EIS TIERRA A be ened d 45 F ction Summary vr esie Tuc ex oae AA RAN Erde 45 iv XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Fl Time Zone Offset 48 p2 12 24 Hout Port dt 2 5 a A A Recette eo ae Rs sce 49 F3 Pie Di A td Oe aig tet Bi eb atque du qutt a 50 F4 Serial Port Configuration 13 359 s 9 de Vd toe Wis ra y eed Soo V avs 22 Fo Time Quality Setup oce ra eS oet ek hea ES code one Fac i nus 53 EO Keypad Lock oz ds oen epe deco S Ty ao ioa dae Edu Ss
188. enerated Messages 0 0 cece cee eee 231 XYZ coordinates cesse ii a EA Tad RDA 75 10 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H
189. ent DESCRIPTION A trap that indicates a change in system status Refer to the list of OBJECTS above xliTrap 1 configDataLatchClear OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER El latchClear 1 MAX ACCESS write only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Setting to lt latchClear gt clears the latched fault indicators systemFaultConfigData 1 configDataThreshold OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Unsigned32 0 99999 MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION The time error threshold in nanoseconds at which the time error fault is activated systemFaultConfigData 2 configDataTimeout OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Unsigned32 0 86400 MAX ACCESS read write XLi Time amp Frequency System 261 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H STATUS current DESCRIPTION The timeout delay in seconds after which a time error fault becomes a timeout fault systemFaultConfigData 3 E configDataPowerOnSuppress OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Unsigned32 0 86400 MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION The minor alarm power on timeout in seconds systemFaultConfigData 4 El maskPllSynthesizer OBJECT TYP SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th synthesizer status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 1 maskLpnPll OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Fau
190. ent UTC leap second data 154 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H For additional information on good current GPS satellites see F60 GPS Receiver Satellite List on page 81 Following power up and initialization the receiver requires at least four concurrent good current satellites to resolve its current position In rare cases when a pair of good current satellites are on intersecting paths the receiver requires additional good current satellites or waits for the intersecting satellites to diverge before resolving the current position Once resolved the current position information is saved While resolving its current position the GPS receiver also listens for the UTC leap second offset periodically transmitted by GPS satellites along with GPS time and position information Up to thirteen minutes may elapse from the time the receiver acquires its first good current satellite to the time it receives the UTC leap second offset Once received the UTC leap second offset is saved When the receiver has the UTC leap second value it starts providing valid time to the XLi system clock When the system clock is locked to the GPS time reference and is operating within specifications the system status is locked The interval from initialization to system status lock is typically under twenty minutes under nominal conditions This transition is illustrated below Following initializati
191. ents FTM frequency and time measurements are referenced to UTC when XLi is locked to GPS XLi Time amp Frequency System 193 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Specifications Input Voltage 95 260 VAC Frequency 40 70 Hz Input Connector MALE CEE 22 Standard Electronic Equipment Power Connector Signal Conditions RFI Input Filter Line Fuse Protected 0 5 A Fuse 2500 VAC RMS Isolation Opto isolation Coupled Filter Multi Stage Low Pass Measurement Rate 1 Measurement Second Frequency Deviation Range 19 999 Hz Accuracy 1 mHz Resolution Measurement 30 Hz Display 1 mHz Time Deviation Range 99 999 s Sample rate 1 sample per second Accuracy 1 mS Resolution Measurement 500 nS Display 1 ms Time offset input 99 999 seconds max Enter via keypad or communication port System Frequency Range 40 70 Hz Accuracy 1 mHz Resolution Measurement 30 uHz Display 1 mHz 194 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H System Time System Time is defined as the user s time of day derived from the Line Frequency Under Test plus a user entered offset and is calculated as follows LOCAL TIME USER ENTERED TIME DEVIATION PRESET TIME DEVIATION Range Accuracy User Interface Local Time 199 999 s 1 ms the absolute value of REF FREQ FUT 1 41 5 E g at 60 05 Hz and 59 95 Hz the accuracy is 1 ms Absolute value of 0 833 ms 1 5 2 25 ms Usin
192. er F119 B1 S XLi responds example F119 B1 GPS PART NUMBER 87 8028 02 SOFTWARE 230 01510 04v1 17 FPGA 184 8024v1 GPS STATUS UNLOCKED GPS ANTENNA OK GPS ACQUISITION STATE SURVEY POSITION To obtain the configuration of the GPS receiver enter the following F119 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt C lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 119 function number S ASCII space character one or more B ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 C ASCII character denotes reference configuration query lt CR gt lt LF gt line terminator either a carriage return and line feed for output strings or a carriage return only for input strings For example F119 B1 C lt CR gt XLi responds F119 Bl PRIMARY lt CR gt lt LF gt To change the configuration of the GPS receiver as a primary or secondary reference source enter F119 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt C lt S gt lt CONFIG gt lt CR gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 157 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 119 function number lt S gt ASCII space character B ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 lt SEP gt one or more separator characters either space comma or tab e ASCII letter denotes reference configuration to follow lt CONFIG gt Reference Source Configuration PRI SEC or ST
193. er the current year using F3 before using IRIG as a primary or secondary reference source Failure to do so can cause the incorrect time information to be distributed See F3 Time amp Date on page 50 At the end of the year the year increments by one e g 2004 2005 provided the XLi is XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H operating during the transition If it is not operating during the transition the time code reasserts the preceding year when used as a reference source TIET Put the F110 time code input on STANDBY first before configuring F110 for TIET TIET Stray capacitance loading on the J1 input adversely impacts TIET measurements Command Line F110 can configure the J1 input port to IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 TIET Time or TIET Event Use F110 to enter or request the J1 Input Configuration To request the J1 Input Configuration enter F110 lt CR gt The function responds with the ASCII character string F110 lt S gt lt Code gt lt S gt lt Source gt lt S gt lt Impedance gt lt S gt lt Type gt lt S gt lt Sign gt lt S gt lt Delay gt lt S gt lt Mode gt lt S gt lt Bypass gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Or F110 lt S gt TIET lt S gt lt Impedance gt lt S gt lt Sign gt lt CR gt lt LF gt when TIET option is enabled and J1 is set to TIET Where the F110 entry and request formats are defined as F ASCII character F 110 function number TIET ASCII ch
194. ered when the timeout threshold is reached systemFaultConfigMasks 13 maskNtp OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm will be triggered when NTP is in alarm systemFaultConfigMasks 14 El faultPllSynthesizerOBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a PLL synthesizer fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 1 E faultLpnPllOBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a LPN PLL fault occurred since the fault 17 latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 2 E faultPrimaryRefClkOBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION 264 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H TRUE if a primary reference clock fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 3 El faultSecondaryRefClk OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if a secondary reference clock lock fault occurred since the fault latch was cleared systemFaultHistory 4 Li faultIrig OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Boolean MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION TRUE if an IRIG lock fault occurred since
195. ernal backplane When available and enabled the GPS Receiver card provides superior time and frequency accuracy on the XLi See System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 The GPS receiver card comes with an L1 GPS antenna cabling and mounting hardware unless otherwise specified at the time of purchase See Installing the GPS Antenna on page 19 for information on selecting an antenna site mounting the antenna and signal strength requirements The GPS receiver card can be managed and configured using F119 available from the keypad and command line See F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 Specifications Frequency 1575 42 MHz L1 signal Code Coarse Acquisition C A code Tracking Up to 12 satellites Position Accuracy Typically 10m when tracking four 4 satellites XLi 1 PPS Accuracy 30 nS RMS UTC USNO 100 nS Peak 99 Time standard UTC Antenna input Female BNC Antenna Power 20 mA 220 mA 12 V CPU Aware Yes Related topics Installing the GPS Antenna on page 19 XLi with a GPS Reference on page 30 XLi with two optional GPS receivers on page 30 F50 GPS Receiver LLA XYZ Position on page 75 E51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay on page 77 F60 GPS Receiver Satellite List on page 81 F69 Time Mode on page 89 E73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 le
196. erver s outgoing NTP packet will have its reference identifier field set to ntpSysRefClockIdent ntp 14 ntpControlInput OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 MAX ACCESS read write STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This variabl mulates TrueTime s serial function command strings The same commands issued to the serial port can be sent to this string Use this variable for SNMP sets of functions strings Note setting this variable clears ntpControlOutput to the null string See ntpControlOutput below ntsControl 1 ntpControlOutput OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 255 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This variabl mulates TrueTime s serial function command strings The same commands issued to the serial port can be sent to this string This variable holds the output result string from the last setting of the above ntpControlInput variable Use this variable for SNMP gets of function strings See ntpControlInpuut above ntsControl 2 E gpsGroupValid OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 1 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION A test flag indicating if data contained in this SNMP GPS group is valid or not This flag equals 1 when GPS is used as the time synchronization source and 0 for all other sources gps 1 250 XLi Time amp Freq
197. es The XLi features three user interfaces for controlling the XLi s functions Akeypad display interface on the front panel of the XLi Acommand ne interface available through the serial and network ports Awebinterface available from a browser connected to the XLi s network port There is also an Alarm Status LED on the front panel Card Positions In the user interfaces the card positions are referred to by Option Bay number see Figure 6 1 U Chassis XLi CPU Module Power Supply 2 U Chassis Opt Power Supply Power Supply XLi CPU Module Figure 6 Option bay positions as seen from the rear of the XLi 1 U and 2 U chassis Alarm Status LED The Alarm Status LED located on the front panel displays the alarm state of the XLi unit The LED has four states Dark Power is off Green No F73 related alarms The current reference source input is locked Amber No F73 Alarms Time out Delay is counting down but hasn t elapsed The current reference source input is unlocked e g broken antenna cable or no GPS signal Red Anindicator in F73 has triggered an alarm Check F73 to find out what the fault unlock condition is and take appropriate action XLi Time amp Frequency System 33 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Notes The amber LED can turn green again while the reference source input remains unlocked because F119 s GPS Status controls whether the LED turns amber F73 s Ti
198. esent the three digit addresses for System Frequency Frequency Deviation Time Deviation System Time and Local Time respectively The lower case s represents the sign lower case dd and d is the decimal portion of the value represented and mmm represents the fractional portion of the value represented Addresses entered with a negative value aren t transmitted from the Display Port Thus if a non addressable display is to be used setting only one address positive causes that associated data to be transmitted alone Up to 10 displays may be connected to the RS 422 port in a multi drop configuration Maintenance and Troubleshooting This option has been designed to provide maintenance free operation and requires no periodic servicing or calibration There are no user serviceable components in the FTM card A qualified service technician may replace the surge protection fuse pig tail solder type if it is determined to be faulty Warning Only a qualified technician should attempt troubleshooting of this option Dangerous voltages are present which can cause electric shock that could result in severe injury or death Before proceeding see Operation on page 196 for a description of normal operation and user configurations Sometimes an apparent failure may simply be an incorrect user configuration entry e g 50 Hz instead of 60 Hz Ensure the FTM card configuration is correct Ensure that the line voltage to be meas
199. esponse F67 14 33 ADD 12 31 2007 lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the current leap second value for UTC GPS enter a continuous string of the form F67 lt SEP gt GPSLS lt SEP gt lt nn gt where GPSLS ASCII string indicating a GPS Epoch leap second value will be entered nn Leap second valued entered 00 to 30 Sample entry F67 GPSLS 14 CR 86 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the current leap second value for UTC TAI enter a continuous string of the form F67 lt SEP gt TAILS lt SEP gt lt nn gt where TAILS ASCII string indicating a TAI Epoch leap second value will be entered nn Leap second valued entered 19 to 49 Sample entry F67 TAILS 33 lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Adding a Leap Second To set the next leap second insertion time for adding a leap second enter a continuous string of the form F67 lt SEP gt ADD lt SEP gt lt MONTH gt lt SEP gt lt YEAR gt where ADD ASCII string indicating a leap second will be added MONTH Month number that the leap second will be added on the last day of the month MAR JUN SEP DEC or NONE YEAR Year that the leap second will be subtracted 2000 to 2030 or NONE Subtracting a leap second To set the next leap second insertion time for subtracting a leap second enter a continuous string of the form F67 lt SEP gt SUB lt
200. et ntp snmp host 192 168 0 1 dir Are Des Des Des Host config ip 192 168 0 1 already configured you sure y N y Source file snmp conf bytes read 1275 t file config snmp conf bytes written 1275 Source file ntp conf bytes read 1166 t file etc ntp conf bytes written 1166 Source file ntp keys bytes read 44 t file etc ntp keys bytes written 44 Configuration files transferred successfully Resetting If you get Error Can t open source file verify that the FTP server s Local Server is running After XLi receives the configuration files it reboots and goes through the normal startup process XLi Time amp Frequency System 237 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H This page intentionally left blank 238 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H B Upgrading System Firmware Consideration must be given to the firmware and the hardware version numbers of the XLi and it s optional components Consult with Symmetricom s Customer Service department before performing upgrades See H Sales and Customer Assistance page 295 This section explains how to completely upgrade the system firmware This is done using the F100 BH F100 BUB F100 BU F100 BF and F100 BUFP commands Overview of Procedure e Setup a network connection between your XLi and the FTP server Setup an FTP Server with the firmware upgrade files Open a command line session to the XLi
201. etricom Sales See H Sales and Customer Assistance on page 295 F110 can configure the J1 input port on the main CPU card as a time code reference source for the system clock or it can configure J1 as the input for TIET operation XLi Time amp Frequency System 137 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Keypad Note J1 Configuration IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 TIET Set to match the type of time code input J1 Time Reference Available when J1 Configuration is IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 not for TIET Primary Secondary Standby Identify the time code input as a primary or secondary reference source The function F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 uses this designation to for reference source switching Standby disables and removes J1 Input as a valid reference source Selecting Primary or Secondary automatically bumps another reference source with the same setting e g F119 GPS Receiver Configuration to Standby Configuring F110 for TIET forces J1 Time Reference to Standby When reconfiguring the J1 as a time code reference source input be sure to set J1 Time Reference to Secondary or Primary Configure Code AM DC Set to the time code input signal type AM for amplitude modulated or DC level shift See the time code definitions in E Time Code Formats on page 287 for more information Input Impedance Always use 500 coaxial cable and terminate it into a 500 load Input Polarity Positive Negative Propaga
202. etwork port F77 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt S lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 7T function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 S ASCII character for Status Request lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only The XLi Serial Network port will respond with a two line replay for status request similar to the following example Sample request F77 B2 S lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F77 B2 lt CR gt lt LF gt PTTI OUTPUT PART NUMBER 87 8045 CR LF FPGA 230 01510 37v01 CR LF To obtain the PTTI Output option board BCD Time Mode information send the following string to the Serial Network port F77 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt TM lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F TT function number XLi Time amp Frequency System 109 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TM ASCII character for TM selection request lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample request F77 B2 TM lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F77 B2 TM LOCAL lt CR gt lt LF g
203. eviation Stability with 3x 10 10 sec TCXO 3 x 10 100 sec 2 x 10 1000 sec 1x10 1 day AM Code Output Accuracy 10 uS to the 1 PPS output DC Level Shift Code Output 200 nS to the 1 PPS output Accuracy Time to System Lock 20 min typical See GPS Signal Strength Requirements page 21 and GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 page 191 Time Code Input 1 PPS Output 10 uS to the incoming code Frequency Output Accuracy 1x1071 referenced to 5x107 carrier 1 day Stability of Frequency Timing 5x10 10 sec referenced to 3x10 10 sec carrier Allan Deviation Accuracy of AM Code Output 10 uS to the incoming code Accuracy of DC Level Shift 10 uS to the incoming code Code Output See F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 6 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Have Quick Input 1 PPS Output 1 0 uS to the incoming code Stability of Frequency Timing 5x10 10 sec Allan Deviation Accuracy of AM Code Output 1 Accuracy of DC Level Shift 1 Code Output 0 uS to the incoming code 0 uS to the incoming code See HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 on page 216 1 PPS Input 1 PPS Output 10 uS to the incoming 1 PPS Stability of Frequency Timing 5x10 10 sec Allan Deviation Accuracy of AM Code Output 10 uS to the incoming 1 PPS Accuracy of DC Level Shift 10 uS to the incoming 1 PPS Code Output See
204. g See F27 FTM Ill Configuration page 63 available from Front panel display e Command Line Serial Port amp Network Port Also available using the web interface FTM Display RS 422 PORT baud rate data bits parity stop bits Selectable Ranges from Front Panel Keypad 600 38400 7 8 even odd none 1 2 Data Available once per second e System Frequency Frequency Deviation Time Deviation e System Time Local Time CPU Aware No Installation No installation is required when the FTM is factory installed in the XLi The following installation instructions apply only to an FTM card installed by the customer later on Supplied with the purchase of a separate FTM card XLi Time Frequency System 195 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The FTM card e Mounting screws Warning Dangerous voltages are present which can cause electric shock that could result in severe injury or even death Disconnect all power before installing this option The only equipment required for installation is a Phillips screwdriver Prior to installing the FTM Card check the XLi s Software Version Number using F18 See F18 Software Version Request on page 62 The version must be 1 80 or later to use the FTM card If a firmware upgrade is required contact Symmetricom Customer Assistance FTM card installation requires inserting the FTM Card into the lower of two empty option bays in the XLi You m
205. ge GPS system components and receiving equipment even without a direct hit resulting in costly repairs and critical interruption of service The lightning arrestor is designed to work in conjunction with a low resistance low inductance ground to protect your GPS receiver and elements of the antenna system from lightning discharges and field induced electrical surges In line lightning arrestors are mounted between the antenna and the point where the cable enters the building and require no additional power or wiring except the ground lead Antenna Splitter An antenna splitter may be used to drive multiple GPS receivers using a single antenna With built in amplification to overcome splitter losses the Active Splitters may be conveniently cascaded without adding separate amplifiers and bias tees between splitters Power is conveniently obtained from the GPS receiver s connected to the amplifier eliminating the need for a separate dc power supply and wiring In Line Antenna Amplifier In line amplifiers overcome signal attenuation in by amplifying the GPS signal Mounting the amplifier inside the mounting mast helps protect it from moisture and exposure to the elements Use the in line amplifier for cable runs of 150 to 300 feet 45 m to 90 m Please contact a Symmetricom Sales Representative for information on how to extend the distance from the antenna to the receiver 22 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H
206. ge return character lt LF gt line feed character For example F50 B2 XYZ lt CR gt XLi responds F50 B2 X 4474331m Y 2668899m Z 3668099m lt CR gt lt LF gt F51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay Use function F51 to display or configure the GPS antenna cable delay Setting a positive value for F51 compensates for the time the signal takes to travel the length of the cable from the GPS antenna to the receiver When multiple GPS receivers are installed a separate value can be set for each unique receiver The factory setting for F51 is 60 nS 50 feet of RG 59 If using an optional Down Up Converter consult that product s documentation for directions on setting the correct cable delay F51 Guidelines e For RG 59 multiply the cable length by 1 24 nS ft to get the value for F51 e For RG 58 multiply the cable length by 1 4 nS ft to get the value for F51 Avoid using function F51 to adjust the XLi s timing outputs use F52 Distribution Cable Delay instead Command Line Use the following format to display the current Antenna Cable Delay setting F51 lt S gt B lt N gt lt CR gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 77 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The XLi responds using the following format F51 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt lt SIGN gt lt DELAY gt ns lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F f or F for input string 51 the function number S ASCII space character one or more B ASCII
207. ge the PTTI BCD output selection send the following send the following string to the Serial Network port F77 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SP gt BCD lt SP gt lt OUT gt lt LT gt where F ASCII character F 7T function number SP ASCII space character B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 BCD ASCII character to denote Binary Coded Decimal selection XLi Time amp Frequency System 111 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H lt OUT gt FULL or ABBREV For definitions see PTTI BCD Output 87 8045 LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample entry F77 B2 BCD ABBREV lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Note Note The PTTI output signal may stop for one second when the output format is changed F78 Parallel BCD Output Configuration The Parallel BCD Output option board status can be determined via the Serial or Network port using Function F78 Use Serial Network Function F78 to obtain information about the part number and the current version of the FPGA installed on the Parallel BCD Output option board To obtain board status information send the following string to the Serial Network port F78 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt S lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 78 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII ch
208. gement station An Internet connected remote host that consumes SNMP data provided by a Management agent for the display of human network managers In other network applications this would be called a client of the SNMP protocol MIB Management Information Base This is the data structure for the SNMP protocol The current version of this standard that is in general use is MIB II defined by RFC s 1213 and 1212 XLi Time amp Frequency System 277 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H NTP Network Time Protocol A network time distribution protocol developed at the University of Delaware under the direction of Dr Mills NTP is a client server based protocol where the server is the supplier of time and the client is the consumer of the time information Private Enterprise MIB SNMP allows private organizations to define their own MIB extensions The IANA of the IETF issues for a fee a unique number to an organization that is an address entry point from the MIB II into the private data for that organization Only one Enterprise address is assigned to an organization The Enterprise address for Symmetricom is 1896 This address space has grown to over 12 000 private addresses and Symmetricom is by comparison one of the earlier adopters of SNMP with an Enterprise MIB RFC Request for Comments A document reviewed and released by the IANA that defines the formal definitions of various Internet communication protocols and related information
209. gt Where F ASCII character F 111 Function number PPO ASCII character string PPO lt S gt ASCII space character one or more lt RATE gt Output rate or type RATE 1 PPS RATE 10 PPS RATE 100 PPS RATE 1 kPPS RATE 10 kPPS RATE 100 kPPS RATE 1 MPPS RATE 5 MPPS RATE 10 MPPS lt START gt amp STOP Time of year with microsecond resolution in the format of yyy hh mm ss uuuuuu Range 001 00 00 00 000000 366 23 59 59 999999 Note Wildcard character X or X can also be entered See the section regarding time string with wildcard character 2 Colon separators are required lt CR gt lt LF gt Line terminator a carriage return and line feed for output strings or a carriage return for input strings Depending what F111 is currently set up to do the sample request F111 lt CR gt XLi Time Frequency System 143 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Displays a fixed 10 PPS rate output example F111 RATE 10PPS lt CR gt lt LF gt Or displays the PPO settings example F111 PPO 120 22 56 12 000000 120 22 56 12 000003 lt CR gt lt LF gt Setting the J2 Output Configuration To set the J2 Output Configuration send a character string with the previously defined F111 entry format to the Serial Network port Only valid values are accepted The J2 Output Configuration can be set to specify one of several predetermined rates a single PPO pulse outputs and repetitive PPO pulse output
210. gt PLEASE WAIT lt CR gt lt LF gt Ds F100 SM Subnet Mask Note F100 SM can be used concurrently with F100 IP and F100 G See the last example provided in the F100 IP IP Address section directly above this one Use function F100 SM to display or configure the Subnet Mask To set the Subnet Mask and restart the unit enter F100 lt S gt SM lt S gt lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt CR gt XLi Time Frequency System 121 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number S space IP specify IP command nnn nnn nnn nnn dotted decimal address 0 to 255 CR inputline terminator For example enter F100 SM 255 255 255 240 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt ESETING THE UNIT lt CR gt lt LF gt PLEASE WAIT lt CR gt lt LF gt ve To obtain the Subnet Mask of the unit Standard network port enter F100 SM lt CR gt The XLi responds F100 SM lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt is the dotted decimal address notation An example of the response is F100 SM 255 255 255 125 lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 G Gateway Note F100 G can be used concurrently with F100 IP and F100 SM See the last example provided in the F100 IP IP Address section which starts on page 120 Use function F100 G to display or configure the Default Gateway To set
211. he specified measurement interval The front panel displays the measured frequency offset FREQ OFFSET and a countdown COUNT to completion of the measurement interval The command line states the measurement interval e g Interval is 1 seconds on the first line and then starts displaying each measurements each one on a new line Limitations Note that the accuracy of the frequency measurement is based on the accuracy and stability of the disciplined XLi oscillator over the measurement interval Short interval measurements of external very high stability oscillators e g Cesium tend to measure the XLi oscillator instead Refer to System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 and to P7 Oscillators on page 223 for more information for the specifications of disciplined oscillators while locked to a GPS reference source Theory of Operation Freq Meas uses a heterodyne phase error multiplier to achieve high resolution at short sample periods Using its internal disciplined frequency the XLi records or timestamps the zero crossing of the J3 input frequency once per measurement cycle with 240 picosecond resolution The number of zero crossings between successive measurement intervals is also recorded When the measurement interval elapses the previous measurement timestamp is subtracted from the current one and the difference is divided by the number of zero crossings between the two timestamps The result is the average period of the e
212. he Guest password at installation If you try to use a function that is not accessible from the guest login you will see a message such as Access denied or Command canceled 38 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Logging Out You can log out using any of the following commands logout logoff exit quit Changing Username and Password To change the user name and password use the following commands F100 P Change User Password on page 134 F100 PN Change User Name on page 135 To reset a lost or forgotten operator username password use F100 P and F100 PN commands from the command line interface on the serial port Session Time out and Priority The XLi s system firmware closes inactive command line sessions on the network port after 15 minutes The XLi does not terminate inactive command line sessions on the serial port The user can open a network port session and a serial ports session concurrently provided the other session is inactive i e not actively performing a function such as F8 Continuous Time Once per Second The XLi does not allow two or more concurrent network port sessions A network port session can be active while an inactive serial port session is open However if the serial port session receives user input at this point it takes control away from the network port and does not yield control to the network port again The network port will show a p
213. he Have Quick interface requirements 218 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM 87 8016 6 The Have Quick Out card generates Have Quick time code on four rear panel BNC connectors Use F128 to view the status of the Have Quick Out Option card See F128 Have Quick Output Configuration on page 165 Have Quick Output Specifications Frame rate 1 Hz Accuracy 1 uS Stability Stability is determined by the XLi s oscillator specifications Level 5V CMOS Logic Qty 4 Have Quick Signal Characteristics The Have Quick Out signal employs bi phase Manchester II transmission at approximately 1667 bits per second A logical one is defined as 300 microseconds of a low state followed by 300 microseconds of a high state A transmission of 240 milliseconds of logic ones 400 bits precedes the start of message indicator 16 bits followed by time day of year year and TFOM message 96 bits The transmission is initiated on a time mark so that the first bit of the 400 ones starts within 1 microsecond of the leading on time edge of the system 1PPS The start of message indicator that follows the ones verifies that the time day of year year and TFOM message will follow Each 8 bit character in the data message time of day day of year year and TFOM is defined by a modified 8 4 Hamming Code The two start of message characters 8 bits each are not in the mod
214. he Time Threshold is set to any value other than zero the value that has been selected is then applied to every reference source For example if the Time Threshold is set to 200 nS all refer ence sources will alarm when they exceed 200 nS XLi Time amp Frequency System 93 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F73 Alarm Control Status Use function F73 to do the following e See the state of an indicator Locked Unlocked or OK Fault Enable or disable the alarm for each indicator e See the state of the Alarm Latch for each indicator and clear the Alarm Latch for all indicators Enable or disable blinking of the Alarm Status LED on the front panel while it is green or amber e Set the values for Time Threshold Timeout Delay and Power On Alarm Suppress The following table summarizes F73 s alarm indicators and parameters as well as the factory settings for an XLi without options The factory settings vary depending on the options included at the XLi at the time it ships from the factory For example for an XLi with an optional GPS receiver the GPS Primary Receiver indicator setting would be Alarm Enabled Upate the alarm settings when adding or removing option cards from the XLi Indicator Parameter Name Status Factory Setting for XLi without option cards Clock Status Locked Unlocked Always Enabled PLL Locked Locked Unlocked Alarm Enabled Low Phase Noise LPN PLL Locked Locked Unlocked Alarm Enabled GPS Prim
215. he period of repetition When specifying repetitive rates the Start Time must include the same number of significant digits as the Stop Time or an ambiguous output may occur Any time the clock reads a new time that matches the specified least significant digits a pulse either starts or stops For example the following string produces a one second pulse at midnight on every day of the year with a 1 in the least significant digit F111 PPO XX1 00 00 00 000000 XX1 00 00 01 000000 lt CR gt Clock Reading Pulse 001 00 00 00 000000 Start 001 00 00 00 000001 No Change 001 00 00 01 000000 Stop 001 01 00 00 000000 No Change 001 00 00 00 000000 Start etc For example to produce a repetitive 5 microsecond pulse occurring every 10 microseconds i e repetitive pulses with 100 kHz frequency with the start time or rising edge on time and the stop time or falling edge at 5 uS or 10 uS pulse period with 5 uS pulse width enter F111 PPO XXX XX XX XX XXXXX0 XXX XX XX XX XXXXX5 CR The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Or for example to produce a repetitive 50 microsecond pulse occurring every 100 microseconds i e repetitive pulses with 10 kHz frequency with the start time or rising edge at 5 uS and the stop time or falling edge at 55 uS or 100 uS pulse period with 50 uS pulse width enter F111 PPO XXX XX XX XX XXXX05 XXX XX XX XX XXXX55 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Or for example to produce a repetitive
216. his is not an alarm on or off but whether the alarm LED will blink or not Also the Rb Oscillator Alarm Enabled setting is available even if a Rubidium oscillator is not present To change the Alarm Enabled setting for each indicator enter to E Enable D Disable or Unchanged using this format F73 lt S gt MASK lt SEP gt lt 12345678 9ABCDEFGHIJ gt lt CR gt For example to enter new mask settings enter F73 MASK DDE EEEEEEEEEEDDDDD XLi replies OK To verify the changes enter XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 105 F73 MASK XLi replies F73 MASK DDE EEEEEEEEEEDDDDD To view the Time Threshold setting enter F73 lt S gt THRESHOLD lt CR gt XLi replies F73 lt S gt THRESHOLD lt S gt lt nanoseconds gt lt S gt ns lt CR gt lt LF gt where lt nanoseconds gt is the time error threshold in nS To set a new Time Threshold enter a new value for lt nanoseconds gt Range 0 to 99 999 nS as follows F73 lt S gt THRESHOLD lt SEP gt lt nanoseconds gt lt CR gt XLi replies OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To view Timeout Delay enter F73 lt S gt TIMEOUT lt CR gt XLi replies F73 lt S gt TIMEOUT lt SEP gt lt seconds gt lt S gt s lt CR gt lt LF gt To enter a new Time Delay enter a value for lt seconds gt Range 0 to 86 400 nS as follows F73 lt S gt TIMEOUT lt SEP gt lt seconds gt lt CR gt XLi replies OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To enable LED Blink enter F73
217. his object the user clears all latched faults Reading the configDataLatchClear object has no effect and its value is not defined The systemFaultConfigMasks group contains masks for each possible system alarm event When the status changes for example if the primary GPS becomes unlocked the associated mask is checked Only if the mask is enabled will a system alarm be generated The systemFaultHistory group contains latched status indicators for each of the system alarm events If a system alarm event goes into fault status even if this status is transient then the associated entry in the systemFaultHistory group will maintain a record of that fault occurrence until the latch is cleared using the configDataLatchClear object resetting all systemFaultHistory entries The XLi System Status Group xliSystem 1 systemFault 1 systemStatus 2 systemStatusGeneral 1 systemStatusDetail 2 statusPllSynthesizer statusLpnPIl statusPrimaryRefClk statusSecondaryRefClk statuslrig statusAuxRef statusPrimaryPower statusSecondaryPower statusRbOsc statusDac statusFirstTimeLock status TimeError status Timeout statusNt E p statusClock statusClockSource statusDescriptorStr lI WN S gt OONDOAHRWN Il pans CUT MD V TANE The XLI systemStatus group is used to provide a current operational view of the system The systemStatusGeneralGroup gives
218. hold Status OK or Fault Time Threshold sets a limit measured in nanoseconds for the XLi clock s accumulated time error While the accumulated time error remains below the Time Threshold limit the Time Error indicator reports OK If the accumulated time error exceeds the Time Threshold limit the Time Error indicator reports fault Typically the XLi doesn t experience Time Error faults while locked to a reference source and steering its oscillator When XLi comes unlocked from its reference source s the system clock uses the internal oscillator to keep time It also starts calculating an estimate of the worst case time error from the last reference The length of time before this condition triggers a Time Error fault depends on the Time Threshold setting and type of internal oscillator as well the DAC setting and the estimated worst case time error at the time the reference source became unavailable The accumulated time error typically remains below the default values for the given reference source but may exceed the Time Threshold for brief periods of time These excursions are usually non critical and can be ignored For this reason it is good practice to set the Time Threshold at the maximum time error value that can be tolerated for each application The Timeout indicator and Timeout Delay setting can be used to suppress alarms that are caused by excursions while still allowing more significant Time Error to trigger an alarm
219. ifications 1 MHz or MPPS Output Sine Amplitude Sine Harmonic Distortion Square Wave Synchronization Connector CPU Aware 5 MHz or MPPS Output Sine Amplitude Sine Harmonic Distortion Square Wave Synchronization Connector CPU Aware 10 MHz or MPPS Output Sine Amplitude Sine Harmonic Distortion Square Wave Synchronization Connector CPU Aware 178 1 VRMS into 50 Q 30 dBc TTL into 50 Q Phase locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Female BNC No 1 VRMS into 50 Q 30 dBc TTL into 50 Q Phase locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Female BNC No 1 VRMS into 50 Q 30 dBc TTL into 50 Q Phase locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Female BNC No XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Figure 9 JP1 through JP4 left determine the output type for connectors J1 through J4 right n LITT ni qi mi n K HH LT In 6 HZ NER EE 16 MHZ MA NER SPE Em NER en e 1 MPPS ER NER CPPS NER 14 MPPS ER NER 4 MHZ NER EE 5 MHZ mmm mm le MHZ MA NER umm a JA JS J3A J2 _m mmm EOS 14 ol al i P O rim na LE Figure 10 To select an output type place a jumper across the appropriate set of pins XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H A JP r 1 MPPS HN 5 MPPS E 10 MPPS m 1 MHZ MN 5 MHZ MH 10 MHZ NEM SPCL HEN Ll 1
220. ified Hamming Code Refer to ICD GPS 060 Rev A section 4 4 5 for the Have Quick interface requirements HaveQuick with selectable TFOM The Have Quick output option currently meets ICD GPS 060 Rev A It will be modified to provide HaveQuick with Time Figure of Merit TFOM per the standard or without TFOM Selection is via the Keypad Display RS232 422 and the Network port via telnet and HTML HaveQuick with TFOM Output Signal characteristics The Have Quick signal employs biphase Manchester Il transmission at approximately 1667 bits per second A logical one is defined as 300 microseconds of a low state followed by 300 microseconds of a high state A transmission of 240 milliseconds of logic ones 400 bits precedes the start of message indicator 16 bits followed by time day of year year and TFOM message 96 bits XLi Time amp Frequency System 219 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The transmission is initiated on a time mark so that the first bit of the 400 ones starts within 10 microseconds of the leading edge of the 1PPS The start of message indicator that follows the ones verifies that the time day of year year and TFOM message will follow Each 8 bit character in the data message time of day day of year year and TFOM is defined by a modified 8 4 Hamming Code The two start of message characters 8 bits each are not in the modified Hamming Code The modified Hamming code employs 4 parity bits and 4
221. ified view of the XLi s clock architecture enm MHz Osc a eres Messanam Aux Rer aus Ref 1 5 10 ve 1PPSA T 1 PPSB 1 PPS Timing e Phase Compare Eem b b A Time and Clock Recovery A Code Input gt gt Code Input Figure 1 Functional Timing Block Diagram XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Y Clock DPLL Y DAC Select lt lt Y i P DAC T P 10 MHz Osc 1 T P 200 MHz PLL Y i 4 Y Code Generation E Rate Generation 1 PPS Output Rate Output Code Output J Display Keypad Oscillator Display Keypad Interface j 10 MHz Power Vc uo Y Y Backplane Interface A A Power 1 0 Power 1 0 Power Supply Power Supply AC 5 V 12 V DC 5 V 12 V Option Tap SRL 9 18 VDC 110 220 AC 18 36 VDC User I O User I O 36 72 VDC Figure 2 Interface Architecture Block Diagram 4 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 2 System Specifications Mechanical Environmental Operating Temperature Maximum Rate of Change Storage Temperature Humidity Operating Altitude Front Panel Display Keypad Serial I O AC Power Supply Input Input connector Input voltage range Input freq range Output Wattage Power Supply Status
222. ile cannot be copied to the destination file Recovery Action Check file location and directory names to verify the path is accurate then re enter the command ERROR Configuration failed Your attempt to configure new parameters was unsuccessful Recovery Action Verify parameter values then re enter the command ERROR Configuration type is not specified You did not specify the file type Recovery Action Re enter the command specifying SNMP and or NTP 232 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Informational Messages Messages in this section inform you of an event and do not require any action on your part Deleted previously set IP host address Your last action deleted the previously set IP host address NOTICE Cannot respond to command because Utility Port session has priority A Utility Port session has started and takes precedence Wait until it is over before logging in or expecting a response to an entered Telnet command Host NAME ip ADDRESS configured successfully Host configuration was successful Source file NAME bytes read NUMBER Source file was successfully read Dest file NAME bytes written NUMBER Configuration files transferred successfully Information was successfully transferred to the destination file Restarting the Unit Please wait A command has just been executed that requires a soft restart of the XLi The restart happens immediatel
223. indicator field set to ntpSysLeap ntp 6 SYNTAX INTEGER 0 3 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is a status code indicating normal operation a leap second to be inserted in the last minute of the deprecated day a leap second to be deleted in the last second of the day or an alarm condition indicating the loss of timing synchronization Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its leap indicator field set to ntpSysLeap a onBeps Gl SYNTAX INTEGER 0 7 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The value of this variable indicates the mode that the host is operating in Note this is the value of the time server s outgoing NTP packet mode field ntp 8 SYNTAX INTEGER 1 255 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an integer that ranges from 1 to 255 indicating the stratum level of the local clock Note a primary time server sets outgoing NTP packets stratum field and ntpSysStratum to 1 ntp 9 I SYNTAX INTEGER 6 10 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION When the time server is in NTP broadcast mode this is an integer indicating the maximum interval between successive NTP messages in Seconds to the nearest power of two For example a value of 6 means 2 6 or 64 seconds Note a p
224. install the optional Expansion Module 1 Set the unit up on a clean safe stable work surface that provides good visibility and maneuverabil ity to work with screwdriver 2 On the back panel select an option bay and unscrew the retaining screws and remove the small aluminum panel from the bay 3 Line up the edges of the module with the guide grooves in the option bay and slide it in 4 When the card is in almost all the way push it firmly the rest of the way in until the faceplate of the option card is flush with the back panel 5 Insert and tighten the retaining screws so the expansion module is secured in place To remove the expansion module remove the screws pull the card out and secure the small aluminum panel in its place with the screws Verifying Antenna Installation After completing the above steps use the keypad display to verify the following e In F119 GPS Receiver Configuration page 154 after approximately 20 minutes of operation check that GPS STATUS is LOCKED and GPS ANTENNA is OK In F73 Alarm Control Status page 94 check that the GPS PRI is OK and is ALARM ENABLED the same for GPS SEC if two GPS receivers are present Clear any alarm latches if present Press the STATUS key LOCKED GPS PRI should appear on the front panel display without an asterisk f an asterisk appears it means that a reference source is not available To troubleshoot a problematic Antenna installati
225. isplay and Standard network port Interface RS 232 or RS 422 Data Rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps Data Bits 7 or 8 Parity even odd or none Stop Bits 10r2 Connector Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 6 Rx RS 422 7 Rx RS 422 8 Tx RS 422 9 Tx RS 422 Factory settings 9600 8 N 1 Note Parity NONE is only available valid when Data Bits is set to 8 See F4 Serial Port Configuration on page 52 NET Network Port The Ethernet port interface has a standard RJ 45 connector that provides IEEE 802 3 frame 10 100 Base T Ethernet The XLi can optionally be factory configured as a Network Time Protocol NTP server which can be used to synchronize client computer clocks over a network This function is only available with GPS and IRIG B input See F100 Network Port Configuration XLi Firmware on page 117 8 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H J1 Input Time Code or Time Interval Event Time Time Code Input Specifications Modulated AM and Demodulated DC Format IRIG B120 B000 B120 1344 B000 1344 IRIG A130 A000 NASA 36 Amplitude AM 0 5 Vp p to 10 Vp p 100 kO to ground Ratio AM 3 1 10 Amplitude DC Logic Low 1 25V and Min 300mV Logic Hi gt 1 25V and Max 10V Impedance 100 KQ 50 Q Polarity Positive or negative Direction Forward Quantity 1 Connector Female BNC Relate
226. iver LLA XYZ Position Use function F50 to display the current GPS position Specifically Use function F50 to Display the option bay location of the GPS receiver s If multiple GPS receivers are available use the UP DOWN ARROW keys to select a receiver e Select the positional coordinate system Latitude Longitude Altitude LLA or XYZ Earth Centered Earth Fixed XYZ coordinates e IfLLA is selected Altitude Mode shows the elevation in given meters Command Line Use the following format to display the current settings display the current position for the GPS receiver in LLA coordinates F50 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt LLA lt CR gt XLi responds with the coordinate information in the following format F50 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SIGN gt lt S gt lt DEG gt d lt MIN gt lt SEC gt lt S gt lt SIGN gt lt S gt lt DEG gt d lt MIN gt lt SEC gt lt S gt lt ALT gt lt UNITS gt lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 75 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where ES 0 S lt N gt S LLA C S DI M S lt A lt UNITS gt lt L EP gt R gt IGN gt EG gt IN gt EC gt LT gt F gt Function 50 ASCII space character one or more ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows Option Bay Number 1 through 10 Separator LLA mode carriage return character N or S for latitude E or W for longitude for
227. ked satellites enter F60 B1 CURRENT lt CR gt Or F60 B1 TRACKED lt CR gt XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H od current od current 159dBW 162dBW 163dBW 161dBW 159dBW 164dBW 156dBW 83 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode Use function F66 to enable or disable Daylight Saving Time DST and to schedule when Local time enters and leaves DST The factory setting for F66 is Manual i e DST On The hour for entering leaving DST is given in the 24 hour format Entering leaving DST can be scheduled for any hour of the day any day of the year However transitions scheduled within 24 hours of the beginning end of the year may not occur at the desired time This function also works for locations in the southern hemisphere where the DST period span the New Year Command Line To display the current status of F66 enter a command using the following format F66 lt CR gt XLi responds using the following format F66 lt S gt lt STATE gt lt ENTER EXIT gt lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 66 function number S ASCII space character one or more STATE OfforManual lt ENTER EXIT gt If lt STATE gt is Manual lt ENTER EXIT gt are the dates it enters and exits DST CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example to disable DST enter F66 Off lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR
228. keys used by the NTP server the NTP client must have the identical line in its version of the file You ll want to use your own hard to guess key names using random letters The critical lines of the ntp keys file are M truetime M TEXIA where 1 and 2 are the key identifiers M specifies MD5 authentication the only type available truetime and TTXII are the arbitrarily chosen keys 284 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The first column is the key identification number which may range in whole positive numbers from 1 to 65 535 The second column is the type of key which is always set to the letter M when using MD5 authentication The third column is the private key that is ASCII text from 1 to 32 characters in length Up to eight MD5 can be established Editing MD5 keys on the NTP Client For NTP client authentication the line trustedkey 1 2 in the ntp conf file is required to enable the private keys 1 and 2 from the ntp keys file The line bclient is required for broadcast time packets to be processed by the NTP client In this case sample information from a client ntp conf file might look like trustedkey 1 2 bclient Network Time Protocol NTP does not permit comments in the ntp keys files Inserting comments will prevent the ntp keys files from being parsed correctly and turns off authentication at initialization Sample information in a client ntp
229. l maskSecondaryPower OBJECT TYP SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION IRIG lock auxiliary primary power secondary power If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 8 maskRbOsc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th oscillator status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 9 maskDac OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th converter status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 10 E maskFirstTimeLock OBJECT TYP SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current XLi Time 8 Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H rubidium digital to audio 263 DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when the locking status of the clock since power on changes systemFaultConfigMasks 11 maskTimeError OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when the tim rror threshold is reached systemFaultConfigMasks 12 maskTimeout OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be trigg
230. l page 107 determine if and how switching takes place If no other time reference is available the XLi will use an Aux Ref frequency input on J3 F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas page 146 as its reference If references are available the XLi freewheels on its internal oscillator Command Line To display the current settings enter F74 lt CR gt XLi responds using the following format F74 lt S gt lt CLK SOURCE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where E 74 S CLK SOURCE CR LE For example enter F74 lt CR gt ASCII character F function number Space Clock Source PRI SEC PRI SEC SEC PRI SEC PRI PRI NSEC PRI carriage return character line feed character XLi responds example F74 PRI lt CR gt lt LF gt To select PRI SEC SEC as the new clock source fail over pattern enter F74 PRI SEC SEC lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt 108 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F77 PTTI Output Configuration The Precision Time and Time Interval PTTI with BCD PPS PPM Output option board status can be determined via the Serial or Network port using Function F77 Use Serial Network Function F77 to obtain information about the part number and the current version of the FPGA installed on the PTTI with BCD PPS PPM option board To obtain board status information send the following string to the Serial N
231. layer ntp 3 ntpAuthFail OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION El ntpInErrors ntp 4 ntpDesiredAcc OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION The desired worst case time tpSysLeap ntp 5 ntpEstErr OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 2147483647 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Total number of authentication failures This is a subset of accuracy in microseconds that the time server will attempt to steer to This variable is related to ntpEstError If ntpEstError is greater than ntpDesiredAcc the NTP alarm condition is set ntpSysLeap will be equal to 3 N n ote Outgoing NTP packets will have their leap indicator field set to The time server s current estimated time error in microseconds This variable is related to ntpEstError Usually this value is small and constant for a given type of time server However when primary synchronization is lost this value slowly increases over time as the time server s oscillator flywheels away from true time If ntpEstError exceeds ntpDesiredAcc the NTP alarm condition is set ntpSysLeap will be equal to 3 Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packets will have its leap indicator field set to ntpSysLeap
232. lays for the following cable types are e RG 58 approximately 1 4 ns foot RG 59 approximately 1 24 ns foot Command Line To display the current distribution cable delay enter F52 lt CR gt The XLi responds using the following format F52 lt SEP gt lt SIGN gt lt DELAY gt ns lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F f or F for input string 52 the function number lt S gt one or more space characters SIGN either or lt D gt 1 to 6 digit delay from 999999 nS to 999999 nS ns nanoseconds ns or NS for input string lt CR gt carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example to display the current distribution cable delay enter F52 lt CR gt XLi responds F52 000000ns lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the distribution cable delay to 60 nS enter F52 000060nS lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 79 F53 GPS Operation Mode Use function F53 to set the operation mode for all receiver types except the 86 8013 which doesn t have modes If the 86 8013 is the only receiver available F53 reports GPS Availability Not Available The GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 has two modes e Select Dynamic Mode if the position of the receiver is subject to frequent change or if it is in continuous motion For example use Dynamic Mode when the XLi is used in mobile vehi
233. led Enabled or Disabled Timeout Disabled OK or Fault Timeout Delay 300 sec Range 0 to 86 400 sec Power On Alarm Suppress 300 sec Range 0 to 86 400 sec NTP Fault Disabled A OK or Fault Clear Alarm Latch No Yes or No Note A This indicator is enabled when the XLi is purchased with the corresponding option Enable this indicator if performing a field installation of the corresponding option B Enable this indicator when configuring the XLi with the corresponding reference source C Enable this indicator for troubleshooting purposes Clock Status Status Locked or Unlocked The Clock Status indicator reports Locked when the XLi clock is locked to a reference source e g GPS IRIG AUX REF etc This is the normal operational state of the clock While locked the XLi clock steers its internal oscillator to the reference source The Clock Status indicator reports Unlocked when the XLi clock is not locked to a reference source This may be because the reference source is unlocked or unstable While unlocked from a reference source the XLi uses its internal oscillator to keep time until a reference becomes available again Note There are two uses of the word unlocked here one refers to the XLi system clock when it doesn t have a reference source the other refers to the reference source e g GPS IRIG when it doesn t have a valid signal The XLi can provide stable and accurate time while the Clock Status i
234. leshooting techniques and adjustment procedures Equipment Required The following test equipment is required for troubleshooting and adjustments e Oscilloscope 100 MHz bandwidth e Frequency Counter 10 MHz 1 Hz e AC Voltmeter e Spectrum Analyzer Phillips Head Screwdriver e Small Slot Hear Screwdriver e Small Non metallic Coil Adjustment Screwdriver Symptoms of a malfunction fall into three broad categories No Output or Outputs e Noisy Outputs Incorrect Frequencies 180 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The possible causes for these symptoms are discussed by the following sections No Output Or Outputs Before assuming a clock malfunction first check that the instrument using the output is functioning properly Verify that all connectors are secure and coax cables are good If at least one output is functioning the problem may be a bad option assembly If all outputs have failed the problem may be a bad option assembly a bad Backplane Bus Assembly a bad Processor Assembly or bad connections between these assemblies Noisy Outputs If the outputs are noisy or intermittent the problem may be a bad option assembly a bad Processor Assembly a bad backplane Bus Assembly or bad connections between these assemblies Incorrect Frequencies If the frequency is out of specification the system clock may have lost lock with the reference source i e GPS satellite signal for a
235. lt CR gt lt LF gt 52 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 04 function number lt S gt ASCII space character one or more lt SEP gt One or more separator characters either space comma or tab lt RS gt Interface type RS 232 or RS 422 lt BR gt Baud Rate with possible values 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 DB Data Bits with possible values 7 or 8 lt P gt Parity with possible values even or odd or none SB Stop Bits with possible values 1 or 2 CR Carriage return character lt LF gt Line feed character Note Parity NONE is only available valid when Data Bits is set to 8 Note Setting the serial port to RS 422 requires an RS 422 adaptor installed or the XLi will halt For example to display the serial port settings send F4 lt CR gt The XLi responds F4 232 9600 8 none 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the serial port settings send F4 422 9600 7 even 1 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt F5 Time Quality Setup Use function F5 to enable disable reporting and to set the thresholds of the four time quality flags How time quality reporting works in the XLi When a reference source becomes unavailable the XLi uses its own oscillator to keep track of time Without the reference source the XLi can no longer adjust or steer the oscillator to remain synchronized with the referen
236. ltMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th changes systemFaultConfigMasks 2 E maskPrimaryRefClk OBJECT TYP SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th lock status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 3 El maskSecondaryRefClk OBJECT TYP SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION PLL LPN PLL status primary reference clock If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th clock lock status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 4 masklrig OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current 262 secondary reference XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H iw ESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 5 maskAuxRef OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th reference clock lock status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 6 Gl maskPrimaryPower OBJECT TYP SYNTAX FaultMaskType MAX ACCESS read write STATUS current DESCRIPTION If enabled an alarm can be triggered when th status changes systemFaultConfigMasks 7 G
237. me amp Frequency System 81 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H e Bad the GPS satellite is transmitting information that it has been removed from service e Rejected the XLi GPS receiver s TRAIM feature has detected anomalous signals from this satellite and has quarantined it from the timing solution for 12 hours GPS satellite signal strengths are reported in units of dBW Signals below 170 dBW e g 171 dBW are not usable by the GPS receiver See GPS Signal Strength Requirements on page 21 If multiple GPS receivers are installed in the XLi F60 identifies the GPS receiver by the option bay number in which it is located For a diagram of option bay numbers see F118 Option Board Configuration on page 152 If you re using the keypad display interface use the UP DOWN ARROWS to scroll through the list of satellites Command Line Use Serial Function F60 to request a list of all current and tracked satellites To display the list enter a string using the following format F60 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt lt TYPE gt lt CR gt XLi responds with approximately 32 lines that use the following format F60 lt S gt B lt N gt lt S gt prn lt NN gt lt S gt lt STATE gt tracked current lt LEVEL gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F60 ASCII string indicating function F60 S ASCII space character one or more B ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Optio
238. me out Delay controls how long the LED remains amber e The blinking of the LED has no meaning It is a user preference that can be enabled or disabled using the F73 s LED Blink setting If enabled the LED blinks when it is green and yellow but stays unblinking when it is red If disabled the LED doesn t blink Keypad Display Interface Time Display Press the TIME button on the keypad to display the time only Use the TIME button to exit the STATUS MENU or function displays The default time format is DDD HH MM SS For example 00 21 24 09 Where DDD Day of year HH Hours MM Minutes SS Seconds Time Display related functions e Select between the 12 or 24 hour format displayed F2 12 24 Hour Format on page 49 e Select between Local Standard UTC and GPS time F69 Time Mode on page 89 Time related functions F1 Time Zone Offset on page 48 F3 Time amp Date on page 50 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode on page 84 34 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Status Display The Status Display comes up automatically when the XLi is rebooted To manually switch from another display to the Status Display press STATUS button on the keypad The display appears with the following format STATUS lt gt REF CLK gt TYPE DDD HH MM SS YYYY For example LOCKED GPS PRI UTC 20
239. mp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Output Signal Frequency Selection Output 1 Output2 Output 3 Output 4 Jumper Block JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 64 Kb s Pos 6 Pos 6 Pos 6 Pos 6 8 Kb s Pos 5 Pos 5 Pos 5 Pos 5 1544 Kb s Pos 4 Pos 4 Pos 4 Pos 4 1 Mb s Pos 3 Pos 3 Pos 3 Pos 3 5 Mb s Pos 2 Pos 2 Pos 2 Pos 2 10 Mb s Pos 1 Pos 1 Pos 1 Pos 1 This is the factory setting For Output 1 a factory configured option Composite Clock is available Contact H Sales and Customer Assistance page 295 for more information Installation Disconnect power from the XLi Remove a blank panel from the rear of the XLi chassis by unscrewing the two screws securing it Insert the edges of the T1 card into the grooves of the guide rails in the empty option slot Firmly push the T1 card into the option slot so the connector on the back of the card engages the backplane connector completely and the front of the card is flush with the adjacent surfaces on the back of the XLi Secure the T1 card using the previously removed screws Operation No special operation procedures are required However configuration of the Major and Minor faults using F73 affect the operation of this option when AIS and Output signal control is enabled via DIP switch S1 position 8 Note Alarm Relay closures are silk screened on the panel above the wire wrap pins These silk screen legends indicate the non energized state of the relay closures
240. ms com zip warftpd1 zip the FTP places the configuration files in C TrueTime the default or home directory of anonymous Note Follow these guidelines when editing the configuration files If the editor displays odd box characters or the lines of text don t wrap properly close the file without saving changes and switch to a different text editor Don t rename or save the configuration files as a new file type Some text editors encode end of line carriage returns that cause errors when XLi refers to the file Notepad WordPad Microsoft Word and Vim don t seem to have this problem The configuration files are automatically transferred to from the FTP server in binary format They retain the DOS or UNIX file conventions of the editor XLi works with either format Move the Configuration Files Back to the XLi Reboot Warning The following steps cause the XLi to reboot Using the XLi s command line enter one of the commands below replacing IP Address with the IP address of your workstation FTP server To move the NTP config files type gt 100 config ntp set host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt To move the SNMP config file type gt 100 config snmp set host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt To move the NTP and SNMP config files type gt 100 config ntp snmp set host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt Here s an example of a successful SNMP and NTP config file transfer gt gt f100 config s
241. n Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 9 Software Options Symmetricom TimeMonitor Software Symmetricom offers the TimeMonitor Analyzer software with additional modules including the TimeMonitor XLi Measurement Software The primary function of TimeMonitor XLi Measurement Software is to log Time Interval Event Time TIET and Frequency Measurement Freq Meas data from the XLi That data can then be imported to the TimeMonitor Analyzer for further analysis TimeMonitor is a cost effective tool for bringing together synchronization measurement data from a variety of sources and performing a wider range of analysis functions Its key features are e Multiple Signal Capability e Extensive and Flexible Analysis e Runs on Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista e Perform Extensive Analysis on Collected Data with the Companion Software TimeMonitor Analyzer Note TimeMonitor XLi Measurement Software is designed for use with the Freq Meas and or TIET soft ware options enabled on the XLi Note TIET and Freq Meas options to be ordered separately Logging TIET and Freq Meas Data 1 Set up a serial or network port connection between the PC and the XLi If needed use the XLi s F4 Serial Port Configuration or F100 Network Port Configuration If needed use the RS 232 or TCP IP buttons to configure TimeMonitor XLi Measurement 2 In TimeMonitor XLi Measurement check that the settings for Setup match the inputs to the XLi see Figure 19 f nee
242. n Bay Number 1 through 10 SEP One or more separator characters either space comma or tab TYPE ALL CURRENT or TRACKED CR Carriage return character prn Pseudo Random Number NN 1 through 32 prn lt NN gt identifies specific GPS satellites STATE Good Bad or Unknown tracked Either tracked or blank current Either current or blank LEVEL Satellite signal strength in dBW lt LF gt Line feed character For example to display the complete GPS satellite list enter 82 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F60 B1 ALL lt CR gt XLi responds F60 B1 prnl good current F60 B1 prn2 good current F60 B1 prn3 good current F60 B1 prn4 unknown F60 B1 prn5 unknown F60 B1 prn6 unknown F60 B1 prn7 unknown F60 B1 prn8 good current F60 B1 prn9 unknown F60 Bl prn10 unknown F60 Bl prnll unknown F60 Bl prn12 unknown F60 B1 prn13 good current F60 Bl prnl4 unknown F60 Bl prn15 unknown F60 Bl prnl6 unknown F60 Bl prn17 unknown F60 Bl prn18 unknown F60 Bl prn19 unknown F60 Bl prn20 unknown F60 Bl prn21 unknown F60 Bl prn22 g F60 B1 prn23 unknown F60 Bl prn24 unknown F60 B1 prn25 unknown F60 B1 prn26 unknown F60 Bl prn27 g ao o HD O o id OQ m m aJ m Jo n p Ol oS F60 B1 prn28 unknown F60 B1 prn29 unknown F60 B1 prn30 unknown F60 B1 prn31 unknown F60 B1 prn32 unknown Similarly to display a list of the current or trac
243. n can be added to the XLi in a Plug and Play manner and operates without hardware or software configuration The PLL status of all three Low Phase Noise option cards is given by the F73 Low Phase Noise PLL indicator See F73 Alarm Control Status page 94 Specifications This option provides four 10 MHz frequency output signals Signal Type Analog sine wave Synchronization Phase locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Amplitude 13 dBm 1 dBm Output Impedance 500 Quantity 4 Connector Female BNC Harmonic distortion 30 dBc Spurious 90 dBc 10 Hz 10 kHz SSB Isolation 70 dBc Phase Noise 85 dBc Hz 1 Hz offset 115 dBc Hz 10 Hz offset 140 dBc Hz 100 Hz offset 145 dBc Hz 1 kHz offset 150 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset CPU Aware No 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output 86 8008 Introduction The 1 5 10 MHz MPPS card generates four stable frequency sine or square wave outputs through its four BNC connectors These outputs are phased locked to the XLi s disciplined internal oscillator or external frequency reference source See F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freg Meas on page 146 The card s output frequencies are set by manually configuring jumpers on the output card Once configured XLi Time amp Frequency System 177 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H they are automatically enabled upon power up No additional hardware or software configuration or set up is required Spec
244. nce Drift Rate 5 x 10 month High Performance Rubidium Oscillator Upgrade Frequency Timing Allan Deviation Stability 3x 10 1 sec 4 x 101 1K sec 1x 10 1 day Temp 3x10 over 0 C to 50 C when not locked to a reference Drift Rate 1 x 107 month 224 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 8 Power Supplies An optional DC power supply can be used in place of the standard AC power supply It can also be used in conjunction with an AC power supply for redundancy In that scenario the XLi uses the power supply with the highest voltage as the primary source of power and switches to the alternate power supply as needed The XLi s internal fault detector can monitor the three output voltages from the primary and the secondary power supplies With the Primary Power or Secondary Power indicators in F73 enabled a 10 decrease in any of the output voltages triggers an alarm See F73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 Warning Ensure that a disconnect device such as a switch with the appropriate voltage current rating is provided when operating installing the XL i Warning Prior to servicing the interior of a unit with dual power supplies remove both power cords Standard 110 VAC Power Supply Input Input connector IEC 320 connector Input voltage range UL 100 240 VAC Universal 90 264 VAC and 110 370 VDC Input freq range 47 Hz 440 Hz Wattage 104 watts Po
245. ncy is 60 Hz The default line frequency value remains the same from one power cycle to the next unless changed by the user Connect a line voltage must to the FTM Male CEE 22 input connector Refer to the input specifications for the acceptable voltage and frequency range before connecting to this input After the XLi has locked to its timing reference source and is in specification enter a value of zero 0 for Time Deviation Preset to remove the time deviation accumulated during synchronization to the XLi s timing reference source The FTM can be configured and monitored using the command line interface available from the XLi s serial and network ports or using the XLi front panel keypad 196 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H A transmit only Display port on the FTM card can drive multiple remote displays This RS 422 optionally RS 232C serial port broadcasts Time Deviation Frequency Deviation System Frequency Local Time and System Time to Symmetricom addressable displays capable of displaying 12 or more characters Configuration The following is a list of features that can be configured by the user Keypad indicates the parameter can be set from the XLi s front panel keypad using F27 Command Line indicates the parameter may be set from the XLi s serial or network port using F27 Parameter Selectable from Line Frequency Keypad Time Deviation Preset Keypad Command Line Display port RS
246. ndicator is Unlocked How long depends on a number of factors including the stability of the internal oscillator and the acceptable amount of time error for the application The Time Error indicator and the Time Threshold setting can be used to trigger an alarm when the time error exceeds customer defined limit To prevent the Clock Status indicator from coming unlocked apply the following recommendations e Configure the XLi with multiple reference sources For example two GPS receiver cards and or an Aux Ref input from a Cesium primary frequency reference Follow the standard procedures and guidelines for installing and configuring the reference sources such as for GPS antenna installation To investigate and solve a persistent Unlocked Clock Status indicator perform the following steps 96 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H e Investigate the reference sources Determine whether they are Locked or Unlocked and whether they are Primary Secondary or Standby For Aux Ref which doesn t have Primary Secondary setting check F113 For GPS check F119 For IRIG use F110 For Have Quick PPS use F123 For further guidance read the Function Reference section for each function in this User Guide Investigate F74 which determines how the XLi switches between Primary and Secondary reference sources For further guidance read the Function Reference section for F74 in this User G
247. negative altitude and lt S gt or for positive altitude two digit degrees for latitude or three digit degrees for longitude ASCII character d two digit minutes ASCII character two digit seconds 1 digit 10ths of seconds ASCII character altitude in meters unit of altitude m for meters line feed character For example to display the LLA coordinates of the antenna connected to card 2 enter F50 B2 LLA lt CR gt XLi responds F50 B2 N 38d23 51 3 W 122d42 53 2 58m lt CR gt lt LF gt To display the present antenna position using ECEF XYZ coordinates in meters use the following format F50 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt XYZ lt CR gt XLi responds using the following format F50B lt N gt lt S gt lt SIGN gt lt S gt lt MX gt m lt S gt lt SIGN gt lt S gt lt MY gt m lt S gt lt SIGN gt lt MZ gt m lt CR gt lt LF gt 76 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 50 function number S ASCII space character B ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 SIGN Either or for the position of the ECEF XYZ coordinates MX Antenna X position in meters to tenths of a meter MY Antenna Y position in meters to tenths of a meter MZ Antenna Z position in meters to tenths of a meter m ASCII character m for Meters ALT altitude in meters CR carria
248. ng code employs 4 parity bits and 4 data bits for each 8 bit character Refer to ICD GPS 060 Rev A section 4 4 5 for the Have Quick interface requirements Electrical characteristics Qty 4 Connector BNC female Physical Single high option bay 220 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Enhanced Low Phase Noise Module 87 8040 This option provides four Low Noise 10MHz frequency output signals with the capacity to install two cards into one XLi chassis The option is only available with the optional OCXO High Stab OCXO Rubidium and High Stability Rubidium oscillators Signal Type Synchronization Amplitude Qty Connector Physical CPU Aware Harmonic distortion Spurious Isolation Phase Noise XLi Time amp Frequency System Analog sine wave Frequency locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator 13 dBm 1 5 dBm into 50 Q four BNC female Double high option bay No 50 dBc 2nd Harmonic 80 dBc 60 dBc 98 dBc Hz 1 Hz offset 127 dBc Hz 10 Hz offset 145 dBc Hz 100 Hz offset 150 dBc Hz 1 kHz offset 153 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset 221 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Legacy Option Cards GPS Receiver 86 8013 Introduction The optional GPS Receiver card acts as a Stratum 0 timing reference source to the XLi It tracks up to 12 L1 GPS satellites decodes their signals for time and position and feeds this data to the XLi through the int
249. ng table indicates the section to go to for additional information Description Setting Function amp Cross Reference J1 Time Reference Change from STANDBY to SECONDARY F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET on page 137 Reference Source Change from PRI to PRI SEC SEC F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 IRIG alarm Change from DISABLED to ENABLED E73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 XLi with two optional GPS receivers In this hardware configuration the optional GPS receivers are set up as primary and secondary reference sources No changes required Description Setting Function amp Cross Reference GPS Time Reference Bay 1 PRIMARY F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 GPS Time Reference Bay 2 SECONDARY F119 GPS Receiver Configuration on page 154 Reference Source PRI SEC SEC F74 Clock Source Control on page 107 GPS PRI alarm ENABLED E73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 GPS SEC alarm ENABLED F73 Alarm Control Status on page 94 30 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Installing the Expansion Module Warning Installing and removing the expansion module can expose dangerous voltages that can cause electric shock resulting in injury or death Disconnect all power before installing or removing the option card Dangerous voltages may be present in the expansion module and in the unit even when the power is disconnected To
250. nging the user name password resetting the unit and pinging other network devices Warning The F100 commands have the capacity to remove the XLi from the network and disable the XLi s system firmware Use judiciously XLi Time amp Frequency System 117 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Reboot Warning Saving changes to any F100 parameter using the keypad display will reboot the XLi Some of the F100 command line commands also reboot the XLi These are identified in the following documentation Group 1 You can use both the keypad display and the command line interface to access the following parameters 118 Ethernet address XLi contains a unique Ethernet or Media Access Control MAC address comprised of a unique number assigned to the manufacturer and a unique number assigned to the unit This is factory set and cannot be changed IP Address Sets a static Internet Protocol IP address for the unit Subnet Mask Sets a valid subnet mask used in IP addressing Subnetting allows for the more efficient allocation of network addresses and management of network traffic Default Gateway The address of the router that handles packets addressed to IP devices outside the local area network 10 100 BASE T View network port setting 10 or Auto 100 Base T if available Remote Lockout Enables or disables TELNET access through the XLi s standard network port Enabling Remote Lockout limits users to the front panel keypad Serial
251. nnector P4 Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 2 N C 3 RS 232 Serial Output 4 Out 3 RS 422 Serial Output 6 Out 4 RS 422 Level Serial Output T Out 4 RS 422 Level Serial Output HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 The Have Quick 1PPS 87 8016 3 option card is a reference source input card for synchronizing the XLi It can be configured to use incoming Have Quick time code and 1 PPS pulse as follows e Synchronize major and minor time to the Have Quick incoming code Synchronize minor time to the 1PPS input e Synchronize major time to the Have Quick incoming code and minor time to the 1PPS input Use F123 to configure and view the status of the Have Quick 1PPS option card 1PPS Input Specifications Frequency 1Hz Accuracy 1 uS Stability 1x 10 1 sec 216 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 2 x 10 1000 sec 3 x 10 1 day High Level Logic Hi 1 25V 10V Low Level Logic Low lt 1 25V gt OV Synchronization edge Positive Impedance 1 kO to ground Qty 1 Connector BNC female Have Quick Input Specifications Accuracy 1 uS Stability 1x10 Q 1 sec 2 x 10 1000 sec 3 x 1010 1 day High Level Logic Hi gt 4 5V and Max 5 5V Low Level Logic Low lt 0 5V and Min OV Impedance 1kQ to ground Qty 1 Connector BNC female CPU Aware Yes Have Quick Signal Characteristics The Have
252. not been implemented for the XLi This MIB structure also provides a useful definition for the system object ID SNMP managers may use the system object ID to identify the class of object being accessed With this structure the system object ID is defined as Truetime products xli for the XLi product and Truetime products xxx for all subsequent products 272 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H XLi System Group The XLI system group contains the xliFault and the xliStatus groups These groups contain information describing the operation of the XLI system as a whole The xliFault group contains information concerning system faults that have occurred as well as configuration parameters for the generation of system alarms called traps in SNMP resulting from those faults The xliStatus provides two different views of the operational system The first is a general view specifying if the clock is operational The second is a detailed view containing the current status of each system component The xliFault and xliStatus groups are described below XLi Time amp Frequency System 273 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The XLi Fault Group xliSystem 1 systemFault 1 systemStatus 2 systemAlarmData 1 systemFaultConfig 2 systemFaultHistory 3 alarmDatalpAddr 1 alarmDataTimeStamp 2 alarmDataCode 3 alarmDataSt
253. nput AUX Rl o eae eda e xe uta ere Gaede 146 K EIE xe pns cetus SN S Vue Eas SAS Una ove Natur EN See 133 Keypad Examples xxt s tee EEEE ea didus sex Due 37 Operation testa a aur RU d t bete 36 Keypad Lock qase ek br as el ee RE Ree pa tcs 55 Keypad Display Interface o oooooooocoooooooooooo 34 L E Rt OEE S e bI ede o a a 125 Latitude Longitude and Altitude o o oooooooooooo 75 LED daet RE A ddp doe fo A ROT ee aes vef 33 Alarm StatuS risa ad aa is 33 LEA XYZ Positlon tri hada a e hi daa 75 LOCK Keypad tota a A TERA QM NN Wadi HE T MUS 55 LOCKIUNLOCK ia IA 124 E A UN ds Lor E S c idet 38 41 Logging DUE us ae scie da ote Dn TER a oto nu a x c t eoe T Ga DEAD 42 Logging out us odo Pas Berea ca Peter NS ra 39 Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Output 0 0 0 cc eee ees 177 Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Output 0 0 0 0 cece ees 177 Low Phase Noise 5MHZ Output 0 0 0 0 cece cee 176 M Manual Leap Second Entry 0 c cece eee eee nes 16 86 Materials Needed xa a a RS RU E 278 6 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H MDS sc dar vt 284 Measure Frequency Input 0 0 0 cece eee eens 146 Menu DISDIBV 5 em nm Se a ede nate eeu d ads 35 Messages Informallohal 4 dU AA Be Oa pS 233 ALi Generated ure ve IA A Re he S 231 MIB SIFBOLUEIB o acota huge aane qur i pa E PUE DUE c Apu c od ae asas Sac at 271 Mounting the GP
254. nt Title GPS ame Status LOCKED Me RA Date 0370772006 ga o NE UG Stop ma s Came r4 Gh Je ohm Time 01 07 19 160 C SMH C 50 50 Load Mode urC 165 10MHz 100 o 170 L en Latitude N 38430 37 0 175 9 232 P F s 180 l Exit Longitude fw 122047431 PRN FR B ft fa a fs ay OT Measurement Comns Altitude n Time Int C AS 232 gue uj F Current fi Acquiring E Tracked E Unhealthy c d e Frequer eT Please consult the Symmetricom TimeMonitor documentation or online help for additional information XLi Time amp Frequency System 229 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H This page intentionally left blank 230 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 10 XLi Generated Messages Error Messages ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE You entered a command using the correct format that contained a value probably numeric that was outside the range of acceptable values Recovery Action Re enter the command using an acceptable value ERROR 02 SYNTAX You entered a valid command but using the wrong format Recovery Action Re enter the command using the correct format ERROR 03 BAD MISSING FIELD You entered a command that lacks a required field Recovery Action Re enter the command using the required fields ERROR 04 BAD DATA TIMEOUT CONDITION The XLi option card did not respond to the XLi soon enough Recovery Action Re enter the command u
255. nting the current values 62 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F27 FTM III Configuration Use F27 to manage the Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 option card page 192 Keypad The UP ARROW DOWN ARROW keys are used to scroll between the selections and the ENTER key is used to access the currently displayed selection numeric keys are placed in brackets for clarity After accessing a particular selection information can be entered by scrolling to a desired value via UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys or by directly entering the desired value The specific data entry method is dependent upon the particular selection Pressing the TIME or STATUS keys aborts the keypad function without affecting the current entry value Operation of Keypad F27 is detailed in the following paragraphs Press ENTER 2 7 to access the FTM The front panel 2 line VFD displays the following title FTM Availability OPTION BAY lt N gt Use UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to select an FTM and press ENTER Time and Frequency Deviation Display This display is only informational ENTER to continue to the next display or CLR to begin again Time Deviation Offset Entry This display shows the current preset value for time deviation offset This value is set by the user and does not change until changed by the user Press UP to edit the value and or reset the accumulated time deviation UP followed by ENTER does not
256. nu Path of XLi gt Configuration Repeat steps 6 10 using the Application ID of xlifault selecting all items under iso gt org gt dod gt private enterprises gt trueTimeEnt gt products xli gt xliSystem gt systemFault gt system FaultHistory and using the Menu Path of XLi gt Fault History Additional OpenView configuration 1 Select the menu item Options gt SNMP Configuration A popup titled SNMP Configuration will ap pear 2 In the SNMP Configuration popup set the Community field to public the Set Community field to private and the Retries field to O XLi Configuration SNMP Configuration Follow the manual to load the snmp conf configuration file into the XLi The IP address of the HP OpenView PC must be in both the public and private communities Test Procedure Testing Get 1 From the Network Node Manager root level double click the icon Internet Select the icon corre sponding to your test subnet e g 192 168 11 and double click Double click the Segment1 icon 2 Select the icon labeled NIC by single clicking with the mouse 3 Select the menu item XLI Status XLi Configuration then XLi gt Faults Verify the values by comparing with the output of the keypad display Testing Set 1 Follow Get Testing procedure steps 1 2 2 Select the menu item Tools gt SNMP MIB Browser
257. o clear the Alarm Latches enter F73 lt S gt CLEAR lt SEP gt ALARM lt SEP gt LATCH lt CR gt XLi replies OK The command line uses a mask to enable or disable each indicator s alarm To see which indicators are Alarm Enabled enter F73 lt S gt MASK lt CR gt XLi replies F73 lt S gt MASK lt SEP gt M lt 1234 678 9ABCDEFGHIJ gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt LF gt where E enabled D Disabled 104 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The following reference table identifies the indicators that correspond to each position in F73 mask syntax Use this table when entering or reviewing MASK settings This table also provides the factory default settings for a unit with one or two GPS receivers One GPS receiver Two GPS receivers PLL Synthesizer Alarm Enabled LPNPLL Alarm Enabled Primary Alarm Enabled Secondary Alarm Enabled IRIG Alarm Enabled Aux Ref Alarm Enabled Secondary Power Alarm Enabled Rb Oscillator Alarm Enabled DAC Alarm Enabled First time lock Alarm Enabled Time error Alarm Enabled OQ AQ U fF o o DD UO d W MN Pp I E E E D D D Primary Power Alarm Enabled E D E D E E Time out Alarm Enabled E E NTP Alarm Enabled if NTP present tj Future Use Future Use T Q Future Use Future Use H J Future Use E m m mam omouonmuozomsTn m Note Alarm Mask provides a setting for LED BLINK T
258. o o 123 o 12 essa queis ors ase tate 2 SN EMEN S 120 F100 J Factory Mode Jumper 0 cece eee eee 132 FIOR ED RSbDOOL v ua habete hg eae e S AS 133 F100 L Remote Lock Status ooooooooooomooo 125 F100 LOCK UNLOCK Remote Lockout oo o ooooo o 124 F100 P Change User Password 0 000 e eee en eeee 134 PIOG PIS PING oiu ta eue mee Aedes ne ota tet oy 135 F100 PN Change User Name 0 00 cece eee 135 F100 SM Subnet Mask 02 ea cae Es de Ea eR 121 F100 ST Self Test Status ias ea Bas A a a 126 F108 Oscillator Configuration ooooooooooooo o o 137 F110 J1 Input Time Code 0 ccc cee oo 137 ETIT J2 Qutput Rate sanar aba 142 PITS J3 Input AUX Ref unies aaa e o da a 146 F116 Display Brightness Level ooooo ooooomoomo oo 150 F117 Factory Configuration o ooooooooooomooo 151 F118 Option Board Configuration oo o oooooooooo o 152 F119 GPS Receiver Configuration ooooooooooooo o 154 F120 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer cece eee eee 158 F123 Have Quick 1PPS Sync Configuration 161 F126 Options Key Entry 0 0 ccc ce eee eee 164 E13 De EO as etus edhe RAE da Sa ge 61 F18 Software Version iia ais neg Saa DA Gd a 62 E2 12 24 Hour Format hci fond rs ita 49 F27 FTM Ill Configuration 0 0 0 0 cece een
259. o prevent TELNET and web interface HTTP access to the XLi change Remote Lockout to LOCK Doing this shuts down TELNET and HTTP access through the XLi s network port so that the XLi s functions are available only through the keypad display interface and through the serial port command line interface e For additional information consult the relevant topics covering the F100 commands in the XLi User s Guide and Reference Manual Configuring the Time Display Use the following functions to configure how the XLi to displays time The keypad button sequences in parentheses provide show how to select these functions and enter the desired settings F1 Time Zone Offset Enter the difference in hours between UTC and the standard time zone of the time display See F1 Time Zone Offset on page 48 and F World Map of Time Zones on page 291 for more information For example US Pacific Standard Time is UTC 08 00 while Japan Standard Time is UTC 9 To enter the time zone offset press the following buttons 24 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The user would enter F1 ENTER 1 ENTER set a positive or negative sign up down arrow button and enter the number of hours 0800 or 0900 F2 12 24 Hour Format Select a 12 or 24 hour display format The default setting is the 24 hour display format which represents 6 PM as 18 00 The user would enter F2 ENTER 2 ENTER See F2
260. ode i e without a time reference Locked reference sources containing leap second data GPS and IRIG B w IEEE1344 take priority to the manual leap second entry Manual leap second data is applied to the XLi UTC TOD when locked to any reference source that does not contain leap second data The manual leap second data will be applied to the clock at the end of the current quarter that it was entered at UTC midnight on the last day of March June September or December The function is selectable by 1 Enter Request the current GPS leap second e g 14 2 Enter Request the leap second adding or subtracting in March June September or December HaveQuick TFOM The following Time Figure of Merit Code has been added to the HaveQuick output Table 2 TFOM code bits Meaning 0000 locked 1111 unlocked All others Not used 16 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Certifications UL C UL FCC CE XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H UL 1950 CSA 22 2 950 Standard for Safety Information Technology Equipment ITE FCC Part 15 Subpart B 89 336 EEC EMC Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Safety Directive IEC 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment ITE 17 18 This page intentionally left blank XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 3 Installation Configuration Installing the GPS
261. on Type as Form Click the Next button The title ofthe popup will now be New Application Builder Display Fields Click the Add button A popup titled New Application Builder Add MIB Objects will appear In the New Application Builder Add MIB Objects will appear popup descend the MIB tree by click ing on the plus symbol next to the entries iso gt org gt dod gt private gt enterprises gt trueTimeEnt gt products gt xli gt xliSystem gt systemStatus gt systemStatusGeneral Select all items under systemStatusGeneral Do this by clicking on the first item and then holding the shift key while clicking on the last item Then click the Add button Back up to xli gt xliSystem gt systemStatus gt systemStatusDetail Select all items under systemStatusDetail and then click the Add button Then click the Close button In the New Application Builder Display Fields popup click the Next button In the Menu Path XLi Time amp Frequency System 279 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 11 12 field enter XLi gt Status Click the Finish button Repeat steps 6 10 using the Application ID of xliconfig selecting all items under iso gt org gt dod gt private gt enterprises gt trueTimeEnt gt products gt xli gt xliSystem gt systemFault gt sys temFaultConfig and using the Me
262. on recheck the physical location of the antenna the cabling and the configuration settings described in this manual Rack Mounting the XLi The XLi comes with the following parts needed to mount the XLi securely in any EIA standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack e 2mounting brackets 4flat head Phillips screws XLi Time amp Frequency System 31 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Have the following items ready and available The appropriate AC or DC power source to connect to the XLi s power supply A 2 size Phillips bit screwdriver To rack mount the XLi Unscrew the four phillips head screws from the front end of the side panels Use the same screws to attach the rack mount brackets as shown e Tighten the screws using a 2 size Phillips screwdriver e Position the XLi in any EIA Standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack system and line up holes in the brackets with the holes in the rack e Secure the brackets to the rack using rack mount screws Note Ensure that the ambient operating temperature does not exceed 50 C Install the XLi chassis so that the top and bottom holes are unobstructed and have sufficient clearance to allow 6 cfm of air to pass through the chassis To maintain recommended operating temperatures install a rack cooling fan capable of 100 cfm in heavily loaded racks 32 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 4 User Interfac
263. on the front panel display of an XLi with only one GPS receiver GPS Status Unlocked would show the following UNLOCKED GPS PRI LOCAL 365 16 01 05 1969 With the GPS receiver as a valid time reference the following changes would take place The asterisk indicating the absence of a valid reference would disappear The system status would change to locked The front panel status display would look like this LOCKED GPS PRI OCAL 233 18 21 29 2004 Once the GPS receiver is a valid time reference it requires at least one good current satellite to remain a valid time reference If good current GPS satellites become temporarily unavailable GPS status changes to unlocked and the XLi stops using the receiver as a valid time reference Typically when a good current satellite becomes available again GPS status locks and the receiver becomes a valid time reference almost immediately Typically the receiver does not need extra time to resolve its current position unless it is being used in a very mobile dynamic environment such as an aircraft If the unit is powered cycled the receiver repeats the complete position and leap second acquisition process before GPS status locks Note GPS satellite visibility and signal strength affect the ability of the GPS receiver to lock and provide valid time to the XLi Therefore it is very important to select the best possible antenna site XLi Time amp Frequency
264. on existent option bay simply refreshes the web page When clicking on links allow each page to load before clicking another link Clicking links too quickly may cause the Login page to appear Submitting Changes When submitting changes only click the Submit Changes button once Wait for the web page to load before navigating away from the page or submitting another change Logging Out To log out click the Logout button located in the upper left corner of the page If the user closes the browser without logging out a new session will not be available until the XLi closes the inactive session after 30 minutes Notes Notes for specific pages in the web interface Units equipped with the GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 When the user changes theGPS Mode setting and applies the changes the GPS receiver goes through several states before attaining the user specified mode e Change Login Page To change the Operator name but not the password leave the password field blank and submit the change The navigation bar on the left side of the page provides links to the following CPU aware cards see F118 Option Board Configuration page 152 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 87 8022 GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM 87 8016 6 PITI BCD Output 87 8045 42 XLi Time amp Frequency S
265. only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Describes the XLi system at the time the alarm was triggered The format matches the output of the F73 command systemStatusGeneral 3 0 255 statusPllSynthesizerOBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER unlocked 1 locked 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the PLL synthesizer systemStatusDetail 1 statusLpnPllOBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER E unlocked 1 locked 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the LPN PLL systemStatusDetail 2 XLi Time amp Frequency System 267 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H El statusPrimaryRefClkOBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the primary reference clock systemStatusDetail 3 statusSecondaryRefClk OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER Gl ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the secondary reference clock systemStatusDetail 4 statuslrig OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER El ok 1 fault 2 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION Gives the current status of the IRIG systemStatusDetail 5 st
266. ons This segment is generally available for data of the user s choice In the IRIG B code output of Model XLi this segment encodes worst case time error flags as explained below The IRIG A output from Model XLi does not include control functions The third segment sometimes encodes time of day in straight binary seconds SBS notation Both IRIG B and IRIG A encode SBS on the Model XLi XLi Time amp Frequency System 287 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The three code segments are contained within one frame The frame length for IRIG B is 1 second long and contains 100 elements pulses each of which start every 10 milliseconds The frame length for IRIG A is 1 10 seconds and contains 100 elements each of which starts every 1 millisecond An element may represent either a binary zero a binary one a reference marker or a position identifier A zero is 0 2 of the duration of an element a one is 0 5 of the duration of an element and a position identifier or reference marker is 0 8 of the duration of an element A reference marker locates the beginning of each frame and a position identifier marks the end of every ten elements IRIG B and IRIG A have ten position identifiers per frame The elements prior to position identifier P5 comprise the time of year segment The first ten elements encode the seconds the second ten elements encode the minutes and so on through days Each element is a digit in a binary number with a place value sequenc
267. ooooooooo ooo 152 Option Cards zoo ee PUER M EIER PICS LT Vii 28 Installing or Removing 0 ccc BI 28 Options Key ENY Le otr Se eh Sate eeb a aed 164 OP Lada EIA TOM AAA tu EN SUO RA RAN 116 Oscillator High Performance Rubidium Upgrade 224 High Stability OCXO Upgrade 0 0 cece oo 223 OCKO Upgrade 6245 4 edere titur y ER err hee e Fad 223 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F bidiutm Upgrade estais rere MU Rer EVI RAE ds 224 Standard FOVOXO onset kee EA ea e PRESS anaes 225 umm AP Ec dlls da 91 Oscillator Configuration 25 czoorcuerion sp da bee eee 137 Oscillators itu dee o n A A e CERRAR 225 Output A A A Pob ice don dif 207 P O euni O AR 134 Part Numbers 5233 23 A DA a E 293 Password iaa rs ta tad ad 38 A IA 134 CHANGING tii dd Conte ep xeu od AA 39 POS WO Ss E o As De 41 A O o E AT 135 PINO LL obse ro SEE R ORES 135 Position ura uet mes ARANA A A a D E ae 75 Power S pplles 2 0 ii a REN SEU 225 Power SUDDIV cack e DP LEA E o Ed m iie 23 PPO iia to A TE E a 10 142 Private Enterprise MIB Structure oooooooooooooo o 271 Programmable Pulse Qut veo ies us ee poe pe mra rh d 10 Programmable Pulse Output 0 0 cee cee eee 142 R Rack MOUNTING 2 A AAA AAA 31 Rack Mounting the XLI a e a AAA OE Rasen 31 Rate Qut oras irc ets 10 Rate Output JP orca ee tut aims quens S S VO PS Kat EO MG 142 a ote ue od oit ete d
268. or alarm indication In addition if position 8 of S1 is in the OFF position then the FPGA will cause U8 and U9 to transmit the AIS pattern and will turn off the optional output signals whenever a major alarm occurs The FPGA also implements a watchdog function by requiring that the broadcast bytes are in fact broadcast once a second Should they not arrive on time then the FPGA would assert a major alarm This assures that failure of the main XLi processor would be detected Maintenance This card is maintenance free 186 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H E1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000E1 6 Introduction The E1 Output card provides telecommunications timing signals that comply with ITU T G 703 and ITU T G 704 standards for 16 frame Multiframe In addition when the clock is configured with an appropriate high stability oscillator option it meets the requirements of ANSI T1 101 1999 and ITU T G 811 for Primary Reference Clock operation This card occupies a single option bay All of its output signals are balanced and provided through panel mounted wire wrap pins Two sets of Form C relay closures are also included for major and minor alarm indications These closures are accessible on the panel mounted wire wrap pins Figure 15 Wire wrap outputs on the E1 card This option card operates without software configuration by the user Specifications Framed All 1 s E1 2048 Kb S Outputs
269. ormally When seen from the rear of the XLi the Primary Power indicator corresponds to the power supply mod ule in the lowest left most bay Secondary Power Status OK or Fault The Secondary Power indicator reports OK when the power supply voltages are normal It reports Fault when the power supply voltages exceed 10 of nominal supply regulation While the Secondary Power indicator reports a fault all outputs from the XLi are unreliable and should not be used unless a Primary Power supply is available and operating normally Note If the Secondary Power Supply is not present or plugged in no fault will be reported When seen from the rear of the XLi the Secondary Power indicator corresponds to the power supply module in the following locations For the 1U chassis the Secondary Power supply is located in Option Bays 3 8 4 which are the two vertical bays to the left of the center of the unit Forthe 2U chassis the Secondary Power supply is located in the upper left most bay directly above the primary power supply Rubidium Oscillator Status OK or Fault The Rubidium Oscillator indicator reports OK when the Rubidium Oscillator is operating normally It reports Fault when the Rubidium Oscillator is warming up or has a PLL fault Faults that occur during the warm up period after the unit is started up are not significant and can be pre vented by extending the duration of the F73 Power On Alarm Supp
270. ot when F53 is in Time Mode Start Site Survey The receiver is checking for changes in its saved static position occurs after boot e Survey Position The receiver is establishing an initial position following a reset If the receiver had current satellites prior to being reset it can establish the position in a matter of seconds otherwise establishing the position takes a few minutes Stop Site Survey The receiver is ending site survey Position Hold The receiver has determined its most accurate position and is using this static position to calculate its most accurate time solution e Start TRAIM for Time Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring The receiver is in Position Hold and is monitoring the integrity of the time solution using redundant satellite measurements in order to eliminate unreliable signal information Stop TRAIM The receiver is ending TRAIM monitoring Dynamic Mode The user has determined that the position of the system could change and has set F53 GPS operation mode to Dynamic Mode see F53 GPS Operation Mode page 80 The system is resolving its position so that it can compensate for position changes With the GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 F119 does not report GPS acquisition states 156 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Command Line To obtain the status of the GPS Receiver enter F119 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt S lt CR gt For example ent
271. other words Timeout Delay countdown does not keep track of the cumulative duration of multiple Time Error faults Power On Alarm Suppress The Power On Alarm Suppress setting prevents all F73 faults alarms for a user determined period of time after the XLi is started The factory default setting is 300 seconds five minutes When that interval ends current and new faults alarms are reported normally The operator may need to adjust this interval for options or operating conditions that require more time for the XLi to warm up after starting Note that a system with a GPS reference will typically lock in less than 20 minutes NTP Status OK or Fault Please note This alarm indicator is only visible on the keypad display interface when the NTP software option is installed and enabled The NTP indicator reports OK if the F13 Worst Case Error is under 1 mS It reports Fault if the F13 Worst Case Error exceeds 1 mS When the NTP indicator reports Fault the NTP leap indicator value is set to e 3 Alarm condition the clock is not synchronized The other values for the system leap indicator field are 0 No warning the clock is synchronized XLi Time amp Frequency System 101 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H e 1 Last minute has 61 seconds the clock is synchronized and the last minute of the day will have an extra second e 2 Last minute has 59 seconds the clock is synchronized and the last minute of the day will
272. p Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Antenna Splitteri pa AAA d E asit pu S 22 In Line Antenna Amplifier ya oes meh peso eot shay acdiraP ie 25 Making Additional Connections 4 eset aa tee qu ERAT EA STR YR we 23 Connecting the Power Supply 2233 a a s MIR V dues 23 Configuring Network Settings ciu cox e bue uto Sea PAN eR nea lee ke FCU 24 Configuring the Time Display d Vu oe VR RENS a Xe RT EG 24 Using the Command Line Interface eus ecl e kG tee ah EA Oy 26 Connecting to the Serial Port 5 5 eos won Seq ER eere Ew ic 26 Connecting to the Network Port TELNET 00 0000 esee 2f Uso the Web Itata LA Qe RU o o b RE VET 24 Installing or Removing Option Cards 0 cc eee cece esee 28 Additional Configuration c ads Gea Cade age Te I SER n Wa ee REN x 28 Standard AM NA O E CR AY A FOAM GS 29 XLi witha GPS Reference ie RA Teu REESE MEE rera E 30 XLi with GPS and Time Code References 2 02s ee LEReR DOE I ERE EI 30 XLi with two optional GPS receivers 2 0 cece eee ee ene 30 Installing the Expansion Module 2 0 0 cece eee een eee 31 Verifying Antenna Installation 4k eacus br ede he RE Rd s 31 Rack Mounting the XET ce consue FRE Rue A aes ote bane ewe io dads 31 4 User Interfac s lia a misti AS A AS RES dua ew ea 33 Card Positions ia AS A E e E E Sa s 33 Alarm Status LED oaa E Fmd A A RE RE 33 Keypad Display Interface 2 A eheu 34 A o E NA EAI E EEE E TETE 34 Status DISPLAY a
273. phone 24 hours a day 7 days a week through the Main Customer Assistance Center number above and from 8 a m to 5 p m Central European Time weekdays at the Europe Middle East and Africa number Customers may e mail support requests to http www symmetricom com support techsupport techsupport aspx prodtype TTM XLi Time Frequency System 295 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 296 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Index Numerics 1 PPS Pulse Per Second Output o oooooooooooooo oo 11 1 PPS Synch Configuration x sod earsu rr n 161 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output o ooooooo o 177 10 100 BASE T id a etis 123 12 24 Hour Format eoero aera n aeran E a e mono 49 12 Frame Multiframe oooooooooooooorrromoooo 181 MAL EE ESET E AA A ara A E 294 A E T os EI sud 293 15106527 costo d e PES bu idis da pe p uia tese Pata ou ua 293 CET US A A A EHE EN VIE TRAE EE 294 24 VDC Power Input Option o oooooocooooooooooo 226 241 008 0054 s pupa Feo ad air sat dot ua s eben e tet ERN 294 24 Frame Multiframe see 181 48 VDC Power Input Option llseee e 226 952 100 cC 177 293 B6 BU A oed Ge boe Un esos Seb b ae Sut 222 293 81 3994 18 4 v Le mara quo talea mae qu EA UN Sa S3 293 981 399 1954 o tec N Paar ques da dh eda qupd ped uA qe eie 293 87 399 RBIU A A A E A 293 87 299 RB2U c id ave AA OS P RA AA ANA 293 A A II bes
274. power source first connect the positive power cable to on the power supply then connect the negative power supply cable to Upon receiving power the XLi goes through its startup sequence displaying BOOTING LOADING and STARTING After approximately 40 seconds the XLi displays the clock status and user interfaces front panel command line become available XLi Time amp Frequency System 23 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Configuring Network Settings The following additional steps are required to make the XLi operational on a network Make the XLi operational on a network if you plan on managing the XLi remotely over the network or distributing timing information from the XLi over the network Press Result ENTER Displays FUNCTION 100 Enters 100 as the function number ENTER Displays Function 100 s first screen COMPANY 00 A0 69 ENTER Displays IP ADDRESS 1 9 Enter the unit s IP Address e g 192 168 0 11 ENTER Displays SUBNET MASK 1 9 Enter the Subnet Mask e g 255 255 255 000 ENTER Displays DEFAULT GATEWAY 1 9 Enter the Default Gateway s IP address e g 192 168 0 1 ENTER Displays 10 100 BASE T 10 ENTER Displays REMOTE LOCKOUT UNLOCK Leave unchanged ENTER 5 times Displays SAVE CHANGES YES ENTER Saves the new network parameters and reboots the XLi Notes T
275. primary synchronization clock source in seconds with the fraction point between bits 15 and 16 Note that this variable can take on both positive and negative values depending on clock precision and skew Note A primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its root delay field set to ntpSysRootDelay Sr fontp 12 ntpSysRootDisp OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION This raw 32 bit number represents a signed 32 bit fixed point number This is the maximum error relative to the primary reference source in seconds with fraction point between bits 15 and 16 Only positive values greater than zero are possible Note A primary time server s outgoing NTP packet has its root dispersion field set to ntpSysRootDisp ntp 13 E ntpSysRefClockIdent OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZI MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION This is a four byte ASCII string that identifies the particular reference clock In the case of stratum 0 unspecified or stratum 1 primary reference this is a four octet left justified zero padded ASCII string While not enumerated as part of the NTP specification the following are suggested ASCII identifiers El PES o Ds StratumCode Meaning 0 DCN DCN routing protocol 0 NIST NIST public modem 0 TSP TSP time protocol 0 DTS Digital Time Service 1 ATOM Atomic clock
276. provides a simple menu driven user interface the command line interface features Additional functions that aren t available through the keypad display Remote access over a network To use the command line interface refer to the explanations and examples in the Command Line subsections for each function in the XLi User s Guide and Reference Manual Connecting to the Serial Port Complete the following steps to set up and use the Serial Port to communicate with the XLi Verify that the XLi s serial port settings are as follows Keypad ENTER 4 ENTER Use the UP DOWN ARROWS Serial Port RS232 Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 e Parity NONE Stop bits 1 Note Parity set to NONE is only valid when Data Bits is set to 8 Connect a null modem cable from the PC s serial port to the XLi s SERIAL I O port If needed configure your PC s terminal emulation program to match the serial port settings above 9600 8 N 1 Set Flow Control to None One terminal emulation program HyperTerminal is usually found in Microsoft Windows under Programs Accessories or Programs Accessories Communications Initiate a serial port connection between the terminal emulation program and the XLi The Serial Port connection does not require you to log in Once connected press the Enter key on your keyboard to get a command prompt From the command prompt gt you can use the functions describe
277. quency Synthesizer Option Board Status enter F120 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt S lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 120 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII letter to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 SEP one or more separator characters either space comma or tab S ASCII letter to denote that N 1 Freq Synthesizer status is requested LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed for input strings a carriage return only The XLi Serial Network port responds with an eight line response similar to the following example Sample request Re F120 B2 S lt CR gt lt LF gt sponse F120 B2 lt CR gt lt PART NUMB ER F E LF gt 87 8022 CR 1 LE FPGA 184 8016V0001 lt CR gt lt N 1 PLL OCK ED lt CR gt lt LF gt 1234 HZ lt CR gt lt LF gt 44444444 HZ lt CR gt lt LF gt T 2 3 59 HZ lt CR gt lt LF gt 4 777 HZ lt CR gt lt LF gt LE gt OT UNLOCK ED The frequency of one of the output channels may be set as follows F120 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt lt C gt lt SEP gt lt FREQ gt lt CR gt XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 159 where F120 string representing the Function Number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII letter indicating board number follows
278. r connecting to the command line interface To get the NTP config files type gt 100 config ntp get host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt To get the SNMP config file type gt 100 config snmp get host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt To get the SNMP and NTP config files type gt 100 config ntp snmp get host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt Here s an example of a successful SNMP and NTP config file transfer gt f100 config ntp snmp get host 192 168 0 1 dir Host config ip 192 168 0 1 already configured Source file config snmp conf bytes read 1275 Dest file snmp conf bytes written 1275 Source file etc ntp conf bytes read 1166 Dest file ntp conf bytes written 1166 Source file etc ntp keys bytes read 44 Dest file ntp keys bytes written 44 Configuration files transferred successfully If you get Error Can t write file when you enter the get command verify the following FTP server items e FTP server is running e Anonymous has a home directory The home directory for Anonymous has read write and delete enabled make sure to apply changes Edit the Configuration Files In Windows edit the configuration files using a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad For more information see D Network Time Protocol NTP on page 283 236 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H If using the pre configured FTP server downloaded from http www ntp syste
279. racter F 69 Function number lt SEP gt One or more separator characters either space comma or tab characters For output strings this will be a single space character TT Time Type Either GPS UTC LOCAL or STANDARD CR Carriage return character lt LF gt Line feed character For example enter F69 lt CR gt XLi gives one of the following responses F69 GPS lt CR gt lt LF gt F69 UTC lt CR gt lt LF gt F69 LOCAL lt CR gt lt LF gt F69 STANDARD lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the time mode enter a command using the following format F69 lt S gt lt TT gt lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 69 Function number S ASCII space character lt TT gt Time Type Either GPS UTC LOCAL or STANDARD CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example to change the time mode to local time enter F69 LOCAL lt CR gt Or to change the time mode to UTC enter F69 UTC lt CR gt XLi responds to these changes with OK lt CR gt lt LEF gt 90 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F71 Oscillator Statistics Use F71 to display the phase frequency offset drift rate and DAC value of an internal or optional external oscillator Definitions The phase is the instantaneous error in seconds between the oscillator and the control loop zero servo point The frequency offset is computed using an averaging time that i
280. racy Refer to System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 See F111 J2 Output Rate PPO on page 142 J3 Input Auxiliary Reference or Frequency Measurement Auxiliary Reference Aux Ref Frequency 1 5 10 MHz Amplitude 1 Vp p to 10 Vp p at 1 kO to ground Amplitude 1 Vp p to 3 Vp p at 50 O to ground Impedance Configurable 1 KQ or 50 to ground SNR gt 20db Quantity 1 Connector Female BNC Factory Configuration Disabled 10 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The Frequency Measurement Freq Meas option measures an external frequency applied to the J3 input relative to the XLi s disciplined frequency Frequency 1 5 10 MHz Resolution 120 x 10 120 1 Second Interval 12 x 10 120 10 Second Interval 1x 10 120 100 Second Interval Range 1000 x10 6 Impedance 1k0 500 Factory Configuration Disabled Accuracy Refer to System Time amp Frequency Accuracy on page 6 See F113 J3 Input Aux Ref Freq Meas on page 146 1 PPS Pulse Per Second Output Pulse width 20 uS 1 uS On time edge Rising Amplitude TTL Levels into 50 Q Quantity 1 Connector Female BNC If a time reference is unavailable 1 PPS is as stable as the frequency reference e g the system oscillator or Aux Ref CODE Time Code Output Time Code Output Specifications Modulated AM and Demodulated DC or DCLS Format IRIG B 120 B000 B120 1344 B000 1344 IRIG A130 A000
281. ratum level of the local time server sets outgoing NTP packets stratum field ntpSysStratum to 1 ntp 9 ntpSysPoll OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 6 10 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION When the time server is in NTP broadcast mode this integer indicates the maximum interval between successive NTP messages in seconds to the nearest power of two For example a value of 6 means 2 6 or 64 seconds Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its poll field set to ntpSysPoll Note This field is equal to 0 when not in NTP broadcast mode Note Unless this is a time server initiated NTP packet the value of the poll equals the value set in the incoming packet ntp 10 ntpSysPrecision OBJECT TYP my ES SYNTAX INTEGER 127 127 MAX ACCESS read only XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 257 STATUS current DESCRIPTION This integer indicates the ultimate precision of the synchronizing clock in seconds to the nearest power of two Note A primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its precision field set to ntpSysPrecision iic Tonbp cbb y Gl ntpSysRootDelay OBJECT TYPI SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS current DESCRIPTION This raw 32 bit number represents a signed fixed point 32 bit number This is the total round trip delay to the
282. rds are present an LPN PLL fault on any one of the LPN cards will change the LPN PLL indicator to Unlocked If so all LPN card outputs should be considered unreliable and should not be used until the faulty card has been identified All other outputs unless in an alarm condition con tinue to be available for use Contact Symmetricom Global Customer Assistance GPS Primary Receiver and GPS Secondary Receiver Status OK or Fault GPS Primary Receiver and GPS Secondary Receiver indicators report OK when the corresponding GPS receiver card is tracking satellites has a valid position and is providing time to the clock without faults They report Fault if any of the preceding conditions aren t met This can be due to poor visibility of the GPS satellites a failed antenna an open or shorted antenna cable or a failed GPS receiver card XLi Time amp Frequency System 97 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The GPS Primary Receiver indicator corresponds to the GPS receiver configured as Primary in F119 The GPS Secondary Receiver indicator corresponds to the GPS receiver configured as Secondary in F119 The GPS Receiver indicators report OK if the corresponding GPS receiver card is configured as Dis abled in F119 or if the card is physically removed from the XL i With good conditions and excellent visibility of the sky the GPS receiver should track multiple GPS sat ellites on a continuous basis faults from
283. re is no command to reset the user name and password to the factory default settings For more information see Web Interface on page 40 Installing or Removing Option Cards Warning Installing and removing option cards can expose dangerous voltages that can cause electric shock resulting in injury or death Disconnect all power before installing or removing option cards Dangerous voltages may be present in option cards and in the unit even when the power is disconnected To install an option card 1 Set the unit up on a clean safe stable work surface that provides good visibility and maneuverabil ity to work with screwdriver 2 On the back panel select an option bay and unscrew the retaining screws and remove the small aluminum panel from the option bay 3 Line up the edges of the card with the guide grooves in the option bay and slide it in 4 When the card is in almost all the way push it firmly the rest of the way in until the faceplate of the option card is flush with the back panel 5 Insert and tighten the retaining screws so the option card is secured in place To remove an option card remove the screws pull the card out and secure the small aluminum panel in its place with the screws Additional Configuration This section Provides the factory settings of several XLi configurations Identifies which functions can be used to change those settings and a cross reference to the corresponding page in this
284. ree way connection between the three following items OUTPUT 1 on the 87 6002 XL1 Multicode option card A load with the desired impedance or the target system The input connector on an oscilloscope Adjust potentiometer LEVEL 1 R90 with a tweaker tool for desired voltage amplitude Adjust potentiometer RATIO1 R91 with a tweaker tool for desired voltage ratio 172 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The default factory configuration is 3Vp p amplitude with 3 1 ratio 1Vp p for low signal Repeat steps 3 5 for OUTPUTS 2 through 4 using the following potentiometers for amplitude and ratio OUTPUT OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUTA AMPLITUDE LEVEL1 R90 LEVEL2 R85 LEVEL3 R57 LEVEL4 R41 RATIO RATIO1 R91 RATIO2 R81 RATIO3 R42 RATIO4 R15 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 87 8022 The N 1 Frequency Synthesizer card s four independently programmable outputs generate frequencies from 1 PPS to 50 MPPS with a tuning resolution of 1 PPS The N 1 module outputs are independently frequency locked to the XLi s internal oscillator Therefore the N 1 outputs have the same frequency accuracy and long term stability of the XLi s internal oscillator The N 1 Frequency Synthesizer is configured from the front panel keypad and command line interface using F120 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer page 158 It can also be managed using the web interface Specifications Output Frequency Range 1 PPS through 50 MPPS Freq
285. reference source 0000 Not Used PTTI 10V 1PPS and 1PPM Output 1PPS TIME ROLLOVER PULSE Amplitude Pulse Width Rise Time Fall Time Phasing Connector 10Vdc 1V into 50 Q 20uSec 1uSec lt 20nSec 1uSec In phase with the XLi 1PPS x 100ns Qty 2 BNC female 1PPM TIME SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 210 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Amplitude Pulse Width Rise Time Fall Time Comnector Physical CPU Aware XLi Time amp Frequency System 10Vdc 1V into 50 Q 20uSec 1uSec 20nSec 1uSec BNC female Double high option bay No XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 211 Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 87 8047 The Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 module is multi function and user configurable to provide one of three signal types on the output ports Serial Talker re broadcast or replication of the standard XLi serial port transmit data T1 1544 kbps frequency E1 2048 kbps frequency The selection of the signal type is made with on board jumpers LEDs mounted to the rear panel identify the signal selected Serial Talker E1 or T1 mode selection MODE JUMPER LED 3 Y pp T4 SERIAL E1 MiB eO0 4 T Y p T1 SERIAL Tl p5 2 558 T1 SERIAL SERIAL Mim ts 5508 T4 OUTPUT When configured for T1 or E1 outputs and XLi or XLi SAASM is configured with an appropriate high stability oscillator option OCXO high stability OC
286. reports OK when an IRIG input on J1 is providing valid time It reports a Fault if one of the following is true The time code signal isn t connected to J1 on the main CPU card e F110isn t configured correctly for a given time code format or impedance configuration There is a high signal to noise ratio in the AM code The DC level shift code level is inadequate or has too much jitter To solve a fault from the IRIG indicator check that the preceding items are configured set up correctly Depending on how F74 is configured the user may need to take additional steps to control which refer ence the XLi uses See the F74 function reference section in this user guide Aux Ref Status OK or Fault 98 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H The Aux Ref indicator reports OK when a valid frequency is connected to the J3 input connector and F113 is configured for the Aux Ref input It reports Fault if the J3 input isn t getting a valid Aux Ref input or function F113 isn t configured for the Aux Ref input Primary Power Status OK or Fault The Primary Power indicator reports OK when the power supply voltages are normal It reports Fault when the power supply voltages exceed 10 of nominal supply regulation While the Primary Power indicator reports a fault all outputs from the XLi are unreliable and should not be used unless a Secondary Power supply is available and operating n
287. represents the previous 1PPS rollover 9 PIN D SPECIFICATION Connector J1 and J2 Male 9 pin D subminiature Pin Assignment 1 N C 2 TX Code out Plus 3 RX Code in Plus for test purposes only 4 RX Code in Minus for test purposes only XLi Time amp Frequency System 207 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUT LEVELS TX Code out Minus PPX Out PPS PPM out for test purposes only PPX In PPS PPM in for test purpose only Specified by ICD GPS 060 Rev B 3 3 2 3 Load 500 to 5ko Logic 1 0 10 to 6 0 Vdc Logic 0 0 10 to 6 0 Vdc Physical Double high option bay CPU Aware Yes Table 10 Bit mSec Description 0 0 80 s of hours 1 20 40 s of hours 2 40 20 s of hours 3 60 10 s of hours 4 80 8 s of hours 5 100 4 s of hours 6 120 2 s of hours 7 140 1 s of hours 8 160 80 s of min 9 180 40 s of min 10 200 20 s of min 208 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Table 10 XLi Time amp Frequency System Bit mSec Description 11 220 10 s of min 12 240 8 s of min 13 260 4 s of min 14 280 2 s of min 15 300 1 s of min 16 320 80 s of sec 17 340 40 s of sec 18 360 20 s of sec 19 380 10 s of sec 20 400 8 s of sec 21 42
288. ress feature Note When using F73 in the front panel display interface the Rubidium Oscillator indicator is only present if the unit is equipped with a Rubidium Oscillator Otherwise this indicator is hidden XLi Time amp Frequency System 99 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H DAC Status OK or Fault The DAC indicator reports OK when the DAC that steers the XLi s internal oscillator is operating nor mally The DAC indicator reports Fault when the DAC is operating at or near its limits This can occur if the oscillator is near its aging rate has been exposed to extreme temperatures or if the reference source is intermittent in error or changes phase significantly If the DAC indicator reports a continuous fault contact Symmetricom Global Customer Assistance This indicator can be enabled for troubleshooting oscillator environmental and reference source prob lems First Time Lock Status OK or Fault First Time Lock reports OK when the clock has locked one or more times since the unit was powered on It reports a Fault if the clock has not locked once since the unit was powered on If this fault persists contact Symmetricom Global Customer Assistance While operating with a First Time Lock fault all outputs from the XLi are unreliable and should not be used This indicator can be enabled for troubleshooting to determine if the unit locks at all during an extended testing period Time Error and Time Thres
289. rimary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its poll field set to ntpSysPoll Note this field is equal XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H to 0 when not in NTP broadcast mode Note unless this is a time server initiated NTP packet the value of the poll equals the value set in the in coming packet ntp 10 ntpSysPrecision OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 127 127 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is an integer indicating the ultimate precision of the synchronizing clock in seconds to the nearest power of two Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its precision field set to ntpSysPrecision ntp 11 E ntpSysRootDelay OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is a raw 32 bit number representing a signed fixed point 32 bit number indicating the total round trip delay to the primary synchronization clock source in seconds with the fraction point between bits 15 and 16 Note that this variable can take on both positive and negative values depending on clock precision and skew Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its root delay field set to ntpSysRootDelay ntp 12 El ntpSysRootDisp OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is a ra
290. rompt but won t accept additional commands after the serial port has taken control Attempting to close the network port session and open a new one will fail a network port connection cannot be re established until the serial port has been closed The following transcripts shows a contest between a serial and a network port session Serial port session gt f100 ic f100 IP 192 168 46 150 SM 255 255 255 0 G 192 168 46 1 gt NOTICE A NEW TELNET SESSION HAS BEEN STARTED ON THE INTERNET PORT gt f100 ic NOTICE THERE IS ALREADY A TELNET SESSION ON THE INTERNET PORT NOTICE YOU HAVE TAKEN CONTROL AWAY FROM THE TELNET SESSION f100 IP 192 168 46 150 SM 255 255 255 0 G 192 168 46 1 gt f100 ic f100 IP 192 168 46 150 SM 255 255 255 0 G 192 168 46 1 gt XLi Time Frequency System 39 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Network port session WELCOME TO SYMMETRICOM NETWORK INTERFACE USER NAME operator PASSWORD NETWORK INTERFACE 192 8001 c 1998 2006 SYMMETRICOM ALL RIGHTS RESERVED LOGIN SUCCESSFUL gt f100 ic f100 IP 192 168 46 150 SM 255 255 255 0 G 192 168 46 1 I gt NOTICE UTILITY MONITOR SESSION HAS TAKEN PRIORITY FROM THIS TELNET SESSION 2f100 ic NOTICE CANNOT RESPOND TO COMMAND BECAU
291. ry is checked to ensure that the correct file is used To write the file to the flash send the F100 BH command with the FTP host file path and name and then enter F100 BU lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt And for example displays the following text gt 100 bu OK BURNING FILE 192 8001 bin WITH SIZE 803016 TO PARTITION 1 SECTOR 10 EC 10 RE 0 n 128 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H SEC 11 RE SEC 12 RE SEC 13 RE SEC 14 RE SEC 15 RE SEC 16 RE SEC 17 RE SEC 18 RE SEC 19 RE SEC 20 RE SEC 21 RE SEC 22 RE F LASH SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMM O CJ C3 CX C9 CO CJ C3 C3 G G 0 F100 BF Burn File System ED CRC32 0x2D9A260A Note See B Upgrading System Firmware on page 239 Use function F100 BF to burn file system when upgrading firmware to write a file system to the flash memory To write the file system to the flash send the F100 BH command with the FTP host file path and name and then enter F100 lt S gt BF lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt For example gt 100 bt OK BURNING FIL SEC 94 SEC 95 SEC 96 SEC 97 SEC 98 SEC 99 SEC 100 SEC 101 SEC 102 SEC 125 E 192 8002 fs WITH SIZI FILE SYSTEM FLASH BURN COMPLETED XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H E 2096640 129 F100 BUFP
292. s NAME appearing as a single line in the text file MIB config ttmib o GenTraps YES AME public VIND 1 TRAP YES ACCESS R IP 010 001 007 065 IP 000 0 0 001 000 IP 000 000 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 ENDC AME private VIND 1 TRAP YES ACCESS W IP 010 001 007 065 IP 000 00 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 ENDC AME VIND 0 TRAP NO ACCESS R IP 000 000 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 1P 2000 000 000 000 ENDC Z c Z o Z etc NAME VIND 0 TRAP NO ACCESS R IP 000 000 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 IP 000 000 000 000 IP2000 000 000 000 ENDC END 270 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Key MIB config ttmib o Avoid changing this factory setting GenTraps YES Global enable disable setting for all SNMP traps YES the default setting enables all traps NO disables all traps This setting overrides all the other TRAP parameter settings NAME the community name password This should be the same as the community name being used by the administrator s VIND View Index This is a reserved term that has no effect and is currently unused in SNMP This parameter should be set to 1 TRAP YES enables NO disables SNMP traps for a particular community ACCESS Read and write privileges to members of a community R sets read only privileges and W sets read an
293. s The following sections provide examples and some explanations for each Predetermined RATE output For example to produce a fixed 100 kPPS rate output enter F111 RATE 100KPPS lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Single PPO pulse output For example to produce a a single pulse with duration of 1 second on January 1 enter F111 PPO 001 00 00 00 000000 001 00 00 01 000000 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Or for example to produce a single pulse with duration of 1 microsecond on January 1 enter F111 PPO 001 00 00 00 000000 lt CR gt The XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Repetitive PPO pulse outputs Repetitive PPO pulse output function can be used to produce repetitive pulses from once per year up to 100 000 per second To issue repetitive pulses using PPO use wildcards in the Start Time and Stop Time fields Through the command line interface the user may place X or x in the time fields of the F111 command The X or x character is referred to as the wildcard in the PPO time fields The most significant non 144 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H wildcard digit in the time field is used to specify the Start or Stop Time of the repetitive pulses which in turn specifies the pulse width of the repetitive pulses The least significant wildcard character the one to the immediate left of the most significant non wildcard digit specifies t
294. s 63 Fo Time amp Dale ist iaa ee ends asic aaa 50 F4 Serial Port Configuration 0 0 cece eee 52 F42 Multicode Output Configuration o ooooooooooo 69 F44 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 0 0 ce eee 73 F5 Time Quality Setup 0 eee eens 53 F50 GPS Receiver LLA XYZ Position oooooo o 75 F51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay 20 0 ees 77 F52 Distribution Cable Delay ooo oooooooooooo 78 F53 GPS Operation Mode oooooooocococooomooo o 80 Fo Keypad Lock ia a ge mr ad aD ARR 55 F60 GPS Satellite List snesen asies docebit pee Pee ort h 81 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST o o oooocoooococoooo oo 25 F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode ooo oooooooo 84 4 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F67 Manual Leap Second Entry 0 00 86 F69 Time MOde a us a Ei 25 89 F71 Oscillator Statistics 5 5 oco abcr dd 9 Pf2 Fault Status 123i deretur pog cire cis 92 F73 Alarm Control Status llle 94 F74 Clock Source Control 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee eee 107 F77 PTTI Output Configuration o oooooooooooo o 109 F78 Parallel BCD Output Configuration ooo o 112 F90 Code Output Configuration ooooooooooooo o 116 Factory Configuration s cesa oras seres RU PERS a 151 Factor
295. s capable of providing Telecommunications Stratum I Primary Reference Source performance Jumper blocks JP9 JP8 JP7 JP6 JP5 and JP4 allow selection of a desired output from OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4 respectively When operation is balanced the output pairs are available at wire wrap connector P3 190 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Alarm Operation The logic resident in the FPGA U7 implements major and minor alarm generation by monitoring two bytes broadcast once per second over the XLi bus by the host microprocessor residing on the GPS XL card and the LFA and LFB signals sourced by U8 and US which indicate E1 output line faults Major and minor alarm status is provided from the clock The E1 option combines the fault signal inputs to form a summary major alarm indication minor alarm information verbatim to control minor alarm indication In addition if position 8 of S1 is in the OFF position the E1 output transmits the AIS pattern and will turn off the optional output signals whenever a major alarm occurs The FPGA also implements a watchdog function by requiring that the broadcast bytes are in fact broadcast once a second Should they not arrive on time then the FPGA would assert a major alarm This assures that failure of the main XLi processor would be detected Maintenance This card requires no maintenance GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 Introduction The optional GPS C A
296. s equal to the effective averaging time of the oscillator controller The oscillator Drift Rate is computed using a 24 hour average and is the daily Drift Rate of the oscillator The oscillator DAC value is the signed 16 bit integer that controls the DAC output voltage It ranges from 0 to 65536 Command Line To display the F71 settings enter F71 lt CR gt XLi responds using the following format F71 lt S gt phase lt SIGN gt lt MULT gt E lt SIGN gt lt EXP gt lt S gt s lt S gt lt S gt offset lt SIGN gt lt MULT gt E lt SIGN gt lt EXP gt lt S gt lt S gt dr ift lt SIGN gt lt MULT gt E lt SIGN gt lt EXP gt DAY lt S gt lt S gt DAC lt SIGN gt lt INT gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII string indicating function F71 lt S gt ASCII space character one or more lt MULT gt multiplier 4 digits with decimal point E ASCII character E for exponent s ASCII character s for seconds abbreviation lt SIGN gt for negative or lt S gt for positive EXP 2 digit exponent DAY ASCII characters units of Drift Rate INT integer 5 digits CR carriage return LF line feed For example enter F71 lt CR gt XLi responds F71 PHASE 5 678E 09 s OFFSET 1 986E 07 DRIFT 6 013E 08 DAY DAC 24567 lt CR gt lt LF gt XLi Time amp Frequency System 91 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F72 Fault Status Use function F72 to display the fault sta
297. s of one or more N 8 cards separated by spaces CR Carriage return lt LF gt Line feed For example enter F44 lt CR gt XLi responds with the card numbers F44 02 04 lt CR gt lt LF gt To see the frequency settings of all port settings on a specific card enter F44 B3 lt CR gt XLi responds card 3 example settings F44 B3 1 2048 2 1000 3 0512 4 0008 lt CR gt lt LF gt To display the frequency of a specific output ports card 3 port 4 enter F44 B3 4 lt CR gt XLi responds F44 B3 4 0008 lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the frequency of one of the output ports use the following format F44 lt S gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt lt C gt lt SEP gt lt FREQ gt lt CR gt where lt S gt ASCII space character one or more B ASCII B character lt N gt The card number lt SEP gt Space separator lt C gt The port number lt FREQ gt TheN 8 frequency from 8 to 8192 kPPS in 8 kPPS steps lt CR gt Carriage Return 74 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To set the frequency of one of the output ports card 2 port 1 to 8 KPPS enter F44 B2 1 8 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To set all four ports on a card with one serial string enter F44 B1 1 1000 2 2000 3 2048 4 16 lt CR gt This sets the ports on card 1 as follows e Port 1 to 1000 kPPS e Port 2 to 2000 kPPS e Port 3 to 2048 kPPS Port 4 to 16 kPPS F50 GPS Rece
298. screws The two antenna housing halves come together with an O 20 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ring and a key tab and groove Neither the O ring or key are critical to the antenna operation The O ring makes for a more weather proof seal for the antenna connector The key ensures that the housing always connects in the same orientation The pipe that is shown disconnected above also acts as a protective housing for the optional antenna preamplifier A preamplifier should be connected to the antenna assembly if the distance between the antenna and receiver is greater than 150 ft The preamplifier connects to the TNC connector on the antenna housing by a three inch TNC to TNC adapter cable The open end of the preamplifier is then connected signal cable from the receiver connects to the A 50 ft cable is provided with each antenna assembly If the distance between the antenna assembly and receiver is greater than 50 ft replace the 50 ft cable with a longer cable as opposed to adding an extension to the 50 ft cable To connect the antenna cable to the antenna assembly do the following 1 Separate the antenna by loosening the four captive antenna housing screws 2 Pass the TNC end of the receiver signal cable through the support pipe and lower half of the antenna assembly and connect it to the antenna signal connector a If a preamplifier is to be used connect the three inch preamplifier adapter cable
299. se OK lt CR gt lt LF gt The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE if the input string was in the correct format but contained a value probably numeric that was out of the range of acceptable values The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 02 SYNTAX if it receives a string in an incorrect format The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 03 BAD MISSING FIELD if the input string lacks a required field F111 J2 Output Rate PPO Use function F111 to configure the J2 Output to generate rates listed below or as an option to generate Programmable Pulse Outputs PPO The following rates are available as a standard feature 1 PPS 10 PPS 100 PPS 1 kPPS 10 kPPS 1 MPPS 5 MPPS 10 MPPS The default factory setting is 10 MPPS For J2 specifications see J2 Output Rate Out or Programmable Pulse Output on page 10 Notes on F111 PPO PPO is an optional feature If purchased at the same time as the XLi it comes enabled on the system To purchase this option after you have purchased the XLi contact Symmetricom Sales See H Sales and Customer Assistance on page 295 PPO can provide a single pulse output or repetitive pulse outputs PPO can start and stop the pulse at any time in the year with a resolution of one microsecond te The repetition rates from PPO are based on wildcards See Repetitive PPO pul
300. se Module 87 8040 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output 86 8008 e T1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000T1 8 1 Telecom Interface Output 87 6000E1 6 Second Serial Talker or T1 E1 87 8047 GPS C A Receiver 87 8028 2 Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 87 8023 Have Quick Output with selectable TFOM 87 8016 6 HaveQuick 1 PPS Time and Frequency Reference 87 8016 3 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality 87 8090 Parallel BCD uSec with Time Quality 87 8090 1 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Unlock Status 87 8090 2 PTTI BCD Output 87 8045 e le te je je The following is a legacy option card for the XLi GPS Receiver 86 8013 XLi Time 8 Frequency System 167 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Expansion Module 87 8034 1 87 8034 2 The Expansion Module is a versatile option that expands the number of standard time code and pulse rate outputs from the XLi Four independent user configurable outputs are provided The output signals are selectable via an on module rotary switch Specify output signals configuration at time of order A version of the module is also available supporting an alarm relay output The available output types are as follows Time Code AM DC Format mirrors selected XLi standard code output IRIG A B IEEE 1344 or NASA 36 Alarm Rates 1 PPS 1 kPPS 10 kPPS 100 kPPS 1 MPPS 5 MPPS 10 MPPS e Programmable Pulse Requires PPO option to be installed Alarm Relay 87 8
301. se outputs on page 144 regarding usage of wildcards to specify PPO repetition rates PPOcan provide the following sub second repetition rates 100 PPS 10 PPS 1 PPS 100 PPS and 10 PPS f PPO only specifies one time it is the start time The stop time is automatically set for one microsecond later 142 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Keypad Selecting one of the Standard Rates Using the keypad press the ENTER 111 ENTER buttons Select one of the standard rates using the up down arrow buttons and press the ENTER button again When prompted Save changes Yes press the ENTER button one more time Programming the PPO option If available PPO appears as the first option when you enter F111 Press the ENTER button to start programming PPO Otherwise use the up down arrow buttons to select one of the standard rates The display shows the PULSE START TIME followed by the Time of Year and Time of Day fields Program the PPO option as explained in the Command Line section below Use the CLR key to enter the X wildcards if needed Command Line Requesting the Current Configuration To request the J2 Output Configuration enter the following F111 lt CR gt The XLi responds in the following format F111 lt S gt lt RATE gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Or if the PPO option is active it responds F111 lt S gt PPO lt S gt lt START gt lt S gt lt STOP gt lt CR gt lt LF
302. se the front panel display and Multicode Output card can be configured to display distribute Local or Standard time we recommended configuring F1 as described in the 3 Installation Configuration on page 19 The factory setting for F1 is UTC 8 00 hours Pacific Standard Time Related topics F2 12 24 Hour Format on page 49 F11 Time Output Format on page 59 e F27 FTM III Configuration on page 63 Command Line To display the time zone offset enter F1 lt CR gt on the command line The XLi responds with the following character string F1 lt S gt lt SIGN gt lt HH gt lt MM gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 01 function number lt S gt ASCII space character one or more lt SIGN gt either no character or for positive offsets or for negative offsets HH one or two digit hours offset from 00 to12 hours ASCII character for a colon lt MM gt two digit minutes offset lt CR gt carriage return character LF line feed character For example to set the time zone offset enter Fl 8 00 lt CR gt 48 XLi Time 8 Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To verify the change enter F1 lt CR gt XLi Responds Fl 8 00 lt CR gt lt LF gt F2 12 24 Hour Format Use function F2 to apply a 12 or 24 hour format to the time output by Keypad Display Interface on pag
303. seii Pet 289 NASA 36 Code Format 289 XLi NASA 36 Time Code Input Output 0 0 00 00000 289 F World Map of Time Zones cece cece cece ec ee cee cece cere eens 291 Ge Part Numbers a0 9 A A A 293 H Sales and Customer Assistance ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 295 lude ica eee A Sees ye BSF eee SSS eee ee 297 X XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 1 Equipment Overview XLi Time and Frequency System Description and Features The XLi provides high precision time and frequency signals lts modular design allows customization for a wide range of applications In its standard configuration the XLi functions as a Time Code Unit which receives an IRIG time code input synchronizes its internal oscillator to that input and produces time code and frequency outputs When paired with its internal timing optimized GPS receiver the XLi provides 1x1071 frequency output accuracy and better than 30 nS RMS accuracy to UTC USNO The XLi is available in a 19 inch 1U or 2U chassis with rack mount ears for installation This new series of Time and Frequency Clock incorporates a flexible architecture to meet the most demanding clock synchronization requirements The Model XLi incorporates a dual redundant reference source design that enables high availability of the clock source To achieve high availability the user configures the XLi with dual independent GPS receivers and antenn
304. sing the required fields ERROR Invalid Command You have entered an invalid command Recovery Action Consult the manual for the correct command and re enter ERROR Can t create netdevice NAME The XLi can not create the device needed to map the host to a drive Recovery Action Restart the Unit If this error message persists contact Symmetricom Technical Customer Service ERROR Can t set host NAME ip ADDRESS You have incorrectly entered a parameter or there is no room currently in the Host table for another IP Address XLi Time amp Frequency System 231 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Recovery Action Verify correct parameter values If correct restart the XLi If this error message persists contact Symmetricom Technical Customer Service ERROR Action get or set is not specified You have omitted the get or set parameter from the F100 NTP Configuration command Recovery Action Re enter the command specifying the desired action ERROR Can t open source file lt NAME gt The file containing the needed data is unavailable Recovery Action Check file location and directory names to verify the path is accurate then re enter the command ERROR Can t open dest file lt NAME gt The destination file is unavailable Recovery Action Check file location and directory names to verify the path is accurate then re enter the command ERROR Can t write file lt NAME gt Data from the source f
305. stemNotification trap is sent when the state of an object in the systemStatusDetail group changes and the corresponding mask object in the configDataMasks group is enabled Future Expansion This section outlines the possibilities for future expansion of the TrueTime Enterprise MIB The general overview is that new objects may be added to any location Existing objects may not be altered in order 276 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H to maintain backward compatibility There are two varieties of expansions to consider additional products and additional features within an existing product This model makes adding additional products and maintaining compatibility a straightforward process Each additional product will be given a branch in the tree under enterprises Truetime products For now we have only enterprises Truetime products xli and enterprises Truetime products nic56k Future products will take the form enterprises Truetime products product XXX Each product will use enterprises Truetime products product XXX as its system object identifier Each product will also define an enterprises Truetime products product XXX xxxTrap subgroup for the definition of all enterprise specific traps that can be generated by that product Making additions to the XLi product MIB is also a straightforward task with several caveats The first is that additions may be made but the object identifier and the semantics of exis
306. string to the Serial Network port F78 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SP gt TEST lt SP gt lt SEL gt where F ASCII character F 78 function number SP ASCII space character B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TEST ASCII character to denote test mode selection SEL ENABLE or DISABLE lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample entry F78 B2 TEST ENABLE lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 01 VALUE OUT OF RANGE if the input string was in the correct format but contained a value probably numeric that was out of the range of acceptable values The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 02 SYNTAX if it receives a string in an incorrect format The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 03 BAD MISSING FIELD if the input string lacks a required field The Serial Network port will respond with the message ERROR 04 BAD DATA TIMEOUT CONDITION if option card does not respond to the XLi fast enough Re enter the command to receive the data XLi Time amp Frequency System 115 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F90 Code Output Configuration Use function F90 to configure the time code output format IRIG A IRIG B IRIG B120 IEEE 1344 or NA
307. sword In a network port session F100 P changes the password of the user you logged in as operator or guest In a serial port session F100 P changes the password of the operator user See Command Line Interface on page 38 Valid password size is from no characters to 64 characters If more than 64 characters are entered F100 P truncates the string to 64 characters When selecting a password use appropriate levels password security for the XLi s operating environment Examples include Mixing random alpha and numeric characters Avoiding words or word combinations that can be found in a dictionary To change the user password enter F100 lt S gt P lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number lt S gt space P specify Password command CR inputline terminator The XLi responds ENTER NEW USER PASSWORD When you enter the new password the XLi responds CONFIRM NEW USER PASSWORD Enter the same new password again to confirm the spelling If the same new password has been entered twice The XLi responds 134 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H OK lt CR gt lt LF gt In this case the new password will be used for the next login However if the new password is entered differently the second time The XLi responds ERROR PASSWORDS DO NOT MATCH NEW PASSWORD REJECTED F100 PI PING Use function F100
308. t To change the PTTI Output option card BCD Time Mode selection send the following send the following string to the Serial Network port F77 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SP gt TM lt SP gt lt OUT gt lt LT gt where F ASCII character F TT function number lt SP gt ASCII space character B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TM ASCII character to denote Time Mode selection lt OUT gt UTC LOCAL STANDARD or GPS lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample entry F77 B2 TM LOCAL lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt 110 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To obtain the PTTI Output option board BCD output format information send the following string to the Serial Network port F77 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt BCD lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character 7T function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 BCD ASCII character for BCD output format request lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample request F77 B2 BCD lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F77 B2 BCD ABBREV lt CR gt lt LF gt To chan
309. t Pin Output 5 80 s of days 30 1 s of min 6 40 s of days 31 40 s of sec 7 20 s of days 32 20 s of sec 8 10 s of days 33 10 s of sec 9 1KPPS Strobe 34 8 s of sec 10 8 s of days 35 4 s of sec 11 4 s of days 36 2 s of sec 12 2 s of days 37 1 s of sec 13 1 s of days 38 800 s of msec 14 Time Quality Bit 2 39 400 s of msec 15 Time Quality Bit 3 40 200 s of msec 16 1PPS Strobe 41 100 s of msec 17 Time Quality Bit 4 42 80 s of msec 18 20 s of hours 43 40 s of msec 19 10 s of hours 44 20 s of msec 20 8 s of hours 45 10 s of msec 21 4 s of hours 46 8 s of msec 22 2 s of hours 47 4 s of msec 23 1 s of hours 48 2 s of msec 24 40 s of min 49 1 s of msec 25 20 s of min 50 Time Quality Bit 1 TIME QUALITY INDICATORS The XLi provides an estimate of the worst case error based on the user entered Time Quality Flags This is indicated by each of the four time quality lines changing to the high state in turn as the worst case error exceeds the threshold for that line The time error may be determined from the table below The first column shows the pin number of the rear panel 50 pin connector The second column shows the time error threshold at the transition from low to high on that pin 200 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H TIME QUALITY INDICATORS Table 5 PIN State Threshold 50 Goes High First
310. t SP gt TM lt SP gt lt OUT gt lt LT gt where F ASCII character F 78 function number SP ASCII space character B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows XLi Time amp Frequency System 113 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TM ASCII character to denote Time Mode selection lt OUT gt UTC LOCAL STANDARD or GPS LT line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample entry F77 B2 TM LOCAL lt CR gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Response OK lt CR gt lt LF gt To obtain the Parallel BCD option board test mode information send the following string to the Serial Network port F78 lt SP gt B lt N gt lt SEP gt TEST lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character 78 function number SP ASCII space character one or more B ASCII character to denote Option Bay number follows lt N gt Option Bay Number 1 through 10 TEST ASCII character for test mode request lt LT gt line terminator for output strings a carriage return and line feed or for input strings a carriage return only Sample request F78 B2 TEST lt CR gt lt LF gt Response F78 B2 TEST DISABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt 114 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To change the Parallel BCD test mode selection send the following send the following
311. t Transmitted Timestamp Accuracy 10 milliseconds Leap Indicator After the XLi has entered a holdover state flywheeling on its internal oscillator or Aux Ref while a time reference is absent for n hours the Leap Indicator transitions to 11 and the Stratum Level stays at 1 n is dependent upon the XLi reference oscillator When an internal phase error within the NTP server is greater than 1 millisecond the Leap Indicator will transition to unsynchronized 11 This can take a very long time when an OCXO or Rb is installed in the XLi XLi Operational State Stratum Ll Power ON 1 11 GPS Locked 1 00 GPS Unlocked 1 00 GPS Unlocked aftern 1 11 hours n is dependent upon the XLi reference oscillator Editing ntp conf Note The XLi is a Stratum 1 NTP server Therefore it does not support NTP peering in which a time server gets time information by sending an NTP query to another time server Entering valid IP addresses for the server parameters e g server 216 210 169 40 in ntp conf does not enable peering in the XL i The current text of ntp conf is as follows XLi Time amp Frequency System 283 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H WARNING Microsoft Internet Explorer complications 1 Do not use a full colon character even in comments 2 If this file does not submit it has too many characters in it and you must shorten this file Do this by eliminating the pound sign comments
312. t from a remote location enter F100 LOCK lt CR gt 124 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number S space LOCK specify LOCK command CR input line terminator For example enter F100 LOCK lt CR gt To users on the serial port XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Or to users on the network port XLi gives the following response and then closes the port GOODBYE lt CR gt lt LF gt To unlock remote lockout use the command line interface on the serial port to enter F100 UNLOCK lt CR gt Or use the keypad display s F100 F100 L Remote Lockout Command Line Only Not available in display Use function F100 L to display the status of the remote lock For more information see F100 LOCK above To view the lock setting for remote access enter F100 L lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 100 unitfunction number S space L specify L command CR input line terminator XLi Time amp Frequency System 125 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H XLi responds F100 L LOCKED lt CR gt lt LF gt or F100 L UNLOCKED lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 ST Self Test Status Use function F100 ST to display whether the Self Test Status parameters passed or failed The parameters include flash memory checksum test nonvolatile NV RAM Serial Port and version check To query the self test status
313. ta value is not to be transmitted Disabling data transmission is a useful feature if a non addressable display is connected to the display port By placing a minus sign in front of 4 of the 5 data value addresses only one data value will be transmitted thus allowing the user to select a value to be displayed on the non addressable display The UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key is used to change the sign of the address The LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys may be used to move the cursor Prior to accepting the displayed value if the originally displayed value was the correct value pressing the CLR button will restore it Pressing the ENTER button accepts the displayed value The next data value address is then displayed until all five addresses have been entered The address range is from 0 to 255 Placing a in front of the address enables the data for transmission while placing a in front of the address inhibits the data from being transmitted The settings should be set as follows PORT DATA ADDR CONFIG TIME DEVIATION ADDR 022 PORT DATA ADDR CONFIG FREQ DEVIATION ADDR 021 PORT DATA ADDR CONFIG SUYSTEM FREQUENCY ADDR 020 PORT DATA ADDR CONFIG LOCAL TIME ADDR 024 PORT DATA ADDR CONFIG SYSTEM TIMEADDR 023 Command Line The FTM can output the following data once per second or on demand Local Time Time Deviation Frequency Deviation e System Frequency S
314. tem XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Available From K N S W K N S W K N S W K N W K N S W K N S N S N S N S K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W K N S W Description Set the time offset for Standard and Local time Apply a 12 or 24 hour format to the Front Panel Display to F8 F9 and F90 Set the time and date when not already provided by a reference source Configure the main serial port settings Set the thresholds for each of the four time quality flags Lock keypad access to the XLi s functions When locked F6 is the only function available from the keypad Output the time once per second to the command line Output the time when triggered to the command line Change the format of the time output by F8 and F9 View the current estimated worst case time error View the XLi s software version information Manage the Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor card Set the time code type and time reference for specific ports on the optional Multicode Output card s Set the frequencies generated by specific ports on the optional N 8 Frequency Synthesizer card s View the Latitude Longitude Altitude or geocentric X Y Z coordinates of one or more GPS antennas Compensate for the delay caused by the length of the GPS antenna cable Use F52 to adjust timing outputs Compensate for the length of the distribution cable on J2 45 F53 GPS Operation Mode
315. the Default Gateway and restart the unit enter F100 S G S nnn nnn nnn nnn CR 122 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number S space IP specify IP command nnn nnn nnn nnn dotted decimal address 0 to 255 CR input line terminator For example enter F100 G 206 54 0 17 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt ESETING THE UNIT lt CR gt lt LF gt PLEASE WAIT lt CR gt lt LF gt ps To obtain the Default Gateway of the unit Standard network port enter F100 G lt CR gt The XLi responds F100 G lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where lt nnn nnn nnn nnn gt is the dotted decimal address notation An example of the response is F100 G 206 54 0 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 IC Network Port Settings Use function F100 IC to review the entire configuration of the standard network port enter F100 lt S gt IC lt CR gt An example of the response is F100 IP 206 54 0 21 SM 255 255 255 240 G 206 54 0 17 lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 BASET 10 100 BASE T The BASET command displays the data rate of the Ethernet port On the current version of the Main CPU card 86 8000 running the current system software version the user also has the option of XLi Time amp Frequency System 123 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H selecting between 10 Base T and A
316. the MENU key Open a command line session with the XLi Use the F100 PN or F100 P commands as needed and then reboot the XLi again 136 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F108 Oscillator Configuration Use function F108 to display the type of oscillator being used TCVCXO OCXO HIGH High Stability OCXO RUBIDIUM For more descriptions of the oscillator types see P7 Oscillators on page 223 Command Line The oscillator type is defined by the hardware configuration of the clock and is not configured through the command line or keypad display user interfaces To request the oscillator configuration enter F108 lt S gt lt CR gt The XLi responds F108 lt S gt OSCILLATOR lt S gt CONFIG lt S gt lt OSC gt lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 108 Function number lt S gt ASCII space character one or more lt CR gt Carriage Return equivalent to pressing the Enter key on a keyboard lt osc gt Oscillator type TCVCXO OCXO HIGH_STAB_OCXO or RUBIDIUM For example enter the following string F108 lt CR gt The XLi responds example F108 OSCILLATOR CONFIG HIGH STAB OCXO lt CR gt lt LF gt F110 J1 Input Time Code TIET Note Time Interval Event Time TIET is an optional feature If purchased at the same time as the XLi it comes enabled on the system To purchase this option after you have purchased the XLi con tact Symm
317. the default or home directory The XLi Web Browser can be used to upgrade the system firmware and is the recommended method XLi Time amp Frequency System 239 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Open a Command Line Session on the XLi Note The XLi and FTP server need to be connected by a TCP IP network Ideally they should be on an isolated subnet Connecting them over a network with multiple hops or one with heavy network traffic raises the possibility that the system software files could be corrupted yielding the XLi inoperable Telnet to the XLi over the network For example at your workstations command line type telnet 192 168 46 10 When prompted log in to the unit using the operator s username and password the user name and password are usually operator and janus Upgrade the Firmware Command Format When issuing the firmware upgrade commands use the following format F100 lt command gt lt ftp server ip address gt lt relative path gt lt file ext gt If the FTP server is on your workstation tp server ip address gt is the IP address of your workstation relative path is a subdirectory inside the anonymous user s home directory on the FTP server If there is no subdirectory i e if the upgrade files are sitting in anonymous user s home directory drop relative path from the command line For example if c ftoworkfiles is the anonymous user s home directory and the upgrad
318. time the 1 kPPS line is high the data lines from milliseconds up will not be changing states and are therefore available for reading Parallel BCD uSec with Time Quality 87 8090 1 This Parallel BCD module provides a microsecond parallel time output The BCD time data consists of 54 lines representing 100 s of days to units of microseconds four time quality lines that provide an XLi Time amp Frequency System 201 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H estimate of the time error and three data valid strobes The data and strobes are provided by combining the signals from two connectors OUTPUT Day of year time quality flags 1PPS strobe and 1kPPS strobe Outputs TTL LVTTL Levels 4mA source or sink Logic Low lt 0 4 V Logic High gt 2 4 V Qty 1 Connector Panel mounted female 50 pin D and 25 pin D connector Physical Double high option bay CPU Aware Yes Compatibility Legacy XL DC Parallel BCD Millisecond Module 86 390 1 1 PPS STROBE This line goes to the high state between the second and 100 ns after the second It remains high for 500 ms 1 kPPS STROBE This line goes to the high state between the millisecond and 100 ns after the millisecond strobe It remains high for 500 us 1 MPPS STROBE This line goes to the high state between the microsecond and 100 ns after the microsecond strobe It remains high for 500 ns 50 pin D MILLISECONDS CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT Table
319. ting objects may not be altered A likely place for additions is under the systemStatusDetail group as addition system objects are defined A place holder group xliOptionCards has been defined but currently has no accessible members This group will be used for the management of optional add on cards It is suggested that each sub group under xliOptionCards be defined as a table to allow for the possibility of multiple option cards of a particular type Glossary of SNMP Related Terms Depreciation In SNMP when an SNMP variable or group of variables is no longer recommended for use they are listed as deprecated in the formal definition of the MIB Users are often times still allowed to use this data but the MIB s authors for one reason or another no longer recommend it Enterprise MIB See Private Enterprise MIB IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority This is the group at IETF that is in charge of assigning Internet related numbers like Ethernet addresses TCP UDP port numbers and SNMP Private Enterprise MIB numbers IETF Internet Engineering Task Force The group responsible for standardizing numerous Internet communication protocols Management agent An Internet connected remote host that accumulates the raw data that is entered into the MIB and Enterprise MIB for that host This data is at some point transmitted to a Management station In other network applications this would be called a network server of the SNMP protocol Mana
320. ting the SNMP and NTP configuration files Notes e See A Using F100 Configuration on page 235 NTP is an optional feature If purchased at the same time as the XLi it comes enabled on the system To purchase this option after you have purchased the XLi contact Symmetricom Sales See H Sales and Customer Assistance on page 295 F100 CONFIG GET instructs the XLi unit to transfer its NTP and SNMP configuration files to an FTP server After editing the NTP and SNMP configuration files on the FTP server the user transfers them back to the XLi using the F100 CONFIG SET command Open a Telnet session with the XLi and enter the commands below Replace lt P Address gt with that of the workstation FTP Server Leave lt subdir gt blank unless you have a specific reason for placing the files in a subdirectory of the anonymous user s home directory To get the NTP config files type gt 100 config ntp get host lt IP Address gt dir lt subdir gt lt CR gt To get the SNMP config file type gt 100 config snmp get host lt IP Address gt dir lt subdir gt lt CR gt To get both the SNMP and NTP config files type gt 100 config ntp snmp get host lt IP Address gt dir lt subdir gt lt CR gt Here s an example of a successful SNMP and NTP config file transfer gt f100 config ntp snmp get host 192 168 0 1 dir Host config ip 192 168 0 1 already configured Source file config snmp conf bytes read 1275 Dest file snmp conf b
321. tion Delay Range 0 to 99999 uS in 1 uS steps Factory setting 1 uS Compensates for delay caused by cable length on the J1 input IRIG Mode Sync Gen Error Bypass Off 1 10 Frames Factory setting 3 frames Is used when the IRIG input is intermittent or has a low signal to noise ratio SNR This allows the time code input to flywheel for the specified number of invalid time code frames before F110 generates an alarm Off means the F73 IRIG input alarm will alarm on the first invalid time code frame 1 10 means the F73 IRIG input alarm will alarm after it detects 1 10 consecutive invalid time code frames When TIET is selected for J1 Input Configuration F110 presents the following series of choices Input Impedance 50 100 Input Polarity Positive only Upon changing the settings the last display prompt asks For J1 Notes 138 Save Changes Yes No Yes applies the changes No cancels the changes specifications see J1 Input Time Code or Time Interval Event Time on page 9 Time Code The XLi expects time code input that provides UTC in 24 hour format If the time code does not provide UTC in 24 hour format e g it uses standard local or GPS time or is in 12 hour format the XLi s internal clock will be set to the wrong time when it uses the time code reference and its time outputs will be similarly affected Time Code IRIG and NASA 36 time code don t contain year information Ent
322. tion of GPS antenna where 2147483647 is the North Pole 2147483647 is the South Pole and 0 is the equator To calculate the latitude in radians use the following formula gpsLatitude PI 2 2 31 1 longitude in radians For degrees gpsLatitude 90 2 31 1 latitude in degrees Note latitude varies from PI 2 to P1 2 in radians and 90 to 90 in degrees gps 8 Gl actsGroupValid OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 1 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION A test flag indicating if data contained in this SNMP ACTS group is valid or not This flag equals 1 when ACTS is used as the time synchronization source and 0 for all other sources acts 1 actsBaudRate OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER baud300 300 baud1200 1200 baud9600 9600 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Indicates the baud rate setting for the ACTS modem The ACTS dial up service accepts 300 or 1200 baud Note this is a rare case where faster is not better and 300 baud yields the best time accuracy acts 2 252 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H actsFailRedial OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER 0 9999 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION When the dial up session fails to connect this is the time in seconds to wait to try again acts 3
323. to the antenna signal connector b Connect the preamplifier to the adapter cable C Connect the receiver signal cable to the preamplifier 3 Reconnect the antenna by tightening the four captive antenna housing screws Make sure that the O Ring is correctly sitting in its groove and that the Key tab and groove are engaged GPS Signal Strength Requirements Refer to Figure 4 GPS Signal Strength Requirements The required external gain at the GPS receiver s ANTENNA connector is between 20 and 36 dB For example the Symmetricom GPS antenna provides approximately 41 dB of gain If one subtracts the 16 21 dB loss of the 150 foot RG 59 coax antenna cable supplied by Symmetricom the external gain reaching the ANTENNA connector is between 20 and 36 dB which meets the requirement Abide by the minimum input gain requirements when using other cable types and GPS antennas XLi Time amp Frequency System 21 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Other factors such as radiation coverage VSWR and input impedance also affect system performance Symmetricom recommends using the standard antenna and cable provided Figure 4 GPS Signal Strength Requirements GPS related Accessories The following options can be obtained from Symmetricom to e Protect against lightning and field induced electrical surges e Connect multiple GPS receivers to a single antenna e Extend the range of the GPS antenna cable Lightning Arrestor Lightning may dama
324. tor Statistics on page 91 provides the DAC value Command Line To determine if the time quality characters are enabled and what the thresholds are enter F5 lt CR gt XLi responds The XLi responds F5 lt S gt lt STATE gt lt SEP gt lt FLAG gt lt SEP gt lt FLAG gt lt SEP gt lt FLAG gt lt SEP gt lt FLAG gt lt CR gt lt LF gt 54 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where F ASCII character F 05 function number S ASCII space character one or more SEP One or more separator characters either space comma or tab STATE ENABLE or DISABLE FLAG one error threshold in nanoseconds 1 to 11 digits with or without leading zeros CR carriage return character lt LF gt line feed character For example to display the time quality status and flags enter F5 lt CR gt XLi responds F5 DISABLE 00000001000 00000010000 00000100000 00001000000 lt CR gt lt LF gt To enable time quality reporting and change the thresholds of the time quality flags enter F5 ENABLE 2000 20000 200000 2000000 lt CR gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Note Leading zeros aren t required for to enter new settings but are included in readouts of the settings F6 Keypad Lock F6 Keypad Lock enables or disables the keypad preventing accidental changes to the XLi s settings When enabled the display responds KEYPAD LOCKOUT BY FUNC
325. tus of the clock e Clock PLL Phase Locked Loop Locked or unlocked e Clock Status Locked or unlocked followed by the clock reference source e Primary power supply OK or failed Secondary power supply OK or failed Rubidium oscillator if installed OK or fault Command Line To display the status of the fault detectors enter F72 lt CR gt The XLi responds F72 lt SP gt PLL lt CLK PLL gt lt SP gt CLK lt CLK STATUS gt lt SP gt lt CLK REF gt lt SP gt PWR1 lt PWR1 STATUS gt lt SP gt PWR2 PWR2 STATUS gt lt SP gt OSC OSC STATUS lt CR gt lt LF gt where F ASCII character F 72 function number SP ASCII space character one or more CLK PLL gt Clock PLL Phase Loop Lock status LOCKED or UNLOCKED CLK STATUS Clock Status LOCKED or UNLOCKED to the reference source shown When the value of the oscillator s predicted worst case time error F13 Time Error on page 51 exceeds the user configurable value for F73 Time Threshold F72 CLOCK STATUS becomes UNLOCKED Otherwise the F72 CLOCK STATUS remains LOCKED lt CLK REF Clock reference source GPS PRI GPS SEC IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 AUX REF HQ PPS PRI or HQ PPS SEC lt PWR1 STATUS Primary Power Supply status OK or FAILED PWR2 STATUS Secondary Power Supply status OK or FAILED OSC STATUS Rubidium oscillator status OK or FAILED if installed lt CR gt lt LF gt outp
326. ue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H other ACTS failure types acts 8 actsFailedInit OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated Gl DESCRIPTION Time server s internal modem failed to initialize If this is excessive it may indicate a time server hardware failure acts 9 actsNoDialTone OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated Gl DESCRIPTION Time server s internal modem found no dial tone This may be caused by a broken phone line to the time server acts 10 actsNoCarrier OBJECT TYP SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Time server s internal modem found no carrier No modem was found at the other end and maybe the phone number for ACTS is wrong ii f acts 11 Gl actsBusyLine OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Time server s internal modem found ACTS line busy iie acts 12 actsNoAnswer OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The remote ACTS mode did not answer the call acts 13 actsBadReply OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX Counter32 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The syntax of the reply from remote modem was incorrect possibly due to line noise acts 14 E 254 XLi Time 8
327. uency Steps 1 PPS Frequency Control via Keypad Serial or Network Port Accuracy Refer to section 5 Time and Frequency Accuracy Synchronization Frequency locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Jitter Edge to Edge 1 nS Number of Outputs 4 each Output Drive RS 422 levels into 100 Ohms to 50 MPPS Output Drive RS 422 levels into 39 Ohms to 25 MPPS Output Connectors Triax female Trompeter BJ 77 CPU Aware Yes XLi Time amp Frequency System 173 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 86 708 1 The N 8 Frequency Synthesizer card s four independently programmable outputs generate pulse rates from 8 kPPS through 8192 kPPS in 8 kPPS steps The N 8 Frequency Synthesizer is configured from the front panel keypad and command line interfaces using F44 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer page 73 It can also be managed using the web interface Specifications Channels 4 Channels independently programmable Output Pulse Rates 8 kPPS through 8192 kPPS in 8 kPPS steps Factory setting 8 KPPS Output Drive RS 422 into 500 Wave Form Square wave Synchronization Frequency locked to the XLi s internal 10 MHz oscillator Connector Triax female Trompeter BJ 77 CPU Aware No Installation N 8 cards that were not factory installed in the XLi require additional installation if there will be more than one Multicode or N 8 Frequency Synthesizer card in the XLi Each card needs to have a unique card ID number The card ID num
328. uency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H gpsNumTrackSats OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 8 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION The number of GPS satellites tracked gps 2 Ld gpsNumCurrentSats OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 8 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Current number of GPS satellites used in position and time fix calculations The number of satellites available depends on how long the time server has been up the time of day and the total amount of clear sky as seen from the GPS antenna Because of the high frequency of GPS radio signals GPS antennas must have unobstructed line of sight from the antenna to the satellite to receive data gps 3 E gpsSatTrackMode OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 3 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Mode of operation for satellite tracking See section 3 20 of the users manual for a complete description of these modes Generally modes 0 and 1 are used for time applications Mode 2 is useful for more accurate position information when the unit is stationary or slowly moving and mode 3 is for accurate position information when the unit is moving quickly gps 4 El gpsSatMaxSigStrength OBJECT TYP SYNTAX INTEGER 0 30 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION Strongest signal strength of all tracking s
329. uetime SMIv2 mib xli SMIv2 mib xli MainCard SMIv2 mib and xliSystem SMIv2 mib When xliSystem SMlv2 mib is loaded a dialog box with the title Load Trap Type Notification Type macro will appear Click the lt OK gt button to add the trap definition into the OpenView event sys tem Click the OK button again to confirm the action Click the Close button to exit the Load Unload MIBs SNMP dialogue box Configure Traps 1 10 Select the menu item Options gt Event Configuration A pop window titled Event Configuration will appear In the Event Configuration window scroll through the Enterprises list to the bottom and select xli In the Events for Enterprise xli select the alarmSystemNotification entry Then select the menu item Edit gt Events gt Modify A popup titled Modify Events will appear In the Modify Events popup click the Event Message tab Under Actions select the Log and display in category In the Event Log Message field enter XLI System Trap Do not enter the quotation marks Select the menu item Options gt MIB Application Builder SNMP A popup titled MIB Application Builder SNMP will appear In the MIB Application Builder SNMP popup select the menu item Edit New A popup titled New MIB Application will appear Enter xlistatus in the Application ID field and the Application Title field Leave Applicati
330. ugh the normal startup process F100 J Factory Mode Jumper Use function F100 J command to test the state of the factory mode jumper A value of 1 means the jumper is installed and a value of 0 means the jumper is not The factory mode jumper can be identified because it is the only three prong jumper on the CPU card and is labelled J3 Units are shipped to the customer with no jumper installed The jumper is used by Symmetricom technicians to test and configure the unit With this jumper installed the operation and integrity of the XLi are compromised Warning Do not run the XLi with the jumper unless specifically directed to do so by a qualified Symmetricom technician To test the state of the factory mode jumper F100 lt S gt J lt CR gt 132 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H where 100 lt S gt J CR ASCII character F unit function number Space specify User Name command input line terminator The XLi responds F100 J FACTORY MOD or F100 J FACTORY MOD F100 K IL L Reboot E 1 lt CR gt lt E 0 lt CR gt lt LE LE Use function F100 K I L L to reboot the unit Use F100 K I L L after upgrading the system firmware K ILL is a case sensitive command When entering this command use all capital letters and put spaces between each letter To reboot the unit enter F100 K lt S gt I lt S gt L lt S gt L lt CR gt For ex
331. uide Even though the Aux Ref input is a reference source it is not treated as a Primary or Secondary ref erence source by the XLi If Aux Ref is available the XLi clock uses it in place of its internal oscillator while no reference source is available PLL Status Locked or Unlocked The PLL indicator reports Locked during normal operation while the system clock s PLL is locked to the internal oscillator The PLL indicator reports Unlocked if the XLi clock s hardware PLL has failed While the PLL indicator is Unlocked all XLi clock timing parameters are unreliable and should not be used Contact Symmetri com Global Customer Assistance LPN PLL Status Locked or Unlocked The LPN Low Phase Noise PLL indicator reports Locked during normal operation while the LPN oscil lator on an LPN Card is locked to the XLi s internal oscillator The LPN PLL indicator reports Unlocked for several minutes after the unit is started while the LPN oscillator on the card warms up This is not a significant error and if needed can be prevented by extending the duration of the Power On Alarm Suppress If the LPN PLL indicator reports Unlocked at any time other than the warm up period the LPN card s PLL has failed or the LPN card s oscillator can no longer be steered to the internal XLi oscillator All out puts from the LPN card are unreliable and should not be used Contact Symmetricom Global Customer Assistance When multiple LPN ca
332. ured is in the range of 95 260 VAC and that the power cord is properly seated into the AC line connector of the FTM card rear panel not the line cord used for XLi power e fFrequency Deviation is reading 9 and Time Deviation is incrementing 1 second second then the problem might be that no line voltage signal is reaching U6 pin 41 Turn off the power to the XLi and remove the power connector to the FTM card Unscrew the securing screws and remove the lid of the XLi e Use static sensitive component handling procedures when handling the FTM PCB Install the FTM card board back into the XLi and replace the four rear panel retaining screws Replace the XLi lid and retaining screws Replace the line cord into the FTM rear panel and re apply power to the XLi If Frequency Deviation is reading 9 and Time Deviation continues to increment 1 second second then the FTM must be sent back to the factory for repair If any event occurred coincidentally to a failure of the option please relate the event to the factory The information may be useful in repairing the option and allow for improvements in the design of the FTM card e fnoinformation is being transmitted from the FTM RS 422 Display Port ensure that the baud 198 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H rate number of data bits parity and number of stop bits is configured correctly See FTM RS 422 Display Port on page 197
333. us of the N 1 card F123 Have Quick Input 1 PPS Sync K N S W Configure and display status of Have Quick 1 PPS card Configuration F126 Options Key Entry K N S Enable an XLi option by entering a software key F128 Have Quick Output Configuration K N S W Configure and display status of Have Quick Output board a The web interface makes it convenient to edit the SNMP and NTP configuration files directly in the browser Sym metricom recommends this approach versus the more complicated approach of transferring configuration files to an FTP server b The web interface makes it convenient to upgrade system firmware directly from the web browser Symmetricom recommends this approach versus the serial network command line method XLi Time amp Frequency System 47 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H F1 Time Zone Offset Use function F1 to display and set the time zone offset between your Standard Time zone and Universal Time Coordinated UTC Refer to F World Map of Time Zones on page 291 F1 is the basis for Standard Time and Local Time used by F69 For an expanded explanation of Local Standard UTC and GPS time see F69 Time Mode on page 89 For example to set the time zone for Pacific Standard Time UTC 8 hours set the value in F1 to 08 00 Do not include the 1 hour Daylight Saving Time DST offset in this value DST is handled separately by F66 Daylight Saving Time DST Mode on page 84 Becau
334. ut Configuration 0 0c eee ee 165 6 OP GO Cards coe RULS ia E S PX edo e AAA 167 Expansion Module 87 8034 1 87 8034 2 20 0 ccc cee eee 168 TRIG Code Out 5 i de AA Gee eas SURE A eS 168 Ms ooh tea diese tb Pad Soa aan GP al ai RES Ra alee kes 168 WRAL MM A ites enh eee PD EDEN hrs salt 168 Optional Programmable Pulse orcas 169 Alarm Relay 87 8034 2 ancien AS EAS 169 Configuring the Expansion Module 00 c eee ee eee ees 169 Multicode Output 87 6002 XL1 20 ec e 171 Specifications iu runde a web vn Me ee paiT 171 vi XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Installati n 2 52 ti A SAR d 171 Adjusting Amplitude and Modulation Ratio ooooo ooooooooooo 172 N 1 Frequency Synthesizer 87 8022 viera qu y Euer e ba 173 SDECITICAUOHS as 5 ese e ar uus M e Gat VES SC Ns ee V S aes 173 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer 86 708 1 ooo oooooomomomommmm m r o 174 Sp cifications Loo avdadiivas T ue e d ed ETE a ed MODE d 174 Installation eed ee ev acta tex ex ERG eR AGIR Scd RUE eR UR aes 174 Low Phase Noise 5 MHz Output 87 8009 5 2 0 0 eee eee eee 176 Tit ORG A tea ee Meats aa A a quA se 176 Specifications A cet eg ee da da et lad 176 Low Phase Noise 10 MHz Output 87 8009 10 2 0 2 20 0 0c eee eee eee 177 o RP ON 177 Specifications a A a 177 1 5 10 MHz Sine MPPS Square Output 86 8008 oooooooooooooo 177 Introduction ii wo pea oL A EA 177 A A
335. ut line terminator Please note e Clock Status in F72 and F73 function similarly but use different thresholds to determine whether the status is LOCKED or UNLOCKED F72 Clock Status uses the F73 Time Threshold value F73 Clock Status uses 150 nS when the reference source is GPS and 15 uS when the refer 92 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H ence source is non GPS i e IRIG A IRIG B NASA 36 AUX REF HQ PPS PRI or HQ PPS SEC Neither F72 nor F73 require that F73 Time Error is enabled e The Status Display page 32 on the front panel shows F73 Clock Status For example enter F72 lt CR gt The XLi responds F72 CLOCK PLL LOCKED CLOCK STATUS LOCKED GPS PRI PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY OK SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY OK Note lt is recommended that the Time Threshold is set to zero for the following reasons If the Time Threshold is set to zero default values of Time Threshold for each type of reference source are associative to their respective reference sources For example the GPS reference source will have 150 nS Time Threshold associated with it and the IRIG Time Code reference source would have 15 uS Time Threshold associated with it When a reference source is changed it will have its associated Time Threshold associated with it This prevents errors being generated by having one Time Threshold applied to several different reference sources as would happen as follows If t
336. uto which provides a 100 Base T connection where appropriate If you have questions about your unit contact H Sales and Customer Assistance page 295 To display the current Base T setting enter F100 lt S gt BASET lt CR gt where F ASCII character F 100 unit function number S Space BASET specify Base T command CR input line terminator The XLi responds F100 BASET 10T lt CR gt lt LF gt To set the Ethernet port to automatically negotiate the maximum connection speed enter F100 lt SP gt BASET lt SP gt AUTO lt Enter gt To set the Ethernet port s connection speed to 10 100 Base T enter F100 lt SP gt BASET lt SP gt 10 lt Enter gt XLi responds OK lt CR gt lt LF gt RESETING THE UNIT lt CR gt lt LF gt PLEASE WAIT lt CR gt lt LF gt F100 L LOCK UNLOCK Remote Lockout Use function F100 LOCK or UNLOCK to enable disable TELNET access to the command line interface through the network port Use function F100 L to display the status of Remote Lockout Remote Lockout can also be set using F100 on the keypad display interface The factory setting is Unlocked To unlock remote lockout use the keypad display the serial port command line interface Warning F100 L and F100 LOCK terminates any active TELNET sessions and prevents future TELNET sessions To unlock F100 L or F100 LOCK use the serial port command line interface or the keypad display To lock the uni
337. w 32 bit number representing a signed 32 bit fixed point number indicating the maximum error relative to the primary reference source in seconds with fraction point between bits 15 and 16 Only positive values greater than zero are possible Note a primary time server s outgoing NTP packet will have its root dispersion field set to ntpSysRootDisp ntp 13 ntpSysRefClockIdent OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 4 MAX ACCESS read only STATUS deprecated DESCRIPTION This is a four byte ASCII string identifying the particular reference clock In the case of stratum 0 unspecified or stratum 1 primary reference this is a four octet left justified zero padded ASCII string While not enumerated as part of the NTP specification the following are suggested ASCII identifiers XLi Time amp Frequency System 249 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Stratum Code Meaning 0 DCN DCN routing protocol 0 NIST NIST public modem 0 TSP TSP time protocol 0 DTS Digital Time Service 1 ATOM Atomic clock calibrated 1 VLF VLF radio OMEGA etc 1 callsign Generic radio di LORC LORAN C radionavigation 1 GOES GOES UHF environment satellit 1 GPS GPS UHF satellite positioning 1 ACTS ACTS telephone modem dial up ii IRIG Inter Range Instrumentation Group signal Note for TrueTime time servers only GPS ACTS and IRIG are presently used Further a primary time s
338. wer Supply Status The Fault Detector monitors all three output voltages and provides a visual panel LED and fault status if any output voltage decreases by 10 Alarm Status LED Green LED on with no fault and AC power applied Green LED off with fault or no AC power applied Fan Exhaust 3 6 CFM 12 VDC Power Supply Option 87 8012 12 Input connector Removable three position screw terminal block Input voltage range 12 18 VDC 70 watts 12 amps Isolation ground Input is fully floating Either input polarity may be strapped to chassis ground at the input terminal block Isolation Input to output 500 VAC minimum Fan Exhaust 3 6CFM XLi Time amp Frequency System 225 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 24 VDC Power Input Option 87 8012 24 Input connector Removable three position screw terminal block Input voltage range 18 36 VDC 105 watts 8 amps Isolation ground Input is fully floating Either input polarity may be strapped to chassis ground at the input terminal block Isolation Input to output 500 VAC minimum Fan Exhaust 3 6CFM 48 VDC Power Input Option 87 8012 48 Input connector Removable three position screw terminal block Input voltage range 36 60 VDC 105 watts 4 amps Isolation ground Input is fully floating Either input polarity may be strapped to chassis ground at the input terminal block Isolation Input to output 500 VAC minimum Fan Exhaust 3 6CFM 226 XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi ma
339. xternal frequency over the interval The reciprocal of this period is compared to the nominal frequency to determine the fractional frequency offset The timestamp reported with the resulting measurement is the ending timestamp of the two phase readings used to make the measurement Since this ending timestamp is now the beginning timestamp for the next measurement there is no dead time in the measurements The reported timestamp resolution is sufficient to allow integrating the fractional frequency offset measurements to fully recover the relative phase of the external frequency source being measured versus the disciplined XLi internal or external oscillator Display Freq Meas appears as follows in the front panel display keypad XLi Time amp Frequency System 147 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H FREO OFFSET COUNT TX XXXXXX XX XXXXXX Where FREQ OFFSET x xxxxxx xx Is the fractional frequency offset measurement divided by the COUNT xxxxxxx measurement interval These measurements are displayed until a new F113 configuration is selected or another function performed Command Line To display the J3 Input Configuration enter F113 lt CR gt The XLi responds using the following formats F113 lt S gt DISABLE lt CR gt lt LF gt Or F113 lt S gt AUX REF lt S gt lt FREQ gt lt S gt lt IMP gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Or when the Frequency Measurement option is enabled F113 lt
340. y e g cMtpworkfilesV Open the product name directory You should see the firmware upgrade files you put there If either the product name directory or the firmware upgrade files aren t visible there s a problem with the FTP configuration Message gt Wrong File type You may be using the wrong firmware files for the product being upgraded This may be due to the incorrect files being place in the upgrade directory It may also be that the wrong directory was entered one for another product in the path information on the F100 command line Wrong file type is also associated with Can t open file errors see the preceding message Message Unit hangs on Burning Boot message Check that your IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway of the XLi are correctly configured XLi Time amp Frequency System 243 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H FAQ How does one check the unit s firmware version number Log on to the XLi and enter the following command gt F100 VER An example XLi response is F100 VER BOOTLOADER 192 8000 SOFTWARE 192 8001 FILE SYSTEM 192 8002v1 80 NVRAM VER 5 PROJ REV 11 80 The PROJ REV number is the firmware version number The number in FILE SYSTEM is the file system version number which may not be the same as the firmware version number How does one check the IP address subnet mask and default gateway of the XLi Log on to the XLi an
341. y Mode Jumper seleeeee eee eee 132 Fault Stats 12215226 nenoca a fre dh Dot eee ri as ode qoid 92 Firmware oar led mee ra e AAA M UR EE qus 1 117 Firmware Upgrade due ete dex A a ad 239 Fred Meas 2 EE EEE N E EEEE ds 10 146 Frequency and Time Deviation Monitor 63 192 Frequency Measurement 0 ccc eee eee eee es 10 146 Frequency Synthesizer Pas OSes a i A edu duod gta ee cen a 158 173 D E o E se NIN ees ROA eI A P le Mie UA E e eal 174 ET oae rends ase aec ret OI eaqui s Disc mu cd oue urs 192 FTM III Configuration ates tones oe D XG Pede uius Ua ER Pac 63 Function Reference es Peri cds e airis 45 Function Sumliaby 15 voce oA x EE OE EORR e e Ro UR ge RO ele 45 Future Expansion cs sets erra ace dun e DURER d 276 G CNET NEU NR A A A HEP EN 122 GALWAY visto deduce rs is a ee eee eGo 122 o ix coc eat dangle as aS ba y qid e ER des ed EOS S aa ek 233 GPS Antenna Cable Delay ooooooocooooooororr om 77 MIZ RSCOlVSl ea eee ves Woe aba ava Shope 191 Operation Mode 0 ccc ooo 80 RECOVER cs suere dab ee dae auntie a eb an a 222 Receiver Configuration 29 rd dua m exu eee RO E 154 Satellite O tarea ehh ad wea te odie ares SOR Ra als 81 Signal Strength Requirements llli el else 2 GPS RECEIVER tar usb NS Sd AS dudes Sa OR RU t 6 GPS Receiver Configuration o oo ooooooomooommoooo 154 GPS Receiver LLA XYZ Position
342. y after this message is sent OK Command accepted and processed as specified Goodbye The XLi has just terminated a session XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 233 This page was intentionally left blank 234 XLi Time Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H A Using F100 Configuration Configuring NTP amp SNMP Parameters F100 CONFIG instructs the XLi unit to transfer its NTP and SNMP configuration files to an FTP server so the user can edit them When finished editing the user transfers the config files back to the XLi using the F100 CONFIG command Overview of Steps e Set up an FTP server on your workstation Using the XLi s command line interface enter the F100 CONFIG get command The XLi transfers copies of its configuration files over the network to the FTP on your PC Edit the configuration files e Give the XLi a new command F100 CONFIG set The XLi retrieves copies of the edited configuration files from the FTP and overwrites it s current config files with the newly edited ones Set up the FTP Server To save time and trouble download a pre configured FTP server from http www ntp systems com zip warftpd1 zip and extract it to the C drive on your workstation Otherwise customize your existing FTP server setup as described in this section When performing these operations the user issues command line instructions to the XLi The XLi responds to those
343. ystem XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H Parallel BCD mSec Output with Time Quality 87 8090 Parallel BCD uSec with Time Quality 87 8090 1 Parallel BCD mSec Output with Unlock Status 87 8090 2 XLi Time 8 Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 43 44 This page intentionally left blank XLi Time amp Frequency System XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H 5 Function Reference Function Summary The following summary lists all the XLi functions identifies the user interfaces from which each one is available and provides a brief description of the function Available from K keypad N Network Port Telnet S Serial Port W Web Function F1 Time Zone Offset page 48 F2 12 24 Hour Format page 49 F3 Time amp Date page 50 F4 Serial Port Configuration page 52 F5 Time Quality Setup page 53 FG Keypad Lock page 55 F8 Continuous Time Once per Second page 56 F9 Time On Request page 58 F11 Time Output Format page 59 F13 Time Error page 61 F18 Software Version Request page 62 E27 FTM III Configuration page 63 F42 Multicode Output Configuration page 69 F44 N 8 Frequency Synthesizer page 73 F50 GPS Receiver LLA XYZ Position page 75 E51 GPS Antenna Cable Delay page 77 F52 Distribution Cable Delay page 78 XLi Time amp Frequency Sys
344. ystem Time Additionally the user can configure which data is included in the once per second output In the following paragraphs lt cr gt lt lf gt represents the carriage return and linefeed characters and single and double quotes are used to delimit character strings The single and double quotes are for text clarity and are not to be sent to the FTM F27 XLi Time amp Frequency System 65 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H To exit once per second or Time On Demand Output a C Ctrl C character must be sent to the command line All other commands automatically exit after completion The command line standard out outputs the lt CR gt character at the end of the once per second string atthe 1 PPS mark 1 millisecond Serial Port Commands F27 B lt N gt lt cr gt lt 1f gt User formatted once per second output F27 B lt N gt FS lt cr gt lt 1f gt Request user format string F27 B lt N gt FS X X X X X cr 1f Set user format string F27 B lt N gt TD lt cr gt lt 1f gt FTM data on demand output F27 B lt N gt PS lt cr gt lt 1f gt Request Time Deviation Preset value F27 B lt N gt PS 99 999 lt cr gt lt 1f gt Set Time Deviation Preset value Where B lt N gt is the option Bay Number where the FTM card is installed F27 B lt N gt lt cr gt lt If gt User formatted once per second output When the XLi receives the F27 B lt N gt lt cr gt lt lf gt string the FTM card begins sending user selected d
345. ytes written 1275 Source file etc ntp conf bytes read 1166 Dest file ntp conf bytes written 1166 Source file etc ntp keys bytes read 44 Dest file ntp keys bytes written 44 Configuration files transferred successfully Note The following steps cause the XLi to reboot Using the command line enter the commands replacing lt P Address gt with the workstation FTP server s IP address To move the NTP config files back onto the XLi type XLi Time amp Frequency System 131 XLi man Issue 8 6 17 2008 Rev H gt 100 config ntp set host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt lt CR gt To move the SNMP config file back onto the XLi type gt 100 config snmp set host lt IP Address dir lt subdir gt lt CR gt To move the NTP and SNMP config files back onto the XLi type gt 100 config ntp snmp set host lt IP Address gt dir lt subdir gt Here s an example of a successful SNMP and NTP config file transfer gt gt f100 config set ntp snmp host 192 168 0 1 dir Host config ip 192 168 0 1 already configured Are you sure y N y Source file snmp conf bytes read 1275 Dest file config snmp conf bytes written 1275 Source file ntp conf bytes read 1166 Dest file etc ntp conf bytes written 1166 Source file ntp keys bytes read 44 Dest file etc ntp keys bytes written 44 Configuration files transferred successfully Resetting After XLi receives the configuration files it reboots and goes thro

XLi Time & Frequency System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

XLi Time &amp; Frequency System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

XLi Time & Frequency System